TWI798812B - Control device and method for controlling illuminating device - Google Patents

Control device and method for controlling illuminating device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TWI798812B
TWI798812B TW110132919A TW110132919A TWI798812B TW I798812 B TWI798812 B TW I798812B TW 110132919 A TW110132919 A TW 110132919A TW 110132919 A TW110132919 A TW 110132919A TW I798812 B TWI798812 B TW I798812B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
physical parameter
range
application range
measurement value
code
Prior art date
Application number
TW110132919A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TW202201358A (en
Inventor
鍾國誠
Original Assignee
鍾國誠
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 鍾國誠 filed Critical 鍾國誠
Priority to TW110132919A priority Critical patent/TWI798812B/en
Publication of TW202201358A publication Critical patent/TW202201358A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI798812B publication Critical patent/TWI798812B/en

Links

Images

Landscapes

  • Circuit Arrangement For Electric Light Sources In General (AREA)

Abstract

A control device for controlling a variable physical parameter includes an operation unit and a sensing unit. The variable physical parameter is characterized based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measurement value application range and a physical parameter target range different from the physical parameter application range. The sensing unit senses the variable physical parameter to generate a sense signal. The operation unit obtains a measurement value in response to the sense signal under a condition that a trigger event occurs, and outputs a control signal used to cause the variable physical parameter to enter the physical parameter target range under a condition that the operation unit determines the physical parameter application range which the variable physical parameter is currently within by checking a mathematical relation between the measurement value and the measurement value application range.

Description

用於控制照明裝置的控制裝置及方法 Control device and method for controlling a lighting device

本揭露是關於一控制裝置,並特別是關於用於依靠一觸發事件而控制一可變物理參數的控制裝置及方法。 The present disclosure relates to a control device, and more particularly to a control device and method for controlling a variable physical parameter dependent on a trigger event.

一觸發事件能夠是一使用者輸入事件、一訊號輸入事件和一識別媒介出現事件的其中之一,並能夠應用於一控制裝置以控制一控制目標裝置。該控制目標裝置能夠使用一機械能、一電能和一光能的至少其中之一,並能夠包含用於一門禁管制的一電動機、用於一電力控制的一繼電器、和用於一能量轉換的一能量轉換器的其中之一。該控制裝置依靠該觸發事件而傳輸一控制訊號到該控制目標裝置以控制該控制目標裝置。為了有效地控制該控制目標裝置,該控制裝置能夠獲得基於一可變物理參數而被提供的一測量值。該控制裝置可能需要一改良的機制以有效地使用該測量值,並藉此有效地控制該控制目標裝置。 A trigger event can be one of a user input event, a signal input event and an identification medium occurrence event, and can be applied to a control device to control a control target device. The control target device can use at least one of a mechanical energy, an electric energy and a light energy, and can include a motor for an access control, a relay for an electric control, and an energy conversion One of the energy converters. The control device transmits a control signal to the control target device to control the control target device depending on the trigger event. In order to effectively control the control target device, the control device can obtain a measurement value provided based on a variable physical parameter. The control device may need an improved mechanism to effectively use the measured value and thereby effectively control the control target device.

美國第2015/0357887 A1號公開專利揭露一種製品規格設定裝置及具備其之風扇馬達。美國第7,411,505 B2號公告專利揭露一種開關狀態及射頻識別標籤。 US Publication No. 2015/0357887 A1 discloses a product specification setting device and a fan motor equipped with it. US Patent Publication No. 7,411,505 B2 discloses a switch status and radio frequency identification tag.

本揭露的一目的在於提供一種依靠一觸發事件和一感測單元而有效地控制一可變物理參數的一控制裝置及方法。 An object of the present disclosure is to provide a control device and method for effectively controlling a variable physical parameter depending on a trigger event and a sensing unit.

本揭露的一實施例在於提供一種用於控制一可變物理參數的控制裝置。該可變物理參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍和不同於該物理參數應用範圍的一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化。該控制裝置包含一感測單元和一操作單元。該感測單元感測該可變物理參數以產生一第一感測訊號。該操作單元耦合於該感測單元,在一觸發事件發生的條件下響應該第一感測訊號來獲得一第一測量值,並在該操作單元藉由檢查該第一測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一第一數學關係而確定該可變物理參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍的條件下輸出用於導致該可變物理參數進入該物理參數目標範圍的一第一控制訊號。 An embodiment of the present disclosure is to provide a control device for controlling a variable physical parameter. The variable physical parameter is characterized based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measurement application range and a physical parameter target range different from the physical parameter application range. The control device includes a sensing unit and an operating unit. The sensing unit senses the variable physical parameter to generate a first sensing signal. The operation unit is coupled to the sensing unit, and a first measurement value is obtained in response to the first sensing signal under the condition that a trigger event occurs, and the operation unit checks the first measurement value and the measurement value Outputting a first control signal for causing the variable physical parameter to enter the physical parameter target range under the condition of determining the physical parameter application range in which the variable physical parameter is currently located using a first mathematical relationship between the ranges.

本揭露的另一實施例在於提供一種用於藉由在一第一操作時間之內產生一第一控制訊號而控制一可變物理參數的方法。該可變物理參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍和不同於該物理參數應用範圍的一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化。該方法包含下列步驟:感測該可變物理參數以產生一第一感測訊號;在一觸發事件發生的條件下,響應該第一感測訊號來獲得一第一測量值;以及在該可變物理參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍藉由檢查該第一測量值和該測量值應用範圍之 間的一第一數學關係而被確定的條件下,做出用於到達該第一操作時間的一第一觸發訊號是否要被額外產生的一合理決定,該第一控制訊號用於導致該可變物理參數進入該物理參數目標範圍。 Another embodiment of the present disclosure is to provide a method for controlling a variable physical parameter by generating a first control signal within a first operation time. The variable physical parameter is characterized based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measurement application range and a physical parameter target range different from the physical parameter application range. The method comprises the steps of: sensing the variable physical parameter to generate a first sensing signal; obtaining a first measurement value in response to the first sensing signal under the condition that a trigger event occurs; Change the physical parameter application range that the physical parameter is currently in by checking the difference between the first measured value and the measured value application range Under the condition that a first mathematical relationship between is determined, a reasonable decision is made whether a first trigger signal for reaching the first operation time is to be additionally generated, the first control signal is used to cause the possible Change the physical parameter into the target range of the physical parameter.

本揭露的另一實施例在於提供一種用於控制一可變物理參數的方法。該可變物理參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍和不同於該物理參數應用範圍的一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化。該方法包含下列步驟:感測該可變物理參數以產生一第一感測訊號;在一觸發事件發生的條件下,響應該第一感測訊號來獲得一第一測量值;以及在該可變物理參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍藉由檢查該第一測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一第一數學關係而被確定的條件下,產生用於導致該可變物理參數進入該物理參數目標範圍的一第一控制訊號。 Another embodiment of the present disclosure is to provide a method for controlling a variable physical parameter. The variable physical parameter is characterized based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measurement application range and a physical parameter target range different from the physical parameter application range. The method comprises the steps of: sensing the variable physical parameter to generate a first sensing signal; obtaining a first measurement value in response to the first sensing signal under the condition that a trigger event occurs; The variable physical parameter is currently in the range of application of the physical parameter determined by examining a first mathematical relationship between the first measured value and the range of application of the measured value, generating a method for causing the variable physical parameter to enter A first control signal of the target range of the physical parameter.

210:控制裝置 210: Control device

220:讀取器 220: reader

230、331:處理單元 230, 331: processing unit

240、338:輸出單元 240, 338: output unit

240P、240Q、263P、338P、338Q:輸出端 240P, 240Q, 263P, 338P, 338Q: output terminal

246、386:通訊介面單元 246, 386: communication interface unit

247:訊號電纜 247: Signal cable

2471、2472:傳輸線 2471, 2472: transmission line

250、332:儲存單元 250, 332: storage unit

25Y1:記憶體單元 25Y1: memory unit

263:多工器 263: multiplexer

2631、2632:輸入端 2631, 2632: input terminal

263C:控制端 263C: Control terminal

270、337:輸入單元 270, 337: input unit

2701:觸控螢幕 2701: touch screen

275、276、285、286:電使用目標 275, 276, 285, 286: electricity usage target

280:伺服器 280: server

294、394:連接終端 294, 394: connection terminal

295:使用者 295: user

297、397:操作單元 297, 397: Operation unit

310:識別媒介 310: Identifying Medium

330、630:控制目標裝置 330, 630: control the target device

330K、335K:支撐部分 330K, 335K: support part

334、560:感測單元 334, 560: sensing unit

3341、3341:感測組件 3341, 3341: sensing components

335、735:功能目標 335, 735: Functional goals

3351:物理參數形成部分 3351: Formation of Physical Parameters

3355:驅動電路 3355: drive circuit

3371、3372、3374、440、442、446:輸入組件 3371, 3372, 3374, 440, 442, 446: input components

350:電子標籤 350: electronic label

360:條碼媒介 360: barcode media

370:生物識別作用媒介 370: Biometric Intermediaries

3861、450、455:輸出組件 3861, 450, 455: output components

410:網路 410: Internet

441:指向裝置 441: pointing device

460:顯示組件 460: Display components

470:功能開關 470: function switch

472:訊號產生器 472:Signal generator

475、477:狀態改變偵測器 475, 477: state change detector

539、542:定時器 539, 542: timer

70M:支撐媒介 70M: supporting medium

70U:材料層 70U: material layer

734、7341、7342:感測器類型 734, 7341, 7342: Sensor type

801:控制系統 801: Control system

8011、8012、8013、8014、8015、8016、8017、8018、8019、8020、8021、8022、8023、8024、8025、8026、8027、8028、8029、8030、8031、8032、8033、8034、8035、8036、8037、8038、8039、8040、8041、8042、8043、8044、8045、 8046、8047、8048:實施結構 8011, 8012, 8013, 8014, 8015, 8016, 8017, 8018, 8019, 8020, 8021, 8022, 8023, 8024, 8025, 8026, 8027, 8028, 8029, 8030, 8031, 8032, 8033, 8034, 8 035、 8036, 8037, 8038, 8039, 8040, 8041, 8042, 8043, 8044, 8045, 8046, 8047, 8048: implementation structure

AA11:第一資料確定操作 AA11: First data determination operation

AA12:第二資料確定操作 AA12: Second data determination operation

AA1A:資料確定 AA1A: Data Confirmation

AC1:響應區域 AC1: Response area

AD11:第一資料獲取操作 AD11: The first data acquisition operation

AD12:第二資料獲取操作 AD12: second data acquisition operation

AD1A、AD2A、AD2B、AD2C:資料獲取 AD1A, AD2A, AD2B, AD2C: data acquisition

AD21、AD22、AD23、AD24、AD25、AD26:資料獲取操作 AD21, AD22, AD23, AD24, AD25, AD26: data acquisition operation

AJ11、AZ11:物理參數應用區 AJ11, AZ11: Physical parameter application area

AP11、AP21:使用者介面區 AP11, AP21: User Interface Area

AU11、AU21:物理參數形成區 AU11, AU21: physical parameter formation area

BC1T、BC21:計數操作 BC1T, BC21: counting operation

BQ11、BU15、BU16、JU11、JU21、JU22、JW11、JW12:使用者輸入操作 BQ11, BU15, BU16, JU11, JU21, JU22, JW11, JW12: user input operation

BR11、BX11:讀取操作 BR11, BX11: Read operation

BS11:第一訊號產生操作 BS11: First signal generation operation

BS15、BS22、BY11、BY27:訊號產生操作 BS15, BS22, BY11, BY27: signal generation operation

BS21:第二訊號產生操作 BS21: second signal generation operation

BV11、BV15、BV21、ZP11、ZP12:檢查操作 BV11, BV15, BV21, ZP11, ZP12: Check operation

BZ11、ZS11:感測操作 BZ11, ZS11: Sensing operation

CC1T、CC13、CC15、CC1L、CC22:控制碼 CC1T, CC13, CC15, CC1L, CC22: control code

CD11:第一資料比較 CD11: first data comparison

CD21:第二資料比較 CD21: Second Data Comparison

CD22:第三資料比較 CD22: Third Data Comparison

CE11、CE1T、CP11、CP12:資料比較 CE11, CE1T, CP11, CP12: data comparison

CJ15、CJ1L、CJ1T、CK1T、CK12:控制資料碼 CJ15, CJ1L, CJ1T, CK1T, CK12: control data code

CL1L、CL1T、CX11:時間長度值 CL1L, CL1T, CX11: Duration value

CU11:識別媒介辨識碼 CU11: Identifying Media IDs

DB11:讀取資料 DB11: read data

DD11、DD12:額定範圍界限值 DD11, DD12: rated range limit value

DD1A:額定範圍界限值對 DD1A: rated range limit value pair

DF11:第一碼差異 DF11: First code difference

DG11、DG12、DH11、DJ17、DJ18、DJ21:輸入資料 DG11, DG12, DH11, DJ17, DJ18, DJ21: input data

DN13、DN14、DP13、DP14:候選範圍界限值 DN13, DN14, DP13, DP14: candidate range limit value

DN15:第一應用範圍界限值 DN15: first application range limit value

DN16:第二應用範圍界限值 DN16: second application range limit value

DN17、DN18、DP17、DP18:目標範圍界限值 DN17, DN18, DP17, DP18: target range limit value

DN1B、DP1B:候選範圍界限值對 DN1B, DP1B: Candidate Range Limit Value Pair

DN1L:應用範圍界限值對 DN1L: application range limit value pair

DN1T、DP1T:目標範圍界限值對 DN1T, DP1T: target range limit value pair

DN1F:預設範圍界限值對 DN1F: preset range limit value pair

DU11:物理參數資料記錄 DU11: Physical parameter data record

DX11:第二碼差異 DX11: Second code difference

DY11:編碼資料 DY11: Encoding information

EA11、ZX17、ZX1F、ZX1H2、ZX1HE、ZX1HJ、ZX1HP、ZX1HT、ZX1KJ、ZX1KX、ZX23、ZX25、ZX2A、ZX2B:資料編碼操作 EA11, ZX17, ZX1F, ZX1H2, ZX1HE, ZX1HJ, ZX1HP, ZX1HT, ZX1KJ, ZX1KX, ZX23, ZX25, ZX2A, ZX2B: data encoding operation

EC22、EC2T、FF11、FF12、FE2T、FJ1L、FJ1T、FK11、 FK12、FN1T、FS1T、FS12、FX12:記憶體位址 EC22, EC2T, FF11, FF12, FE2T, FJ1L, FJ1T, FK11, FK12, FN1T, FS1T, FS12, FX12: memory address

EF11:時間值參考範圍碼 EF11: time value reference range code

EF12:時間值參考範圍碼、時間值候選範圍碼 EF12: time value reference range code, time value candidate range code

EF1T:時間值目標範圍碼 EF1T: time value target range code

EM11、EM17:測量值參考範圍碼 EM11, EM17: measurement value reference range code

EM12:測量值參考範圍碼、測量值候選範圍碼 EM12: measured value reference range code, measured value candidate range code

EM14、EM15:特定測量值範圍碼 EM14, EM15: specific measurement value range code

EM1F:預設測量值範圍碼 EM1F: preset measurement value range code

EM1L:測量值應用範圍碼 EM1L: Measuring value application range code

EM1T:測量值目標範圍碼 EM1T: Measured value target range code

EQ11:觸發事件 EQ11: Triggering Events

EX11:應用環境 EX11: Application environment

FC11:觸發應用功能 FC11: Trigger application function

FN1L:第一記憶體位址 FN1L: first memory address

FR11:拘束條件 FR11: Constraints

FU11:感測器規格 FU11: Sensor Specifications

FW11、FW21:定時器規格 FW11, FW21: Timer specification

FX1L:第二記憶體位址 FX1L: Second memory address

FY11:編碼影像 FY11: Coding video

GC12:第二物理參數候選範圍表示 GC12: The second physical parameter candidate range representation

GC131、GC151、GC1T1、GC221:物理參數表示 GC131, GC151, GC1T1, GC221: physical parameter representation

GC17、GC1F:物理參數候選範圍表示 GC17, GC1F: Candidate Range Representation of Physical Parameters

GC1E:額定物理參數範圍表示 GC1E: Indicates the range of rated physical parameters

GC1H2、GC1HT:時間候選區間表示 GC1H2, GC1HT: time candidate interval representation

GC1HE:額定時間區間表示 GC1HE: Rated time interval representation

GC1HJ:時間長度參考範圍表示 GC1HJ: time length reference range representation

GC1HP:時間參考區間表示 GC1HP: time reference interval representation

GC1KJ、GC1KX:時間長度表示 GC1KJ, GC1KX: time length representation

GC1L:物理參數應用範圍表示 GC1L: Representation of the application range of physical parameters

GC1T:第一物理參數候選範圍表示 GC1T: First physical parameter candidate range representation

GCL1:觸發應用功能規格 GCL1: Trigger Application Functional Specifications

GD1ET、RD1ET:物理參數目標範圍 GD1ET, RD1ET: physical parameter target range

GD1E2、RD1E7、RD2E2:物理參數候選範圍 GD1E2, RD1E7, RD2E2: Candidate range of physical parameters

GF11:時間控制 GF11: Time Control

GJ11:時間長度值參考範圍 GJ11: Reference range of time length value

GP11:時間值參考範圍 GP11: Time value reference range

GP12:時間值參考範圍、時間值候選範圍 GP12: time value reference range, time value candidate range

GP1T:時間值目標範圍 GP1T: Time value target range

GS11、GS21、GS22、GY11:訊號產生控制 GS11, GS21, GS22, GY11: signal generation control

GU11:確保操作 GU11: Ensure operation

GW11:感測器靈敏度表示 GW11: Sensor sensitivity indication

GW1R:感測器測量範圍表示 GW1R: Indication of sensor measurement range

HA0T:控制裝置識別符 HA0T: Control device identifier

HA1T、HA12:控制目標裝置識別符 HA1T, HA12: control target device identifier

HA2T、HA22:功能目標識別符 HA2T, HA22: Functional Object Identifier

HF11:感測訊號產生 HF11: Sensing signal generation

HH11:指定測量值格式 HH11: Specifies the measured value format

HJ11:時間長度參考範圍 HJ11: Time length reference range

HK11、HK21:控制資料碼類型識別符 HK11, HK21: control data code type identifier

HN11:測量範圍界限資料碼類型識別符 HN11: Measuring range limit data code type identifier

HP1E:額定時間區間 HP1E: rated time interval

HP1E1:時間參考區間 HP1E1: Time reference interval

HP1E2:時間參考區間、時間候選區間 HP1E2: time reference interval, time candidate interval

HP1ET:時間目標區間 HP1ET: Time Target Interval

HP1N:額定時間值範圍 HP1N: Nominal time value range

HQ21、HQ23、HQ25:指定計數值格式 HQ21, HQ23, HQ25: Specifies the count value format

HS11:物理參數指定範圍碼類型識別符 HS11: physical parameter specified range code type identifier

HU11:識別媒介識別符 HU11: Identifying Media Identifiers

HZ11、HZ12、HZ2T、HZ22:電使用目標識別符 HZ11, HZ12, HZ2T, HZ22: electric use target identifier

JA1A、JB1A、QG1A、QG2A、QL1A、QU1A、QY1A:可變物理參數 JA1A, JB1A, QG1A, QG2A, QL1A, QU1A, QY1A: variable physical parameters

JN11:測量值序列 JN11: Measured value sequence

KC1A:第一範圍關係 KC1A: first scope relationship

KC2A:第二範圍關係 KC2A: Second Scope Relationship

KJ11:數值關係 KJ11: numerical relationship

KK21、KK22、KV15、KV1W、KV2W、WP11、WP12:數學關係 KK21, KK22, KV15, KV1W, KV2W, WP11, WP12: Mathematical Relations

KP11:算術關係 KP11: Arithmetic Relations

KV11:第一數學關係 KV11: First Mathematical Relations

KV21:第二數學關係 KV21: Second Mathematical Relations

KV22:第三數學關係 KV22: Third Mathematical Relations

KW11:數值交集關係 KW11: Numerical intersection relationship

LB11:第一狀態指示 LB11: The first status indication

LB12:第二狀態指示 LB12: Second status indicator

LF1A、LF2A:可變時間長度 LF1A, LF2A: variable time length

LJ1L、LJ1T、LX11:參考時間長度 LJ1L, LJ1T, LX11: reference time length

LN1A:時間長度範圍界限值對 LN1A: time length range limit value pair

LT1T、LT21:應用時間長度 LT1T, LT21: Application time length

LY11:測量資訊 LY11: Measurement Information

ME11、MK12、MN11、MN12、MQ15、MQ16、MR15、MR16、MY11:科學計算 ME11, MK12, MN11, MN12, MQ15, MQ16, MR15, MR16, MY11: Scientific Computing

MR11:第一科學計算 MR11: First Scientific Computing

MR21:第三科學計算 MR21: Third Scientific Computing

MZ11:第二科學計算 MZ11: Second Scientific Computing

NA1A:資料確定程序 NA1A: Data Determination Procedures

ND1A:資料獲取程序 ND1A: Data Acquisition Procedures

NP11、NP12:特定計數值 NP11, NP12: specific count value

NT11:總參考範圍數目 NT11: Total number of reference ranges

PB11:第一邏輯決定 PB11: First logical decision

PB21:第二邏輯決定 PB21: Second logical decision

PB22:第三邏輯決定 PB22: Third logical decision

PD11:第一特定決定 PD11: First Specific Decision

PE11、PP11、PP12:邏輯決定 PE11, PP11, PP12: logical decision

PF11、PF12、PF2T、PJ1L、PJ1T、PK11、PK12、PN12、PS12、PS1T、PX12、XC22、XC2T:記憶體位置 PF11, PF12, PF2T, PJ1L, PJ1T, PK11, PK12, PN12, PS12, PS1T, PX12, XC22, XC2T: memory location

PN1L:第一記憶體位置 PN1L: First memory location

PW11:合理決定 PW11: Reasonable decision

PW21:第二特定決定 PW21: Second specific decision

PX1L:第二記憶體位置 PX1L: Second memory location

QB11:預設時間參考區間順序 QB11: Preset time reference interval sequence

QD13、QD15、QD1L、QD1T、QD22:指定物理參數 QD13, QD15, QD1L, QD1T, QD22: Specify physical parameters

QU11:第三特定物理參數 QU11: The third specific physical parameter

QU13:第一特定物理參數 QU13: The first specific physical parameter

QU14:第二特定物理參數 QU14: Second Specific Physical Parameter

RB1E:感測器測量範圍 RB1E: Sensor measuring range

RD1E:額定物理參數範圍 RD1E: Rated physical parameter range

RD1E1:物理參數參考範圍 RD1E1: Reference range of physical parameters

RD1E2:物理參數參考範圍、第一物理參數候選範圍 RD1E2: physical parameter reference range, first physical parameter candidate range

RD1E3:第二物理參數候選範圍 RD1E3: The second physical parameter candidate range

RD1E4:第一特定物理參數範圍 RD1E4: The first specific physical parameter range

RD1E5:第二特定物理參數範圍 RD1E5: Second Specific Physical Parameter Range

RD1EF:預設物理參數範圍 RD1EF: preset range of physical parameters

RD1EL:物理參數應用範圍 RD1EL: Application range of physical parameters

RD1N:額定測量值範圍 RD1N: Rated measurement range

RN11:測量值參考範圍 RN11: Reference range of measured values

RN12:測量值參考範圍、測量值候選範圍 RN12: Measured value reference range, measured value candidate range

RN1F:預設測量值範圍 RN1F: preset measurement value range

RN1L:測量值應用範圍 RN1L: Application range of measured values

RN1T:測量值目標範圍 RN1T: Measured value target range

RN17:測量值候選範圍 RN17: Measured value candidate range

RX1L、RX1T:對應測量值範圍 RX1L, RX1T: corresponding measurement value range

RY1EL、RY1ET:對應物理參數範圍 RY1EL, RY1ET: Corresponding physical parameter range

SA1:記憶體空間 SA1: memory space

SB11:物理參數訊號 SB11: Physical parameter signal

SC11:第一控制訊號 SC11: The first control signal

SC12:第二控制訊號 SC12: Second control signal

SC15、SC27、SC31、SF11、SH11、SV11、SV12:控制訊號 SC15, SC27, SC31, SF11, SH11, SV11, SV12: control signal

SC22:第三控制訊號 SC22: The third control signal

SE21:請求回應訊號 SE21: request response signal

SG11、SG27:功能訊號 SG11, SG27: function signal

SJ11、SJ12:感測請求訊號 SJ11, SJ12: sensing request signal

SK11、SK12:時鐘時間訊號 SK11, SK12: clock time signal

SL11:驅動訊號 SL11: Drive signal

SM17、SM18:輸入訊號 SM17, SM18: input signal

SN11:第一感測訊號 SN11: The first sensing signal

SN111、SN112:感測訊號分量 SN111, SN112: sensing signal components

SN12:第二感測訊號 SN12: Second sensing signal

SP11:電訊號 SP11: Electrical Signals

SQ11:光訊號 SQ11: Optical signal

SS11:儲存空間 SS11: storage space

ST11、SX11:觸發訊號 ST11, SX11: trigger signal

SZ11、SZ21、SZ22:操作請求訊號 SZ11, SZ21, SZ22: operation request signal

TD01、TG12、TX12:指定時間 TD01, TG12, TX12: specified time

TD11:第一操作時間 TD11: First operation time

TD21:第二操作時間 TD21: Second operating time

TH1A:時鐘時間 TH1A: clock time

TJ1T:特定時間 TJ1T: specific time

TK11、TK21:控制資料碼類型 TK11, TK21: control data code type

TL11、TU11、TU1G:物理參數類型 TL11, TU11, TU1G: physical parameter type

TN11:測量範圍界限資料碼類型 TN11: Measuring range limit data code type

TS11:物理參數指定範圍碼類型 TS11: Physical parameter specified range code type

TZ1T、TZ21:結束時間 TZ1T, TZ21: end time

UD11:物理參數指定範圍碼 UD11: Specified range code for physical parameters

UD12:物理參數指定範圍碼、物理參數候選範圍碼 UD12: physical parameter specified range code, physical parameter candidate range code

UD1T、UN1T:物理參數目標範圍碼 UD1T, UN1T: physical parameter target range code

UH1T:中斷請求訊號 UH1T: interrupt request signal

UL11、UL21:預設特徵物理參數 UL11, UL21: preset characteristic physical parameters

UN1A:可變物理參數範圍碼 UN1A: variable physical parameter range code

UW11:特定輸入碼 UW11: specific input code

UX21、UX23、UX25、UY11:指定位元數目 UX21, UX23, UX25, UY11: specify the number of bits

VA11、VK11、VK12:相對值 VA11, VK11, VK12: relative values

VG11:可允許值 VG11: allowable value

VN11:第一測量值 VN11: first measured value

VN12:第二測量值 VN12: second measured value

WC1L:第二寫入請求訊息 WC1L: Second write request message

WD1L:第一寫入請求訊息 WD1L: first write request message

WJ11:電應用目標 WJ11: Electrical application target

WS12、WS1T:寫入請求訊息 WS12, WS1T: Write request message

WX11:第一觸發訊號 WX11: The first trigger signal

WX21:第二觸發訊號 WX21: Second trigger signal

XA11:非特徵物理參數到達狀態 XA11: Arrival status of non-characteristic physical parameters

XA12:實際特徵物理參數到達狀態 XA12: Actual Characteristic Physical Parameter Arrival Status

XA1A:可變物理狀態 XA1A: variable physical state

XJ11:第一特定狀態 XJ11: the first specific state

XJ12:第二特定狀態 XJ12: Second specific state

XR11:特定經驗公式 XR11: Specific Empirical Formulas

XU11、XU21:操作參考資料 XU11, XU21: Operation Reference

YJ11:選擇工具 YJ11: Selection tool

YU11:預設資料導出規則 YU11: Default data export rules

YW11:感測器靈敏度 YW11: Sensor sensitivity

ZA11:第一指定應用操作 ZA11: The first designated application operation

ZA21:第二指定應用操作 ZA21: Second designated application operation

ZD1T1、ZD1T2:預設物理參數目標範圍界限 ZD1T1, ZD1T2: preset physical parameter target range limit

ZF11:物理參數應用操作 ZF11: Physical parameter application operation

ZH11:指定功能操作 ZH11: Specified function operation

ZL12、ZL22:特徵物理參數到達 ZL12, ZL22: arrival of characteristic physical parameters

ZU11:驗證操作 ZU11: verify operation

ZX11:第一資料編碼操作 ZX11: first data encoding operation

ZX12:第二資料編碼操作 ZX12: second data encoding operation

ZX13:第四資料編碼操作 ZX13: Fourth data encoding operation

ZX14:第五資料編碼操作 ZX14: fifth data encoding operation

ZX21:第三資料編碼操作 ZX21: third data encoding operation

ZY11:第一檢查操作 ZY11: First check operation

ZY21:第二檢查操作 ZY21: Second check operation

本揭露得藉由下列圖式之詳細說明,俾得更深入之瞭解: This disclosure can be understood more deeply through the detailed description of the following diagrams:

第1圖:為在本揭露各式各樣實施例中一控制系統的示意圖。 FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a control system in various embodiments of the present disclosure.

第2圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 2: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.

第3圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 3: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.

第4圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構 的示意圖。 Figure 4: An implementation structure of the control system shown in Figure 1 schematic diagram.

第5圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 5: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.

第6圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 6: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1 .

第7圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 7: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1 .

第8圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 8: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1 .

第9圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 9: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1 .

第10圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 10: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1 .

第11圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in FIG. 1 .

第12圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 12: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.

第13圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 13: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.

第14圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 14: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1 .

第15圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 15: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.

第16圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 16: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1 .

第17圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 17: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1 .

第18圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 18: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1 .

第19圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 19: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1 .

第20圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 20: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.

第21圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 21: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.

第22圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 22: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.

第23圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 23: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.

第24圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 24: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1 .

第25圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 25: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.

第26圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 26: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1 .

第27圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 27: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1 .

第28圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 28: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1 .

第29圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結 構的示意圖。 Fig. 29: An implementation result of the control system shown in Fig. 1 Schematic diagram of the structure.

第30圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 30 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1 .

第31圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 31: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.

第32圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 32: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1 .

第33圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 33: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.

第34圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 34: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1 .

第35圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 35: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1 .

第36圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 36: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1 .

第37圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 37: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1 .

第38圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 38: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1 .

第39圖:為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統的一實施結構的示意圖。 Fig. 39: is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1 .

請參閱第1圖,其為在本揭露各式各樣實施例中一控制系統801的示意圖。該控制系統801包含一控制目標裝置330和用於控制該控制目標裝置330的一控制 裝置210。該控制目標裝置330具有一可變物理參數QU1A。該可變物理參數QU1A基於由一測量值應用範圍RN1L所代表的一物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和不同於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的一物理參數目標範圍RD1ET而被特徵化。用於控制該可變物理參數QU1A的該控制裝置210包含一感測單元334和一操作單元297。 Please refer to FIG. 1 , which is a schematic diagram of a control system 801 in various embodiments of the present disclosure. The control system 801 includes a control target device 330 and a control device for controlling the control target device 330 device 210. The control target device 330 has a variable physical parameter QU1A. The variable physical parameter QU1A is characterized based on a physical parameter application range RD1EL represented by a measurement value application range RN1L and a physical parameter target range RD1ET different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL. The control device 210 for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A includes a sensing unit 334 and an operating unit 297 .

該感測單元334感測該可變物理參數QU1A以產生一第一感測訊號SN11。該操作單元297耦合於該感測單元334,在一觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下響應該第一感測訊號SN11來獲得一第一測量值VN11,並在該操作單元297藉由檢查該第一測量值VN11和該測量值應用範圍RN1L之間的一第一數學關係KV11而確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下輸出用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的一第一控制訊號SC11。 The sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a first sensing signal SN11 . The operating unit 297 is coupled to the sensing unit 334, and responds to the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain a first measurement value VN11 under the condition that a trigger event EQ11 occurs, and the operating unit 297 obtains a first measured value VN11 by checking the first A first mathematical relationship KV11 between the measured value VN11 and the measured value application range RN1L is used to determine that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the physical parameter application range RD1EL and output it to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter A first control signal SC11 of the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

請參閱第2圖。第2圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8011的示意圖。如第2圖所示,該實施結構8011包含該控制裝置210和該控制目標裝置330。在一些實施例中,該第一控制訊號SC11用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL以進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET由一測量值目標範圍RN1T所代表,並相同或不同於一第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2。例如,該測量值目標範圍RN1T具有一目標範圍界限值對DN1T。該目標範圍界限值對DN1T被預設。該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和不同 於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2皆包含於複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…中。 See Figure 2. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8011 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in FIG. 2 , the implementation structure 8011 includes the control device 210 and the control target device 330 . In some embodiments, the first control signal SC11 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter application range RD1EL and enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET. The physical parameter target range RD1ET is represented by a measured value target range RN1T, and is the same as or different from a first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2. For example, the measured value target range RN1T has a target range limit value pair DN1T. The target range limit is preset for DN1T. The physical parameters apply to different ranges of RD1EL and The first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 in the physical parameter application range RD1EL is included in a plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . .

該感測單元334被配置以符合與該測量值應用範圍RN1L相關的一感測器規格FU11。例如,該感測器規格FU11包含用於表示一感測器靈敏度YW11的一感測器靈敏度表示GW11。該感測器靈敏度YW11相關於由該感測單元334所執行的一感測訊號產生HF11。該第一測量值VN11以一指定測量值格式HH11而被該操作單元297獲得。 The sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with a sensor specification FU11 associated with the measurement application range RN1L. For example, the sensor specification FU11 includes a sensor sensitivity representation GW11 for representing a sensor sensitivity YW11. The sensor sensitivity YW11 is related to a sensing signal generated HF11 performed by the sensing unit 334 . The first measurement value VN11 is obtained by the operation unit 297 in a specified measurement value format HH11.

該測量值應用範圍RN1L和代表該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2的一測量值候選範圍RN12皆基於該感測器靈敏度表示GW11來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。該測量值應用範圍RN1L具有一應用範圍界限值對DN1L。例如,該應用範圍界限值對DN1L被預設。該測量值候選範圍RN12具有一候選範圍界限值對DN1B。例如,該候選範圍界限值對DN1B被預設。 Both the measured value application range RN1L and a measured value candidate range RN12 representing the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 are preset in the designated measured value format HH11 based on the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 . The measured value application range RN1L has an application range limit value pair DN1L. For example, the application range limit value is preset for DN1L. The measurement value candidate range RN12 has a candidate range limit value pair DN1B. For example, the candidate range limit value is preset for DN1B.

該操作單元297響應該觸發事件EQ11來獲得該應用範圍界限值對DN1L,並藉由比較該第一測量值VN11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L來檢查該第一數學關係KV11。該操作單元297響應該觸發事件EQ11來獲得所預設的該目標範圍界限值對DN1T和基於在該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的一指定物理參數QD1T而被預先設定的一控制資料碼CK1T,並基於所獲得的該控制資料碼CK1T來執行一訊號產生控制GS11以輸出該第一控制訊號SC11。 The operating unit 297 obtains the application range limit value pair DN1L in response to the trigger event EQ11, and checks the first mathematical relationship KV11 by comparing the first measurement value VN11 with the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L. The operating unit 297 responds to the trigger event EQ11 to obtain the preset target range limit value pair DN1T and a preset control data code CK1T based on a specified physical parameter QD1T within the physical parameter target range RD1ET, And execute a signal generation control GS11 based on the obtained control data code CK1T to output the first control signal SC11.

在一些實施例中,該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL被配置以對應於在該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL之外的一對應物理參數範圍RY1EL。在該操作單元297藉由檢查該第一數學關係KV11而確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該對應物理參數範圍RY1EL的條件下,該操作單元297被配置以獲得所預設的該候選範圍界限值對DN1B,並執行該第一測量值VN11和所獲得的該候選範圍界限值對DN1B之間的一資料比較CD21。 In some embodiments, the physical parameter application range RD1EL is configured to correspond to a corresponding physical parameter range RY1EL outside the physical parameter application range RD1EL. Under the condition that the operation unit 297 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the corresponding physical parameter range RY1EL by checking the first mathematical relationship KV11, the operation unit 297 is configured to obtain the preset candidate range limit value pair DN1B, and perform a data comparison CD21 between the first measured value VN11 and the obtained candidate range limit value pair DN1B.

在該操作單元297基於該資料比較CD21而確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2的條件下,該操作單元297輸出不同於該第一控制訊號SC11的一第二控制訊號SC12。該第二控制訊號SC12用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2以進入包含於該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…中的一第二物理參數候選範圍RD1E3。 Under the condition that the operation unit 297 determines the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in based on the data comparison CD21, the operation unit 297 outputs a second control signal different from the first control signal SC11. Control signal SC12. The second control signal SC12 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 to enter a second physical parameter candidate range RD1E3 included in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . .

在該操作單元297於一操作時間TD11之內執行該訊號產生控制GS11之後,該感測單元334感測該可變物理參數QU1A以產生一第二感測訊號SN12。該操作單元297於該操作時間TD11之後的一指定時間TG12之內響應該第二感測訊號SN12來以該指定測量值格式HH11獲得一第二測量值VN12。在該操作單元297於該指定時間TG12之內藉由比較該第二測量值VN12和所獲得的該目標範圍界限值對DN1T來確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的條件下,該操作單元297執 行一確保操作GU11,該確保操作GU11用於導致代表所確定的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的一物理參數目標範圍碼UN1T被記錄。 After the operation unit 297 executes the signal generation control GS11 within an operation time TD11 , the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a second sensing signal SN12 . The operation unit 297 responds to the second sensing signal SN12 within a specified time TG12 after the operation time TD11 to obtain a second measurement value VN12 in the specified measurement value format HH11. Within the specified time TG12, the operation unit 297 determines the physical parameter target range RD1ET where the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located by comparing the second measured value VN12 with the obtained target range limit value pair DN1T. condition, the operating unit 297 executes Perform a guarantee operation GU11, which is used to cause a physical parameter target range code UN1T representing the determined physical parameter target range RD1ET to be recorded.

在一些實施例中,該可變物理參數QU1A相關於一可變時間長度LF1A。例如,該操作單元297用於測量該可變時間長度LF1A。該可變時間長度LF1A基於一時間長度參考範圍HJ11和一參考時間長度LJ1T而被特徵化。該時間長度參考範圍HJ11由一時間長度值參考範圍GJ11所代表。該參考時間長度LJ1T由一時間長度值CL1T所代表。所獲得的該控制資料碼CK1T包含該時間長度值CL1T。該操作單元297檢查該時間長度值CL1T和該時間長度值參考範圍GJ11之間的一數值關係KJ11以做出用於控制一特定時間TJ1T的一計數操作BC1T是否要被執行的一邏輯決定PE11。在該邏輯決定PE11是肯定的條件下,該操作單元297基於該時間長度值CL1T來執行該計數操作BC1T。 In some embodiments, the variable physical parameter QU1A is associated with a variable time length LF1A. For example, the operation unit 297 is used to measure the variable time length LF1A. The variable time length LF1A is characterized based on a time length reference range HJ11 and a reference time length LJ1T. The time length reference range HJ11 is represented by a time length value reference range GJ11. The reference time length LJ1T is represented by a time length value CL1T. The obtained control data code CK1T includes the time length value CL1T. The operation unit 297 checks a numerical relationship KJ11 between the time length value CL1T and the time length value reference range GJ11 to make a logical decision PE11 whether a counting operation BC1T for controlling a specific time TJ1T is to be executed. On the condition that the logic decision PE11 is positive, the operation unit 297 executes the counting operation BC1T based on the time length value CL1T.

在該可變物理參數QU1A由於該觸發事件EQ11而被配置以於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的條件下,該操作單元297基於該計數操作BC1T來到達該特定時間TJ1T,並在該特定時間TJ1T之內產生不同於該第一控制訊號SC11的一第三控制訊號SC22。該第三控制訊號SC22用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET以進入該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL。 Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET due to the trigger event EQ11, the operating unit 297 reaches the specific time TJ1T based on the counting operation BC1T, and at the specific time A third control signal SC22 different from the first control signal SC11 is generated inside the TJ1T. The third control signal SC22 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the physical parameter application range RD1EL.

請參閱第3圖、第4圖、第5圖、第6圖和第7圖。第3圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一 實施結構8012的示意圖。第4圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8013的示意圖。第5圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8014的示意圖。第6圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8015的示意圖。第7圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8016的示意圖。如第3圖、第4圖、第5圖、第6圖和第7圖所示,該實施結構8012、該實施結構8013、該實施結構8014、該實施結構8015和該實施結構8016的每一結構包含該控制裝置210和該控制目標裝置330。 See pictures 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7. Figure 3 is a diagram of the control system 801 shown in Figure 1 Schematic diagram of implementation structure 8012. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8013 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8014 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8015 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8016 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in Figure 3, Figure 4, Figure 5, Figure 6 and Figure 7, each of the implementation structure 8012, the implementation structure 8013, the implementation structure 8014, the implementation structure 8015 and the implementation structure 8016 The structure includes the control device 210 and the control target device 330 .

請額外參閱第1圖。在一些實施例中,該操作單元297被配置以執行與該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL相關的一觸發應用功能FC11,並包含耦合於該感測單元334的一處理單元230、和耦合於該處理單元230的一輸出單元240。該觸發應用功能FC11被配置以符合與該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL相關的一觸發應用功能規格GCL1。該感測單元334被配置以符合與該測量值應用範圍RN1L相關的一感測器規格FU11。 Please also refer to Figure 1. In some embodiments, the operation unit 297 is configured to execute a trigger application function FC11 related to the physical parameter application range RD1EL, and includes a processing unit 230 coupled to the sensing unit 334, and a processing unit coupled to the processing unit An output unit 240 of 230 . The trigger application function FC11 is configured to comply with a trigger application function specification GCL1 related to the physical parameter application range RD1EL. The sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with a sensor specification FU11 associated with the measurement application range RN1L.

例如,該感測器規格FU11包含用於表示一感測器靈敏度YW11的一感測器靈敏度表示GW11。該感測器靈敏度YW11相關於由該感測單元334所執行的一感測訊號產生HF11。例如,當該觸發事件EQ11發生時,該感測單元334感測該可變物理參數QU1A以執行相依於該感測器靈敏度YW11的該感測訊號產生HF11,該感測訊號產生HF11用於產生該第一感測訊號SN11。 For example, the sensor specification FU11 includes a sensor sensitivity representation GW11 for representing a sensor sensitivity YW11. The sensor sensitivity YW11 is related to a sensing signal generated HF11 performed by the sensing unit 334 . For example, when the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to perform the sensing signal generation HF11 dependent on the sensor sensitivity YW11, and the sensing signal generation HF11 is used to generate The first sensing signal SN11.

在該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該處理 單元230響應該第一感測訊號SN11來以該指定測量值格式HH11獲得該第一測量值VN11。例如,該指定測量值格式HH11基於一指定位元數目UY11而被特徵化。在該處理單元230確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下,該處理單元230導致該輸出單元240輸出該第一控制訊號SC11。該可變物理參數QU1A進一步基於一額定物理參數範圍RD1E而被特徵化。例如,該額定物理參數範圍RD1E由一額定測量值範圍RD1N所代表,並包含由複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…所分別代表的複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…。 Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the process The unit 230 obtains the first measured value VN11 in the designated measured value format HH11 in response to the first sensing signal SN11 . For example, the specified measurement value format HH11 is characterized based on a specified bit number UY11. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to output the first control signal SC11. The variable physical parameter QU1A is further characterized based on a nominal physical parameter range RD1E. For example, the rated physical parameter range RD1E is represented by a rated measured value range RD1N, and includes a plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . represented by multiple different measured value reference ranges RN11, RN12, .

該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET皆包含於該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…中。該觸發應用功能規格GCL1包含該感測器規格FU11、用於表示該額定物理參數範圍RD1E的一額定物理參數範圍表示GC1E、和用於表示該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的一物理參數應用範圍表示GC1L。 Both the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter target range RD1ET are contained in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1 , RD1E2 , . . . The trigger application function specification GCL1 includes the sensor specification FU11, a rated physical parameter range representation GC1E for representing the rated physical parameter range RD1E, and a physical parameter application range representation GC1L for representing the physical parameter application range RD1EL .

在一些實施例中,該額定測量值範圍RD1N基於該額定物理參數範圍表示GC1E、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和用於轉換該額定物理參數範圍表示GC1E的一第一資料編碼操作ZX11來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設,具有一額定範圍界限值對DD1A,並包含由複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…所分別代表的該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…。例如,該額定範圍界限值對DD1A用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。該 複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…包含該測量值應用範圍RN1L。 In some embodiments, the nominal range of measured values RD1N is used based on the nominal physical parameter range representation GC1E, the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and a first data encoding operation ZX11 for converting the nominal physical parameter range representation GC1E to the It is preset by specifying the measured value format HH11, has a rated range limit value pair DD1A, and includes the plural different measured value reference ranges RN11, RN12, ... represented by the complex different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ... . For example, the nominal range limit pair DD1A is preset with the specified measurement value format HH11. Should A plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, . . . include the measurement value application range RN1L.

該測量值應用範圍RN1L由包含於該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…中的一測量值應用範圍碼EM1L所代表,並具有一應用範圍界限值對DN1L;藉此該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L被配置以指示該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL。例如,該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…皆基於該觸發應用功能規格GCL1而被預設。 The measured value application range RN1L is represented by a measured value application range code EM1L contained in the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ..., and has an application range limit value pair DN1L; thereby the measured value application The range code EM1L is configured to indicate that the physical parameter applies to the range RD1EL. For example, the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . . are all preset based on the trigger application function specification GCL1.

該應用範圍界限值對DN1L包含該測量值應用範圍RN1L的一第一應用範圍界限值DN15和相對於該第一應用範圍界限值DN15的一第二應用範圍界限值DN16,並基於該物理參數應用範圍表示GC1L、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和用於轉換該物理參數應用範圍表示GC1L的一第二資料編碼操作ZX12來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。該測量值應用範圍RN1L基於該物理參數應用範圍表示GC1L、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和該第二資料編碼操作ZX12來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。 The application range limit value pair DN1L comprises a first application range limit value DN15 of the measured value application range RN1L and a second application range limit value DN16 relative to the first application range limit value DN15, and is applied based on the physical parameter The range representation GC1L, the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and a second data encoding operation ZX12 for converting the physical parameter application range representation GC1L are preset with the specified measurement value format HH11. The measured value application range RN1L is preset with the specified measured value format HH11 based on the physical parameter application range representation GC1L, the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and the second data encoding operation ZX12.

在一些實施例中,該控制裝置210進一步包含耦合於該處理單元230的一儲存單元250。該儲存單元250儲存所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A和一可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。當該觸發事件EQ11發生時,該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A等於選擇自該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…的一特定測量值範圍碼EM14。 In some embodiments, the control device 210 further includes a storage unit 250 coupled to the processing unit 230 . The storage unit 250 stores the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A and a variable physical parameter range code UN1A. When the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the variable physical parameter range code UN1A is equal to a specific measured value range code EM14 selected from the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . .

例如,該特定測量值範圍碼EM14指示基於一感測操作ZS11而被該處理單元230先前確定的一第一特定物理參數範圍RD1E4。該第一特定物理參數範圍RD1E4選擇自該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…。由該感測單元334所執行的該感測操作ZS11用於感測該可變物理參數QU1A。在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該特定測量值範圍碼EM14被指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。 For example, the specific measurement value range code EM14 indicates a first specific physical parameter range RD1E4 previously determined by the processing unit 230 based on a sensing operation ZS11 . The first specific physical parameter range RD1E4 is selected from the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . The sensing operation ZS11 performed by the sensing unit 334 is used to sense the variable physical parameter QU1A. Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the specific measured value range code EM14 is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.

例如,在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230獲得該特定測量值範圍碼EM14。在該處理單元230於該觸發事件EQ11發生之前基於該感測操作ZS11而確定該第一特定物理參數範圍RD1E4的條件下,該處理單元230藉由使用該儲存單元250來將所獲得的該特定測量值範圍碼EM14指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。該特定測量值範圍碼EM14代表被配置以代表該第一特定物理參數範圍RD1E4的一特定測量值範圍。該特定測量值範圍基於該感測器靈敏度表示GW11來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。例如,該感測單元334藉由執行該感測操作ZS11來執行相依於該感測器靈敏度YW11的一感測訊號產生以產生一感測訊號。 For example, before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 obtains the specific measurement value range code EM14. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the first specific physical parameter range RD1E4 based on the sensing operation ZS11 before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 uses the storage unit 250 to obtain the specific The measured value range code EM14 is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A. The specific measurement value range code EM14 represents a specific measurement value range configured to represent the first specific physical parameter range RD1E4. The specific measurement value range is preset with the specified measurement value format HH11 based on the sensor sensitivity indication GW11. For example, the sensing unit 334 performs a sensing signal generation dependent on the sensor sensitivity YW11 by performing the sensing operation ZS11 to generate a sensing signal.

在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230接收該感測訊號,響應該感測訊號來以該指定測量值格式HH11獲得一特定測量值,並執行用於檢查該特定測量值和該特定測量值範圍之間的一數學關係的一特定檢查操作。在該處理單元230基於該特定檢查操作而確定該可變 物理參數QU1A處於的該第一特定物理參數範圍RD1E4的條件下,該處理單元230藉由使用該儲存單元250來將所獲得的該特定測量值範圍碼EM14指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。該處理單元230響應用於感測該可變物理參數QU1A的一特定感測操作來決定該處理單元230是否要使用該儲存單元250以改變該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。例如,該特定感測操作由該感測單元334所執行。 Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 receives the sensing signal, obtains a specific measurement value in the specified measurement value format HH11 in response to the sensing signal, and executes a method for checking the specific measurement value and the specific measurement value A specific checking operation for a mathematical relationship between ranges of values. In the processing unit 230 it is determined based on the specific checking Under the condition that the physical parameter QU1A is in the first specific physical parameter range RD1E4, the processing unit 230 assigns the obtained specific measured value range code EM14 to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A by using the storage unit 250 . The processing unit 230 determines whether the processing unit 230 will use the storage unit 250 to change the variable physical parameter range code UN1A in response to a specific sensing operation for sensing the variable physical parameter QU1A. For example, the specific sensing operation is performed by the sensing unit 334 .

在一些實施例中,在該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11來從該儲存單元250獲得一操作參考資料碼XU11,並藉由運行一資料確定程序NA1A來執行使用該操作參考資料碼XU11的一資料確定AA1A以確定選擇自該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L以便從該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…中選擇該測量值應用範圍RN1L。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 responds to the trigger event EQ11 to obtain an operation reference data code XU11 from the storage unit 250, and execute it by running a data determination program NA1A Use a data of the operation reference data code XU11 to determine AA1A to determine the measured value application range code EM1L selected from the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . . ... select the range RN1L for which the measured value applies.

該操作參考資料碼XU11相同於基於該觸發應用功能規格GCL1而被預設的一可允許參考資料碼。該資料確定程序NA1A基於該觸發應用功能規格GCL1而被建構。該資料確定AA1A是一第一資料確定操作AA11和一第二資料確定操作AA12的其中之一。在該操作參考資料碼XU11藉由存取被儲存在該儲存單元250中的該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A而被獲得以相同於該特定測量值範圍碼EM14的條件下,是該第一資料確定操作AA11的該資料確定AA1A基於所獲得的該特定測量值範圍碼EM14來確定該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L。例如,所確定的該測量值應 用範圍碼EM1L相同或不同於所獲得的該特定測量值範圍碼EM14。 The operation reference code XU11 is the same as an allowable reference code preset based on the trigger application function specification GCL1. The data determination program NA1A is constructed based on the trigger application function specification GCL1. The data determination AA1A is one of a first data determination operation AA11 and a second data determination operation AA12. Under the condition that the operation reference data code XU11 is obtained by accessing the variable physical parameter range code UN1A stored in the storage unit 250 to be the same as the specific measured value range code EM14, it is the first data The profile determination AA1A of determining operation AA11 determines the measurement application range code EM1L based on the obtained specific measurement range code EM14. For example, the measured value determined should be Use the range code EM1L to be the same as or different from the range code EM14 obtained for this particular measured value.

在該操作參考資料碼XU11藉由存取被儲存在該儲存單元250中的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A而被獲得以相同於所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A的條件下,是該第二資料確定操作AA12的該資料確定AA1A藉由執行使用該第一測量值VN11和所獲得的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A的一第一科學計算MR11來從該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…中選擇該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L以確定該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L。例如,該第一科學計算MR11基於一特定經驗公式XR11而被執行。該特定經驗公式XR11基於所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A和該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…而被預先制定。例如,該特定經驗公式XR11基於該觸發應用功能規格GCL1而被預先制定。 Under the condition that the operation reference data code XU11 is obtained by accessing the pair of rated range limit values DD1A stored in the storage unit 250 so as to be the same as the preset pair of rated range limit values DD1A, it is the The data determination AA1A of the second data determination operation AA12 references range code EM11 from the plurality of different measured values by performing a first scientific calculation MR11 using the first measured value VN11 and the obtained pair of nominal range limit values DD1A , EM12, ... select the measurement value application range code EM1L to determine the measurement value application range code EM1L. For example, the first scientific calculation MR11 is performed based on a specific empirical formula XR11. The specific empirical formula XR11 is pre-established based on the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A and the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11 , EM12 , . . . . For example, the specific empirical formula XR11 is pre-established based on the triggering application function specification GCL1.

在一些實施例中,該處理單元230基於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L來獲得該應用範圍界限值對DN1L,並基於該第一測量值VN11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L之間的一第一資料比較CD11來檢查該第一數學關係KV11以做出該第一測量值VN11是否為於所選擇的該測量值應用範圍RN1L之內的一第一邏輯決定PB11。在該第一邏輯決定PB11是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL。 In some embodiments, the processing unit 230 obtains the application range limit value pair DN1L based on the determined application range code EM1L of the measurement value, and obtains the application range limit value pair DN1L based on the first measurement value VN11 and the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L A first data comparison CD11 between them checks the first mathematical relationship KV11 to make a first logical decision PB11 whether the first measurement value VN11 is within the selected application range RN1L of the measurement value. On the condition that the first logic decision PB11 is affirmative, the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RD1EL where the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located.

例如,在該第一應用範圍界限值DN15不同 於該第二應用範圍界限值DN16且該第一測量值VN11是於該第一應用範圍界限值DN15和該第二應用範圍界限值DN16之間的條件下,該處理單元230藉由比較該第一測量值VN11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L來做出該第一邏輯決定PB11以成為肯定的。在該第一應用範圍界限值DN15、該第二應用範圍界限值DN16和該第一測量值VN11是相等的條件下,該處理單元230藉由比較該第一測量值VN11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L來做出該第一邏輯決定PB11以成為肯定的。 For example, in this first application range limit value DN15 is different Under the condition that the second application range limit value DN16 and the first measurement value VN11 are between the first application range limit value DN15 and the second application range limit value DN16, the processing unit 230 compares the first A measured value VN11 and the obtained application range limit value are paired with DN1L to make the first logical decision PB11 to be affirmative. Under the condition that the first application range limit value DN15, the second application range limit value DN16 and the first measurement value VN11 are equal, the processing unit 230 compares the first measurement value VN11 with the obtained application The first logical decision PB11 is made affirmative for the range limit pair DN1L.

在一些實施例中,該可變物理參數QU1A存在於一控制目標裝置330中。該觸發事件EQ11是一觸發作用事件、一使用者輸入事件、一訊號輸入事件、一狀態改變事件和一識別媒介出現事件的其中之一,並被應用到該觸發應用功能FC11。在是該觸發作用事件的該觸發事件EQ11要發生的條件下,該控制目標裝置330被配置以執行與該可變物理參數QU1A相關的一指定功能操作ZH11。例如,該指定功能操作ZH11用於導致該觸發作用事件發生。該觸發應用功能規格GCL1進一步包含一物理參數表示GC1T1。該物理參數表示GC1T1用於表示在該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的一指定物理參數QD1T。 In some embodiments, the variable physical parameter QU1A exists in a control target device 330 . The trigger event EQ11 is one of a trigger action event, a user input event, a signal input event, a state change event and a recognition medium occurrence event, and is applied to the trigger application function FC11. Under the condition that the triggering event EQ11 that is the triggering action event will occur, the control target device 330 is configured to execute a specified functional operation ZH11 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A. For example, the specified functional operation ZH11 is used to cause the triggering event to occur. The trigger application function specification GCL1 further includes a physical parameter representation GC1T1. The physical parameter representation GC1T1 is used to represent a specified physical parameter QD1T within the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

該觸發應用功能FC11相關於一記憶體單元25Y1。該記憶體單元25Y1具有一第一記憶體位置PN1L和不同於該第一記憶體位置PN1L的一第二記憶體位置PX1L,在該第一記憶體位置PN1L儲存該應用範圍界限值對DN1L,並在該第二記憶體位置PX1L儲存一控制資料碼 CK1T。例如,該第一記憶體位置PN1L和該第二記憶體位置PX1L皆基於所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L而被識別。該控制資料碼CK1T包含一控制碼CC1T。例如,該控制碼CC1T基於該物理參數表示GC1T1和用於轉換該物理參數表示GC1T1的一第三資料編碼操作ZX21而被預設。例如,該應用範圍界限值對DN1L和該控制資料碼CK1T皆基於所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L而被該記憶體單元25Y1儲存。 The trigger application function FC11 is associated with a memory unit 25Y1. The memory unit 25Y1 has a first memory location PN1L and a second memory location PX1L different from the first memory location PN1L, the application range limit value pair DN1L is stored in the first memory location PN1L, and Store a control data code in the second memory location PX1L CK1T. For example, both the first memory location PN1L and the second memory location PX1L are identified based on the preset measurement value application range code EM1L. The control data code CK1T includes a control code CC1T. For example, the control code CC1T is preset based on the physical parameter representation GC1T1 and a third data encoding operation ZX21 for converting the physical parameter representation GC1T1. For example, both the application range limit pair DN1L and the control data code CK1T are stored in the memory unit 25Y1 based on the preset measurement value application range code EM1L.

在一些實施例中,該處理單元230藉由運行一資料獲取程序ND1A來執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L的一資料獲取AD1A以獲得該應用範圍界限值對DN1L。例如,該資料獲取AD1A是一第一資料獲取操作AD11和一第二資料獲取操作AD12的其中之一。該資料獲取程序ND1A基於該觸發應用功能規格GCL1而被建構。該第一資料獲取操作AD11基於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該第一記憶體位置PN1L的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L以獲得該應用範圍界限值對DN1L。 In some embodiments, the processing unit 230 executes a data acquisition AD1A using the determined measurement value application range code EM1L to obtain the application range limit value pair DN1L by running a data acquisition program ND1A. For example, the data acquisition AD1A is one of a first data acquisition operation AD11 and a second data acquisition operation AD12. The data acquisition program ND1A is constructed based on the trigger application function specification GCL1. The first data acquisition operation AD11 uses the memory unit 25Y1 to access the application range limit value pair DN1L stored in the first memory location PN1L based on the determined measurement value application range code EM1L to obtain the application Range cutoffs to DN1L.

該第二資料獲取操作AD12藉由讀取被儲存在該儲存單元250中的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A來取得所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A,並藉由執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L和所取得的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A的一第二科學計算MZ11來獲得該應用範圍界限值對DN1L。例如,該額定範圍界限值對DD1A包含該額定測量值範圍RD1N的一額定範圍界限值DD11和相對 於該額定範圍界限值DD11的一額定範圍界限值DD12,並基於該額定物理參數範圍表示GC1E、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和該第一資料編碼操作ZX11來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。 The second data acquisition operation AD12 obtains the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A by reading the rated range limit value pair DD1A stored in the storage unit 250, and by executing the determined using the The measured value application range code EM1L and a second scientific calculation MZ11 of the obtained rated range limit value pair DD1A are used to obtain the application range limit value pair DN1L. For example, the nominal range limit value pair DD1A contains a nominal range limit value DD11 and the relative A nominal range limit value DD12 at the nominal range limit value DD11, based on the nominal physical parameter range representation GC1E, the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and the first data encoding operation ZX11 using the specified measurement value format HH11 default.

在該處理單元230確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下,該處理單元230基於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該第二記憶體位置PX1L的該控制資料碼CK1T,並基於所存取的該控制資料碼CK1T來執行用於該觸發應用功能FC11的一訊號產生控制GS11以控制該輸出單元240。該輸出單元240響應該訊號產生控制GS11來執行用於該觸發應用功能FC11的一第一訊號產生操作BS11以產生該第一控制訊號SC11。例如,該第一控制訊號SC11輸送該控制碼CC1T,並用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL以進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。 Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the processing unit 230 uses the memory unit 25Y1 to access based on the determined measurement value application range code EM1L The control data code CK1T is stored in the second memory location PX1L, and a signal generation control GS11 for the trigger application function FC11 is executed based on the accessed control data code CK1T to control the output unit 240 . The output unit 240 responds to the signal generation control GS11 to execute a first signal generation operation BS11 for the trigger application function FC11 to generate the first control signal SC11. For example, the first control signal SC11 conveys the control code CC1T and is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter application range RD1EL and enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

在一些實施例中,該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…進一步包含不同於該測量值應用範圍RN1L的一測量值目標範圍RN1T。該觸發應用功能規格GCL1進一步包含用於表示該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的一第一物理參數候選範圍表示GC1T。該測量值目標範圍RN1T由不同於該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L的一測量值目標範圍碼EM1T所代表,具有一目標範圍界限值對DN1T,並被配置以代表該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET;藉此該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T被配置以指示該物理參數目標範圍 RD1ET。 In some embodiments, the plurality of different measured value reference ranges RN11 , RN12 , . . . further include a measured value target range RN1T different from the measured value application range RN1L. The trigger application function specification GCL1 further includes a first physical parameter candidate range representation GC1T for representing the physical parameter target range RD1ET. The measured value target range RN1T is represented by a measured value target range code EM1T different from the measured value application range code EM1L, has a target range limit value pair DN1T, and is configured to represent the physical parameter target range RD1ET; thereby The measured value target range code EM1T is configured to indicate the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

例如,該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T包含於該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…中。該目標範圍界限值對DN1T基於該第一物理參數候選範圍表示GC1T、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和用於轉換該第一物理參數候選範圍表示GC1T的一第四資料編碼操作ZX13來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。該測量值目標範圍RN1T基於該第一物理參數候選範圍表示GC1T、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和該第四資料編碼操作ZX13來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。 For example, the measured value target range code EM1T is included in the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . . The target range limit pair DN1T uses the specification based on the first physical parameter candidate range representation GC1T, the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and a fourth data encoding operation ZX13 for converting the first physical parameter candidate range representation GC1T The measured value format HH11 is preset. The measured value target range RN1T is preset with the designated measured value format HH11 based on the first physical parameter candidate range representation GC1T, the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and the fourth data encoding operation ZX13.

該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…具有一總參考範圍數目NT11。例如,該總參考範圍數目NT11基於該觸發應用功能規格GCL1而被預設。該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11來獲得該總參考範圍數目NT11。該第一科學計算MR11進一步使用所獲得的該總參考範圍數目NT11。該第二科學計算MZ11進一步使用所獲得的該總參考範圍數目NT11。例如,該總參考範圍數目大於或等於2。例如,該總參考範圍數目NT11≧3;該總參考範圍數目NT11≧4;該總參考範圍數目NT11≧5;該總參考範圍數目NT11≧6;且該總參考範圍數目NT11≦255。 The plurality of different measured value reference ranges RN11, RN12, . . . has a total reference range number NT11. For example, the total reference range number NT11 is preset based on the trigger application function specification GCL1. The processing unit 230 obtains the total reference range number NT11 in response to the trigger event EQ11 . The first scientific calculation MR11 further uses the obtained total reference range number NT11. The second scientific calculation MZ11 further uses the obtained total reference range number NT11. For example, the total number of reference ranges is greater than or equal to two. For example, the total number of reference ranges NT11≧3; the total number of reference ranges NT11≧4; the total number of reference ranges NT11≧5; the total number of reference ranges NT11≧6; and the total number of reference ranges NT11≦255.

該控制目標裝置330接收該第一控制訊號SC11,從所接收的該第一控制訊號SC11獲得該控制碼CC1T,並基於所獲得的該控制碼CC1T來導致該可變物理參數QU1A從一第一特定物理參數QU13改變成一第二特定物理參數QU14。例如,該第一特定物理參數QU13是於 該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL之內。該第二特定物理參數QU14是於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內。例如,該控制目標裝置330耦合於該輸出單元240。該控制目標裝置330設置於該控制裝置210上,或由該控制裝置210所支撐。 The control target device 330 receives the first control signal SC11, obtains the control code CC1T from the received first control signal SC11, and causes the variable physical parameter QU1A to change from a first The specific physical parameter QU13 is changed to a second specific physical parameter QU14. For example, the first specific physical parameter QU13 is then This physical parameter applies within the range RD1EL. The second specific physical parameter QU14 is within the physical parameter target range RD1ET. For example, the control target device 330 is coupled to the output unit 240 . The control target device 330 is disposed on the control device 210 or supported by the control device 210 .

在一些實施例中,該測量值應用範圍RN1L是該額定測量值範圍RD1N的一第一部分。該測量值目標範圍RN1T是該額定測量值範圍RD1N的一第二部分。該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET是分開的或相鄰的。在該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET是分開的條件下,該測量值應用範圍RN1L和該測量值目標範圍RN1T是分開的。在該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET是相鄰的條件下,該測量值應用範圍RN1L和該測量值目標範圍RN1T是相鄰的。 In some embodiments, the measurement application range RN1L is a first part of the nominal measurement range RD1N. The measured value target range RN1T is a second part of the nominal measured value range RD1N. The physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter target range RD1ET are separate or adjacent. On the condition that the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter target range RD1ET are separate, the measurement value application range RN1L and the measurement value target range RN1T are separate. On the condition that the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter target range RD1ET are adjacent, the measurement value application range RN1L and the measurement value target range RN1T are adjacent.

例如,該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L被配置以等於一整數。該額定範圍界限值DD12大於該額定範圍界限值DD11。該額定範圍界限值DD12和該額定範圍界限值DD11之間具有相對於該額定範圍界限值DD11的一相對值VA11。該相對值VA11等於該額定範圍界限值DD12減去該額定範圍界限值DD11的一計算結果。例如,該應用範圍界限值對DN1L基於該額定範圍界限值DD11、該額定範圍界限值DD12、該整數、和該相對值VA11對於該總參考範圍數目NT11的一比率而被預設。該第二科學計算MZ11使用該額定範圍界限值DD11、該額定範圍界限值DD12、該整數、該比率和其任意組合的其中之一。 For example, the measurement value application range code EM1L is configured to be equal to an integer. The setpoint range limit value DD12 is greater than the setpoint range limit value DD11 . There is a relative value VA11 between the rated range limit value DD12 and the rated range limit value DD11 relative to the rated range limit value DD11 . The relative value VA11 is equal to a calculation result obtained by subtracting the rated range limit value DD11 from the rated range limit value DD11 . For example, the application range limit pair DN1L is preset based on the nominal range limit DD11, the nominal range limit DD12, the integer, and a ratio of the relative value VA11 to the total reference range number NT11. The second scientific calculation MZ11 uses one of the rated range limit value DD11, the rated range limit value DD12, the integer, the ratio and any combination thereof.

該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET相同或不同於包含於該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…中的一第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2。例如,該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2不同於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL。該觸發應用功能規格GCL1進一步包含用於表示該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2的一第二物理參數候選範圍表示GC12。該測量值候選範圍RN12由不同於該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L的一測量值候選範圍碼EM12所代表,具有一候選範圍界限值對DN1B,並被配置以代表該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2;藉此該測量值候選範圍碼EM12被配置以指示該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2。 The physical parameter target range RD1ET is the same as or different from a first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 included in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . . For example, the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 is different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL. The triggered application function specification GCL1 further includes a second physical parameter candidate range representation GC12 for representing the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2. The measured value candidate range RN12 is represented by a measured value candidate range code EM12 different from the measured value application range code EM1L, has a candidate range limit value pair DN1B, and is configured to represent the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2; thereby The measurement value candidate range code EM12 is configured to indicate the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2.

例如,該候選範圍界限值對DN1B基於該第二物理參數候選範圍表示GC12、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和用於轉換該第二物理參數候選範圍表示GC12的的一第五資料編碼操作ZX14來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。該測量值候選範圍RN12基於該第二物理參數候選範圍表示GC12、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和該第五資料編碼操作ZX14來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。 For example, the candidate range limit pair DN1B is based on the second physical parameter candidate range representation GC12, the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and a fifth data encoding operation ZX14 for converting the second physical parameter candidate range representation GC12 Preset with the specified measurement value format HH11. The measured value candidate range RN12 is preset with the designated measured value format HH11 based on the second physical parameter candidate range representation GC12 , the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and the fifth data encoding operation ZX14 .

在一些實施例中,在該第一邏輯決定PB11是否定的條件下,該處理單元230藉由執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L的一第三科學計算MR21來確定選擇自該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…的該測量值候選範圍碼EM12以便從該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…中選擇該測量值候選範圍RN12。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the first logic decision PB11 is negative, the processing unit 230 determines the selection from the complex number by performing a third scientific calculation MR21 using the determined measurement value application range code EM1L. The measured value candidate range code EM12 of the different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . . selects the measured value candidate range RN12 from the plurality of different measured value reference ranges RN11, RN12, .

該處理單元230基於所確定的該測量值候 選範圍碼EM12來獲得該候選範圍界限值對DN1B,並基於該第一測量值VN11和所獲得的該候選範圍界限值對DN1B之間的一第二資料比較CD21來檢查該第一測量值VN11和所選擇的該測量值候選範圍RN12之間的一第二數學關係KV21以做出該第一測量值VN11是否為於所選擇的該測量值候選範圍RN12之內的一第二邏輯決定PB21。在該第二邏輯決定PB21是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2。 The processing unit 230 based on the determined measured value Select the range code EM12 to obtain the candidate range limit value pair DN1B, and check the first measurement value VN11 based on a second data comparison CD21 between the first measurement value VN11 and the obtained candidate range limit value pair DN1B and a second mathematical relationship KV21 between the selected candidate measurement value range RN12 to make a second logical decision PB21 whether the first measurement value VN11 is within the selected measurement value candidate range RN12. On the condition that the second logic decision PB21 is positive, the processing unit 230 determines the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 where the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located.

在該處理單元230確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2的條件下,該處理單元230導致該輸出單元240執行用於該觸發應用功能FC11的一第二訊號產生操作BS21以產生不同於該第一控制訊號SC11的一第二控制訊號SC12。該第二控制訊號SC12用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2以進入包含於該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…中的一第二物理參數候選範圍RD1E3。 Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to execute a second signal generation for the trigger application function FC11 The BS21 is operated to generate a second control signal SC12 different from the first control signal SC11. The second control signal SC12 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 to enter a second physical parameter candidate range RD1E3 included in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . .

在一些實施例中,在該處理單元230於一操作時間TD11之內執行該訊號產生控制GS11之後,該感測單元334感測該可變物理參數QU1A以產生一第二感測訊號SN12。例如,在該處理單元230執行該訊號產生控制GS11之後,該感測單元334感測該可變物理參數QU1A以執行相依於該感測器靈敏度YW11的一感測訊號產生HF12,該感測訊號產生HF12用於產生該第二感測訊號 SN12。 In some embodiments, after the processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS11 within an operation time TD11 , the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a second sensing signal SN12 . For example, after the processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS11, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to perform a sensing signal generation HF12 dependent on the sensor sensitivity YW11, the sensing signal Generate HF12 for generating the second sensing signal SN12.

該處理單元230於該操作時間TD11之後的一指定時間TG12之內響應該第二感測訊號SN12來以該指定測量值格式HH11獲得一第二測量值VN12。在該處理單元230執行該訊號產生控制GS11的條件下,該處理單元230基於所存取的該控制資料碼CK1T和所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L的其中之一來確定該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T以確定該測量值目標範圍RN1T。 The processing unit 230 responds to the second sensing signal SN12 within a specified time TG12 after the operating time TD11 to obtain a second measurement value VN12 in the specified measurement value format HH11. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS11, the processing unit 230 determines the measurement value target based on one of the accessed control data code CK1T and the determined measurement value application range code EM1L range code EM1T to determine the measurement target range RN1T.

該處理單元230基於所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T來獲得該目標範圍界限值對DN1T,並基於該第二測量值VN12和所獲得的該目標範圍界限值對DN1T之間的一第三資料比較CD22來檢查該第二測量值VN12和所確定的該測量值目標範圍RN1T之間的一第三數學關係KV22以做出該第二測量值VN12是否為於所確定的該測量值目標範圍RN1T之內的一第三邏輯決定PB22。在該第三邏輯決定PB22是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230於該指定時間TG12之內確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。 The processing unit 230 obtains the target range limit value pair DN1T based on the determined measured value target range code EM1T, and based on a third difference between the second measured value VN12 and the obtained target range limit value pair DN1T Data comparison CD22 checks a third mathematical relationship KV22 between the second measurement value VN12 and the determined measurement value target range RN1T to make whether the second measurement value VN12 is within the determined measurement value target range A third logic within RN1T determines PB22. On the condition that the third logical decision PB22 is positive, the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter target range RD1ET where the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently within the specified time TG12.

在該特定測量值範圍碼EM14不同於所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T且該處理單元230藉由做出該第三邏輯決定PB22而確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的條件下,該處理單元230基於等於該特定測量值範圍碼EM14的該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A和所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T之間的一第一碼差異DF11來使用該儲存單元250以將所確定的 該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。 The specific measured value range code EM14 is different from the determined measured value target range code EM1T and the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter target at which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located by making the third logical decision PB22 Under the condition of range RD1ET, the processing unit 230 uses based on a first code difference DF11 between the variable physical parameter range code UN1A equal to the specific measured value range code EM14 and the determined measured value target range code EM1T The storage unit 250 will determine the The measured value target range code EM1T is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.

當該觸發事件EQ11發生時,該輸出單元240顯示一第一狀態指示LB11。例如,該第一狀態指示LB11用於指示該可變物理參數QU1A被配置於該第一特定物理參數範圍RD1E4之內的一第一特定狀態XJ11。在該特定測量值範圍碼EM14不同於所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T且該處理單元230藉由做出該第三邏輯決定PB22而確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的條件下,該處理單元230進一步基於該第一碼差異DF11來導致該輸出單元240將該第一狀態指示LB11改變成一第二狀態指示LB12。例如,該第二狀態指示LB12用於指示該可變物理參數QU1A被配置於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的一第二特定狀態XJ12。 When the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the output unit 240 displays a first state indication LB11. For example, the first state indicator LB11 is used to indicate a first specific state XJ11 in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured within the first specific physical parameter range RD1E4. The specific measured value range code EM14 is different from the determined measured value target range code EM1T and the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter target at which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located by making the third logical decision PB22 Under the condition of the range RD1ET, the processing unit 230 further causes the output unit 240 to change the first status indicator LB11 to a second status indicator LB12 based on the first code difference DF11. For example, the second state indicator LB12 is used to indicate a second specific state XJ12 in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured within the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

在一些實施例中,該操作單元297進一步包含一響應區域AC1、一讀取器220和一輸入單元270。該響應區域AC1用於執行該觸發應用功能FC11。該讀取器220耦合於該響應區域AC1。該輸入單元270耦合於該處理單元230。在該觸發事件EQ11是該識別媒介出現事件且該處理單元230通過該讀取器220而辨識了出現於該響應區域AC1的一識別媒介310的條件下,該處理單元230基於該第一感測訊號SN11來獲得該第一測量值VN11。 In some embodiments, the operation unit 297 further includes a response area AC1 , a reader 220 and an input unit 270 . The response area AC1 is used to execute the triggered application function FC11. The reader 220 is coupled to the response area AC1. The input unit 270 is coupled to the processing unit 230 . Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 is the occurrence event of the identification medium and the processing unit 230 recognizes an identification medium 310 appearing in the response area AC1 through the reader 220, the processing unit 230 based on the first sensing Signal SN11 to obtain the first measured value VN11.

在該可變物理參數QU1A由於該觸發事件EQ11而被配置於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的條件下,該輸入單元270接收一使用者輸入操作BQ11,並響應 該使用者輸入操作BQ11來導致該處理單元230確定一特定輸入碼UW11。例如,該特定輸入碼UW11選擇自該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…。 Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured within the physical parameter target range RD1ET due to the trigger event EQ11, the input unit 270 receives a user input operation BQ11, and responds The user input operation BQ11 causes the processing unit 230 to determine a specific input code UW11. For example, the specific input code UW11 is selected from the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . .

在一些實施例中,在該特定輸入碼UW11不同於所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的條件下,該處理單元230基於等於所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A和該特定輸入碼UW11之間的一第二碼差異DX11來通過該輸出單元240而導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET以進入包含於該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…中的一第二特定物理參數範圍RD1E5。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the specific input code UW11 is different from the preset measurement value target range code EM1T, the processing unit 230 is based on the variable physical value equal to the determined measurement value target range code EM1T. A second code difference DX11 between the parameter range code UN1A and the specific input code UW11 passes through the output unit 240 causing the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the plurality of different physical parameter references A second specific physical parameter range RD1E5 in the ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . .

在該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該感測單元334感測處於一拘束條件FR11的該可變物理參數QU1A以提供該第一感測訊號SN11到該處理單元230。例如,該拘束條件FR11是該可變物理參數QU1A等於包含於該額定物理參數範圍RD1E中的一第三特定物理參數QU11。該處理單元230基於該第一感測訊號SN11來估計該第三特定物理參數QU11以獲得該第一測量值VN11。由於處於該拘束條件FR11的該可變物理參數QU1A是於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL之內,該處理單元230辨識該第一測量值VN11為於該測量值應用範圍RN1L之內的一可允許值,藉此辨識該第一測量值VN11和該測量值應用範圍RN1L之間的該第一數學關係KV11為一數值交集關係,並藉此確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL。 Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A under a constraint condition FR11 to provide the first sensing signal SN11 to the processing unit 230 . For example, the constraint condition FR11 is that the variable physical parameter QU1A is equal to a third specific physical parameter QU11 included in the rated physical parameter range RD1E. The processing unit 230 estimates the third specific physical parameter QU11 based on the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain the first measured value VN11. Since the variable physical parameter QU1A under the constraint condition FR11 is within the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the processing unit 230 identifies the first measurement value VN11 as an allowable value within the measurement value application range RN1L , thereby identifying the first mathematical relationship KV11 between the first measured value VN11 and the measured value application range RN1L as a numerical intersection relationship, and thereby determining the physical parameter application range where the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located RD1EL.

在一些實施例中,該感測單元334基於與該感測訊號產生HF11相關的該感測器靈敏度YW11而被特徵化,並被配置以符合該感測器規格FU11。該感測器規格FU11包含用於表示該感測器靈敏度YW11的該感測器靈敏度表示GW11、和用於表示一感測器測量範圍RB1E的一感測器測量範圍表示GW1R。例如,該額定物理參數範圍RD1E被配置以相同於該感測器測量範圍RB1E,或被配置以是該感測器測量範圍RB1E的一部分。該感測器測量範圍RB1E相關於由該感測單元334所執行的一物理參數感測。該感測器測量範圍表示GW1R基於一第一預設測量單位而被提供。例如,該第一預設測量單位是一公制測量單位和一英制測量單位的其中之一。 In some embodiments, the sensing unit 334 is characterized based on the sensor sensitivity YW11 associated with the sensing signal generation HF11 and is configured to comply with the sensor specification FU11. The sensor specification FU11 includes the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 for representing the sensor sensitivity YW11 and a sensor measurement range representation GW1R for representing a sensor measurement range RB1E. For example, the nominal physical parameter range RD1E is configured to be identical to the sensor measurement range RB1E, or configured to be a part of the sensor measurement range RB1E. The sensor measurement range RB1E is related to a physical parameter sensing performed by the sensing unit 334 . The sensor measurement range indicates that GW1R is provided based on a first preset measurement unit. For example, the first preset measurement unit is one of a metric measurement unit and an imperial measurement unit.

該額定測量值範圍RD1N和該額定範圍界限值對DD1A皆基於該額定物理參數範圍表示GC1E、該感測器測量範圍表示GW1R、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和該第一資料編碼操作ZX11來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。該測量值應用範圍RN1L和該應用範圍界限值對DN1L皆基於該物理參數應用範圍表示GC1L、該感測器測量範圍表示GW1R、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和該第二資料編碼操作ZX12來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。該測量值目標範圍RN1T和該目標範圍界限值對DN1T皆基於該第一物理參數候選範圍表示GC1T、該感測器測量範圍表示GW1R、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和該第四資料編碼操作ZX13來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。 The rated measurement value range RD1N and the rated range limit value pair DD1A are based on the rated physical parameter range indicating GC1E, the sensor measuring range indicating GW1R, the sensor sensitivity indicating GW11 and the first data encoding operation ZX11. The specified measurement value format is HH11 and is preset. The measurement value application range RN1L and the application range limit value pair DN1L are based on the physical parameter application range representation GC1L, the sensor measurement range representation GW1R, the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and the second data encoding operation ZX12. The specified measurement value format is HH11 and is preset. The measured value target range RN1T and the target range threshold pair DN1T are based on the first physical parameter candidate range representation GC1T, the sensor measurement range representation GW1R, the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and the fourth data encoding operation ZX13 to be preset with the specified measurement value format HH11.

該測量值候選範圍RN12和該候選範圍界限 值對DN1B皆基於該第二物理參數候選範圍表示GC12、該感測器測量範圍表示GW1R、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和該第五資料編碼操作ZX14來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。該額定物理參數範圍表示GC1E、該物理參數應用範圍表示GC1L、該物理參數表示GC1T1、該第一物理參數候選範圍表示GC1T和該第二物理參數候選範圍表示GC12皆基於一第二預設測量單位而被提供。例如,該第二預設測量單位是一公制測量單位和一英制測量單位的其中之一,並相同或不同於該第一預設測量單位。 The measured value candidate range RN12 and the candidate range limit The value pair DN1B is pre-predicted with the designated measurement value format HH11 based on the second physical parameter candidate range representation GC12, the sensor measurement range representation GW1R, the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and the fifth data encoding operation ZX14 set up. The rated physical parameter range represents GC1E, the physical parameter application range represents GC1L, the physical parameter represents GC1T1, the first physical parameter candidate range represents GC1T, and the second physical parameter candidate range represents GC12 are all based on a second preset measurement unit and was provided. For example, the second default measurement unit is one of a metric measurement unit and an imperial measurement unit, and is the same as or different from the first default measurement unit.

該可變物理參數QU1A進一步基於該感測器測量範圍RB1E而被特徵化。例如,該感測器測量範圍表示GW1R、該額定物理參數範圍表示GC1E、該物理參數應用範圍表示GC1L、該第一物理參數候選範圍表示GC1T、該第二物理參數候選範圍表示GC12和該物理參數表示GC1T1皆屬於十進制資料類型。該第一測量值VN11、該第二測量值VN12、該額定範圍界限值對DD1A、該應用範圍界限值對DN1L、該目標範圍界限值對DN1T、該候選範圍界限值對DN1B和該控制碼CC1T皆屬於該二進制資料類型,並皆適用於電腦處理。該感測器規格FU11和該觸發應用功能規格GCL1皆被預設。 The variable physical parameter QU1A is further characterized based on the sensor measurement range RB1E. For example, the sensor measurement range represents GW1R, the rated physical parameter range represents GC1E, the physical parameter application range represents GC1L, the first physical parameter candidate range represents GC1T, the second physical parameter candidate range represents GC12 and the physical parameter Indicates that GC1T1 belongs to the decimal data type. The first measured value VN11, the second measured value VN12, the pair of nominal range limit values DD1A, the pair of application range limit values DN1L, the pair of target range limit values DN1T, the pair of candidate range limit values DN1B and the control code CC1T All belong to the binary data type, and are suitable for computer processing. Both the sensor specification FU11 and the trigger application function specification GCL1 are preset.

在一些實施例中,該第一記憶體位置PN1L基於一第一記憶體位址FN1L而被識別。該第一記憶體位址FN1L基於所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L而被預設。該第二記憶體位置PX1L基於一第二記憶體位址FX1L而被識別。該第二記憶體位址FX1L基於所預設的該測量 值應用範圍碼EM1L而被預設。 In some embodiments, the first memory location PN1L is identified based on a first memory address FN1L. The first memory address FN1L is preset based on the preset measurement value application range code EM1L. The second memory location PX1L is identified based on a second memory address FX1L. The second memory address FX1L is based on the preset measurement Values are preset using range code EM1L.

在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230被配置以取得所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L、所預設的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L和所預設的該控制資料碼CK1T,並基於所取得的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L來獲得該第一記憶體位址FN1L。在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230基於所取得的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L和所獲得的該第一記憶體位址FN1L來導致該操作單元297提供輸送所取得的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L和所獲得的該第一記憶體位址FN1L的一第一寫入請求訊息WD1L。例如,該第一寫入請求訊息WD1L用於導致該記憶體單元25Y1在該第一記憶體位置PN1L儲存所輸送的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L。 Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the preset measurement value application range code EM1L, the preset application range limit value pair DN1L and the preset control data code CK1T, And apply the range code EM1L based on the acquired measurement value to obtain the first memory address FN1L. Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 causes the operation unit 297 to provide the acquired application range limit value based on the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L and the obtained first memory address FN1L A first write request message WD1L to DN1L and the obtained first memory address FN1L. For example, the first write request message WD1L is used to cause the memory unit 25Y1 to store the transmitted application range limit value pair DN1L in the first memory location PN1L.

在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230基於所取得的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L來獲得該第二記憶體位址FX1L,並基於所取得的該控制資料碼CK1T和所獲得的該第二記憶體位址FX1L來導致該操作單元297提供輸送所取得的該控制資料碼CK1T和所獲得的該第二記憶體位址FX1L的一第二寫入請求訊息WC1L。例如,該第二寫入請求訊息WC1L用於導致該記憶體單元25Y1在該第二記憶體位置PX1L儲存所輸送的該控制資料碼CK1T。該控制裝置210耦合於一伺服器280。該識別媒介310是一電子標籤350、一條碼媒介360和一生物識別作用媒介370的其中之一。該電子標籤350、該儲存單元250和該伺服器280的其中之一中包含該記憶體單元25Y1。 Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 applies the range code EM1L to obtain the second memory address FX1L based on the obtained measurement value, and obtains the second memory address FX1L based on the obtained control data code CK1T and the obtained second The memory address FX1L causes the operation unit 297 to provide a second write request message WC1L for conveying the obtained control data code CK1T and the obtained second memory address FX1L. For example, the second write request message WC1L is used to cause the memory unit 25Y1 to store the transmitted control data code CK1T in the second memory location PX1L. The control device 210 is coupled to a server 280 . The identification medium 310 is one of an electronic tag 350 , a barcode medium 360 and a biometric identification medium 370 . One of the electronic tag 350 , the storage unit 250 and the server 280 includes the memory unit 25Y1 .

請參閱第1圖、第2圖、第3圖、第4圖、第5圖和第6圖。一種用於控制一可變物理參數QU1A的方法MT10被揭露。該可變物理參數QU1A基於由一測量值應用範圍RN1L所代表的一物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和不同於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的一物理參數目標範圍RD1ET而被特徵化。該方法MT10包含下列步驟:感測該可變物理參數QU1A以產生一第一感測訊號SN11;在一觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,響應該第一感測訊號SN11來獲得一第一測量值VN11;以及在該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL藉由檢查該第一測量值VN11和該測量值應用範圍RN1L之間的一第一數學關係KV11而被確定的條件下,產生用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的一第一控制訊號SC11。 Please refer to Figure 1, Figure 2, Figure 3, Figure 4, Figure 5 and Figure 6. A method MT10 for controlling a variable physical parameter QU1A is disclosed. The variable physical parameter QU1A is characterized based on a physical parameter application range RD1EL represented by a measurement value application range RN1L and a physical parameter target range RD1ET different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL. The method MT10 includes the following steps: sensing the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a first sensing signal SN11; under the condition that a trigger event EQ11 occurs, obtaining a first measurement value in response to the first sensing signal SN11 VN11; and under the condition that the physical parameter application range RD1EL in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located is determined by examining a first mathematical relationship KV11 between the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L , generating a first control signal SC11 for causing the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

在一些實施例中,該第一控制訊號SC11用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL以進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET由一測量值目標範圍RN1T所代表,並相同或不同於一第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2。例如,該測量值目標範圍RN1T具有一目標範圍界限值對DN1T。該目標範圍界限值對DN1T被預設。該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和不同於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2皆包含於複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…中。 In some embodiments, the first control signal SC11 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter application range RD1EL and enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET. The physical parameter target range RD1ET is represented by a measured value target range RN1T, and is the same as or different from a first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2. For example, the measured value target range RN1T has a target range limit value pair DN1T. The target range limit is preset for DN1T. Both the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL are included in a plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . .

該方法MT10進一步包含一步驟:提供一感 測單元334。例如,感測該可變物理參數QU1A的步驟藉由使用該感測單元334而被執行。該感測單元334被配置以符合與該測量值應用範圍RN1L相關的一感測器規格FU11。例如,該感測器規格FU11包含用於表示一感測器靈敏度YW11的一感測器靈敏度表示GW11。該感測器靈敏度YW11相關於由該感測單元334所執行的一感測訊號產生HF11。該第一測量值VN11以一指定測量值格式HH11而被獲得。 The method MT10 further comprises a step of providing a sense Measuring unit 334. For example, the step of sensing the variable physical parameter QU1A is performed by using the sensing unit 334 . The sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with a sensor specification FU11 associated with the measurement application range RN1L. For example, the sensor specification FU11 includes a sensor sensitivity representation GW11 for representing a sensor sensitivity YW11. The sensor sensitivity YW11 is related to a sensing signal generated HF11 performed by the sensing unit 334 . The first measured value VN11 is obtained in a specified measured value format HH11.

該測量值應用範圍RN1L和代表該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2的一測量值候選範圍RN12皆基於該感測器靈敏度表示GW11來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。該測量值應用範圍RN1L具有一應用範圍界限值對DN1L。例如,該應用範圍界限值對DN1L被預設。該測量值候選範圍RN12具有一候選範圍界限值對DN1B。例如,該候選範圍界限值對DN1B被預設。 Both the measured value application range RN1L and a measured value candidate range RN12 representing the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 are preset in the designated measured value format HH11 based on the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 . The measured value application range RN1L has an application range limit value pair DN1L. For example, the application range limit value is preset for DN1L. The measurement value candidate range RN12 has a candidate range limit value pair DN1B. For example, the candidate range limit value is preset for DN1B.

該方法MT10進一步包含下列步驟:響應該觸發事件EQ11,獲得該應用範圍界限值對DN1L;以及響應該觸發事件EQ11,獲得基於在該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的一指定物理參數QD1T而被預先設定的一控制資料碼CK1T。產生該第一控制訊號SC11的步驟包含一子步驟:基於所獲得的該控制資料碼CK1T,執行一訊號產生控制GS11以產生該第一控制訊號SC11。該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL被配置以對應於在該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL之外的一對應物理參數範圍RY1EL。 The method MT10 further comprises the following steps: in response to the trigger event EQ11, obtaining the application range limit value pair DN1L; A control data code CK1T is set. The step of generating the first control signal SC11 includes a sub-step: based on the obtained control data code CK1T, execute a signal generation control GS11 to generate the first control signal SC11. The physical parameter application range RD1EL is configured to correspond to a corresponding physical parameter range RY1EL outside the physical parameter application range RD1EL.

在一些實施例中,該方法MT10進一步包含 下列步驟:在該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該對應物理參數範圍RY1EL藉由檢查該第一數學關係KV11而被確定的條件下,獲得所預設的該候選範圍界限值對DN1B;執行該第一測量值VN11和所獲得的該候選範圍界限值對DN1B之間的一資料比較CD21;以及在該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2基於該資料比較CD21而被確定的條件下,產生不同於該第一控制訊號SC11的一第二控制訊號SC12。該第二控制訊號SC12用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2以進入包含於該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…中的一第二物理參數候選範圍RD1E3。 In some embodiments, the method MT10 further comprises The following steps: under the condition that the corresponding physical parameter range RY1EL in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located is determined by checking the first mathematical relationship KV11, obtain the preset candidate range limit value pair DN1B; execute the A data comparison CD21 between the first measured value VN11 and the obtained candidate range limit value pair DN1B; and the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located is determined based on the data comparison CD21 Under certain conditions, a second control signal SC12 different from the first control signal SC11 is generated. The second control signal SC12 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 to enter a second physical parameter candidate range RD1E3 included in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . .

該方法MT10進一步包含下列步驟:響應該觸發事件EQ11,獲得所預設的該目標範圍界限值對DN1T;在該訊號產生控制GS11於一操作時間TD11之內被執行之後,感測該可變物理參數QU1A以產生一第二感測訊號SN12;於該操作時間TD11之後的一指定時間TG12之內,響應該第二感測訊號SN12來以該指定測量值格式HH11獲得一第二測量值VN12;以及在該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET於該指定時間TG12之內藉由比較該第二測量值VN12和所獲得的該目標範圍界限值對DN1T而被確定的條件下,執行一確保操作GU11,該確保操作GU11用於導致代表所確定的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的一物理參數目標範圍碼UN1T被記錄。 The method MT10 further includes the following steps: responding to the trigger event EQ11, obtaining the preset target range limit value pair DN1T; after the signal generation control GS11 is executed within an operation time TD11, sensing the variable physical Parameter QU1A to generate a second sensing signal SN12; within a specified time TG12 after the operating time TD11, respond to the second sensing signal SN12 to obtain a second measured value VN12 in the specified measured value format HH11; And under the condition that the physical parameter target range RD1ET in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located is determined within the specified time TG12 by comparing the second measured value VN12 with the obtained target range limit value pair DN1T , execute a guarantee operation GU11, the guarantee operation GU11 is used to cause a physical parameter target range code UN1T representing the determined physical parameter target range RD1ET to be recorded.

在一些實施例中,該可變物理參數QU1A相 關於一可變時間長度LF1A。例如,該可變時間長度LF1A基於一時間長度參考範圍HJ11和一參考時間長度LJ1T而被特徵化。該時間長度參考範圍HJ11由一時間長度值參考範圍GJ11所代表。該參考時間長度LJ1T由一時間長度值CL1T所代表。所獲得的該控制資料碼CK1T包含該時間長度值CL1T。該方法MT10進一步包含下列步驟:檢查該時間長度值CL1T和該時間長度值參考範圍GJ11之間的一數值關係KJ11以做出用於控制一特定時間TJ1T的一計數操作BC1T是否要被執行的一邏輯決定PE11;以及在該邏輯決定PE11是肯定的條件下,基於該時間長度值CL1T來執行該計數操作BC1T。 In some embodiments, the variable physical parameter QU1A phase Regarding a variable length of time LF1A. For example, the variable time length LF1A is characterized based on a time length reference range HJ11 and a reference time length LJ1T. The time length reference range HJ11 is represented by a time length value reference range GJ11. The reference time length LJ1T is represented by a time length value CL1T. The obtained control data code CK1T includes the time length value CL1T. The method MT10 further comprises the following steps: checking a numerical relationship KJ11 between the time length value CL1T and the time length value reference range GJ11 to make a determination whether a counting operation BC1T for controlling a specific time TJ1T is to be executed Logical decision PE11; and on the condition that the logical decision PE11 is affirmative, the counting operation BC1T is performed based on the time length value CL1T.

該方法MT10進一步包含下列步驟:在該可變物理參數QU1A由於該觸發事件EQ11而被配置以於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的條件下,基於該計數操作BC1T來到達該特定時間TJ1T;以及在該特定時間TJ1T之內,產生不同於該第一控制訊號SC11的一第三控制訊號SC22。該第三控制訊號SC22用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET以進入該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL。 The method MT10 further comprises the steps of: reaching the specific time TJ1T based on the counting operation BC1T under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured due to the trigger event EQ11 to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET; and Within the specific time TJ1T, a third control signal SC22 different from the first control signal SC11 is generated. The third control signal SC22 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the physical parameter application range RD1EL.

在一些實施例中,該方法MT10進一步包含下列步驟:提供一感測單元334,其中感測該可變物理參數QU1A的步驟藉由使用該感測單元334而被執行;以及執行與該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL相關的一觸發應用功能FC11。該觸發應用功能FC11被配置以符合與該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL相關的一觸發應用功能規格GCL1。 In some embodiments, the method MT10 further includes the following steps: providing a sensing unit 334, wherein the step of sensing the variable physical parameter QU1A is performed by using the sensing unit 334; A trigger application function FC11 associated with the application range RD1EL. The trigger application function FC11 is configured to comply with a trigger application function specification GCL1 related to the physical parameter application range RD1EL.

該感測單元334被配置以符合與該測量值應用範圍RN1L相關的一感測器規格FU11。例如,該感測器規格FU11包含用於表示一感測器靈敏度YW11的一感測器靈敏度表示GW11。該感測器靈敏度YW11相關於由該感測單元334所執行的一感測訊號產生HF11。該第一測量值VN11以一指定測量值格式HH11而被獲得。例如,該指定測量值格式HH11基於一指定位元數目UY11而被特徵化。 The sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with a sensor specification FU11 associated with the measurement application range RN1L. For example, the sensor specification FU11 includes a sensor sensitivity representation GW11 for representing a sensor sensitivity YW11. The sensor sensitivity YW11 is related to a sensing signal generated HF11 performed by the sensing unit 334 . The first measured value VN11 is obtained in a specified measured value format HH11. For example, the specified measurement value format HH11 is characterized based on a specified bit number UY11.

該可變物理參數QU1A進一步基於一額定物理參數範圍RD1E而被特徵化。例如,該額定物理參數範圍RD1E由一額定測量值範圍RD1N所代表,並包含由複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…所分別代表的複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…。該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET皆包含於該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…中。該觸發應用功能規格GCL1包含該感測器規格FU11、用於表示該額定物理參數範圍RD1E的一額定物理參數範圍表示GC1E、和用於表示該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的一物理參數應用範圍表示GC1L。 The variable physical parameter QU1A is further characterized based on a nominal physical parameter range RD1E. For example, the rated physical parameter range RD1E is represented by a rated measured value range RD1N, and includes a plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . represented by multiple different measured value reference ranges RN11, RN12, . Both the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter target range RD1ET are contained in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1 , RD1E2 , . . . The trigger application function specification GCL1 includes the sensor specification FU11, a rated physical parameter range representation GC1E for representing the rated physical parameter range RD1E, and a physical parameter application range representation GC1L for representing the physical parameter application range RD1EL .

該額定測量值範圍RD1N基於該額定物理參數範圍表示GC1E、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和用於轉換該額定物理參數範圍表示GC1E的一第一資料編碼操作ZX11來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設,具有一額定範圍界限值對DD1A,並包含由複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…所分別代表的該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…。例如,該額定範圍界限值對DD1A 用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…包含該測量值應用範圍RN1L。 The rated measured value range RD1N is based on the rated physical parameter range representation GC1E, the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and a first data encoding operation ZX11 for converting the rated physical parameter range representation GC1E to use the specified measured value format HH11 It is preset to have a rated range limit value pair DD1A, and includes the plural different measured value reference ranges RN11, RN12, . . . represented by the plural different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . For example, the rated range limit value for DD1A Preset with the specified measurement value format HH11. The plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, . . . include the measurement value application range RN1L.

該測量值應用範圍RN1L由包含於該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…中的一測量值應用範圍碼EM1L所代表,並具有一應用範圍界限值對DN1L。例如,該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…皆基於該觸發應用功能規格GCL1而被預設。該應用範圍界限值對DN1L包含一第一應用範圍界限值DN15和相對於該第一應用範圍界限值DN15的一第二應用範圍界限值DN16,並基於該物理參數應用範圍表示GC1L、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和用於轉換該物理參數應用範圍表示GC1L的一第二資料編碼操作ZX12來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。 The measured value application range RN1L is represented by a measured value application range code EM1L contained in the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . . and has an application range limit value pair DN1L. For example, the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . . are all preset based on the trigger application function specification GCL1. The application range limit value pair DN1L includes a first application range limit value DN15 and a second application range limit value DN16 relative to the first application range limit value DN15, and is based on the physical parameter application range representation GC1L, the sensing The instrument sensitivity representation GW11 and a second data encoding operation ZX12 for converting the physical parameter application range representation GC1L are preset with the specified measurement value format HH11.

在一些實施例中,該方法MT10進一步包含下列步驟:提供一儲存空間SS11;以及在該儲存空間SS11中儲存所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A和一可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。當該觸發事件EQ11發生時,該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A等於選擇自該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…的一特定測量值範圍碼EM14。 In some embodiments, the method MT10 further includes the following steps: providing a storage space SS11 ; and storing the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A and a variable physical parameter range code UN1A in the storage space SS11 . When the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the variable physical parameter range code UN1A is equal to a specific measured value range code EM14 selected from the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . .

例如,該特定測量值範圍碼EM14指示基於一感測操作ZS11而被先前確定的一特定物理參數範圍RD1E4。該特定物理參數範圍RD1E4選擇自該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…。由該感測單元334所執行的該感測操作ZS11用於感測該可變物理參數QU1A。在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該特定測量值範圍 碼EM14被指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。 For example, the specific measurement value range code EM14 indicates a specific physical parameter range RD1E4 previously determined based on a sensing operation ZS11. The specific physical parameter range RD1E4 is selected from the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . The sensing operation ZS11 performed by the sensing unit 334 is used to sense the variable physical parameter QU1A. Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the specific measured value range Code EM14 is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.

在一些實施例中,該方法MT10進一步包含下列步驟:在該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,響應該觸發事件EQ11來從該儲存空間SS11獲得一操作參考資料碼XU11;以及藉由運行一資料確定程序NA1A,執行使用該操作參考資料碼XU11的一資料確定AA1A以確定選擇自該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L以便從該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…中選擇該測量值應用範圍RN1L。 In some embodiments, the method MT10 further includes the following steps: under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, obtain an operation reference data code XU11 from the storage space SS11 in response to the trigger event EQ11; and determine by running a data Program NA1A, executes a data determination AA1A using the operation reference data code XU11 to determine the measurement value application range code EM1L selected from the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . . RN11, RN12, ... select the measurement value application range RN1L.

該操作參考資料碼XU11相同於基於該觸發應用功能規格GCL1而被預設的一可允許參考資料碼。該資料確定程序NA1A基於該觸發應用功能規格GCL1而被建構。該資料確定AA1A是一第一資料確定操作AA11和一第二資料確定操作AA12的其中之一。在該操作參考資料碼XU11藉由存取被儲存在該儲存空間SS11中的該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A而被獲得以相同於該特定測量值範圍碼EM14的條件下,是該第一資料確定操作AA11的該資料確定AA1A基於所獲得的該特定測量值範圍碼EM14來確定該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L,其中所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L相同或不同於所獲得的該特定測量值範圍碼EM14。 The operation reference code XU11 is the same as an allowable reference code preset based on the trigger application function specification GCL1. The data determination program NA1A is constructed based on the trigger application function specification GCL1. The data determination AA1A is one of a first data determination operation AA11 and a second data determination operation AA12. Under the condition that the operation reference data code XU11 is obtained by accessing the variable physical parameter range code UN1A stored in the storage space SS11 to be the same as the specific measured value range code EM14, it is the first data The profile of determining operation AA11 determines that AA1A determines the measured value application range code EM1L based on the obtained specific measured value range code EM14, wherein the determined measured value applied range code EM1L is the same as or different from the obtained specific measured value range code EM1L Value range code EM14.

在該操作參考資料碼XU11藉由存取被儲存在該儲存空間SS11中的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A而被獲得以相同於所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A的條件下,是該第二資料確定操作AA12的該資料確定AA1A藉 由執行使用該第一測量值VN11和所獲得的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A的一科學計算MR11來從該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…中選擇該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L以確定該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L。例如,該科學計算MR11基於一特定經驗公式XR11而被執行,且該特定經驗公式XR11基於所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A和該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…而被預先制定。 Under the condition that the operation reference code XU11 is obtained by accessing the pair of rated range limit values DD1A stored in the storage space SS11 to be the same as the preset pair of rated range limit values DD1A, it is the The data determination AA1A of the second data determination operation AA12 Selecting the measured value application range code EM1L from the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . To determine this measurement apply range code EM1L. For example, the scientific calculation MR11 is executed based on a specific empirical formula XR11, and the specific empirical formula XR11 is calculated based on the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A and the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . . pre-made.

該方法MT10進一步包含一步驟:基於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L,獲得該應用範圍界限值對DN1L。產生該第一控制訊號SC11的步驟包含下列子步驟:基於該第一測量值VN11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L之間的一資料比較CD11,檢查該第一數學關係KV11以做出該第一測量值VN11是否為於所選擇的該測量值應用範圍RN1L之內的一邏輯決定PB11;以及在該邏輯決定PB11是肯定的條件下,確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL。 The method MT10 further comprises a step of obtaining the application range limit value pair DN1L based on the determined application range code EM1L of the measured value. The step of generating the first control signal SC11 comprises the following sub-steps: based on a data comparison CD11 between the first measured value VN11 and the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L, checking the first mathematical relationship KV11 to make It is a logical decision PB11 whether the first measured value VN11 is within the selected measured value application range RN1L; Parameter application range RD1EL.

在一些實施例中,該可變物理參數QU1A存在於一控制目標裝置330中。該觸發事件EQ11是一觸發作用事件、一使用者輸入事件、一訊號輸入事件、一狀態改變事件和一識別媒介出現事件的其中之一,並被應用到該觸發應用功能FC11。該觸發應用功能規格GCL1進一步包含一物理參數表示GC1T1。該物理參數表示GC1T1用於表示在該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的一指定物理參數QD1T。所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L相關於一控制 資料碼CK1T。例如,該控制碼CC1T基於該物理參數表示GC1T1和用於轉換該物理參數表示GC1T1的一第三資料編碼操作ZX21而被預設。 In some embodiments, the variable physical parameter QU1A exists in a control target device 330 . The trigger event EQ11 is one of a trigger action event, a user input event, a signal input event, a state change event and a recognition medium occurrence event, and is applied to the trigger application function FC11. The trigger application function specification GCL1 further includes a physical parameter representation GC1T1. The physical parameter representation GC1T1 is used to represent a specified physical parameter QD1T within the physical parameter target range RD1ET. The preset measurement value application range code EM1L is related to a control Data code CK1T. For example, the control code CC1T is preset based on the physical parameter representation GC1T1 and a third data encoding operation ZX21 for converting the physical parameter representation GC1T1.

該方法MT10進一步包含一步驟:在是該觸發作用事件的該觸發事件EQ11要發生的條件下,藉由使用該控制目標裝置330來執行與該可變物理參數QU1A相關的一指定功能操作ZH11。例如,該指定功能操作ZH11用於導致該觸發作用事件發生。產生該第一控制訊號SC11的步驟進一步包含下列子步驟:在該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL被確定的條件下,基於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L來獲得該控制資料碼CK1T;以及基於所獲得的該控制資料碼CK1T,執行用於該觸發應用功能FC11的一訊號產生控制GS11以產生該第一控制訊號SC11,該第一控制訊號SC11用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL以進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。 The method MT10 further includes a step of executing a specified function operation ZH11 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A by using the control target device 330 under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 that is the trigger action event will occur. For example, the specified functional operation ZH11 is used to cause the triggering event to occur. The step of generating the first control signal SC11 further includes the following sub-steps: under the condition that the physical parameter application range RD1EL is determined, the control data code CK1T is obtained based on the determined measurement value application range code EM1L; and based on the determined The obtained control data code CK1T executes a signal generating control GS11 for the triggering application function FC11 to generate the first control signal SC11 for causing the variable physical parameter QU1A to depart from the physical parameter Apply the range RD1EL to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…進一步包含不同於該測量值應用範圍RN1L的一測量值目標範圍RN1T。該觸發應用功能規格GCL1進一步包含用於表示該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的一物理參數候選範圍表示GC1T。該測量值目標範圍RN1T由不同於該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L的一測量值目標範圍碼EM1T所代表,具有一目標範圍界限值對DN1T,並被配置以代表該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。例如,該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T包含於該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…中。該目標範圍界限值對DN1T基於該第一物理參數候選範圍 表示GC1T、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和用於轉換該第一物理參數候選範圍表示GC1T的一第四資料編碼操作ZX13來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。 The plurality of different measured value reference ranges RN11 , RN12 , . . . further include a measured value target range RN1T different from the measured value application range RN1L. The trigger application function specification GCL1 further includes a physical parameter candidate range representation GC1T for representing the physical parameter target range RD1ET. The measured value target range RN1T is represented by a measured value target range code EM1T different from the measured value application range code EM1L, has a target range limit value pair DN1T, and is configured to represent the physical parameter target range RD1ET. For example, the measured value target range code EM1T is included in the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . . The target range threshold pair DN1T is based on the first physical parameter candidate range The representation GC1T, the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and a fourth data encoding operation ZX13 for converting the first physical parameter candidate range representation GC1T are preset with the specified measurement value format HH11.

在一些實施例中,該方法MT10進一步包含下列步驟:在該訊號產生控制GS11於一操作時間TD11之內被執行之後,感測該可變物理參數QU1A以產生一第二感測訊號SN12;於該操作時間TD11之後的一指定時間TG12之內,響應該第二感測訊號SN12來獲得一第二測量值VN12;以及在該訊號產生控制GS11被執行的條件下,基於所獲得的該控制資料碼CK1T和所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L的其中之一來確定該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T。 In some embodiments, the method MT10 further includes the following steps: after the signal generation control GS11 is executed within an operation time TD11, sensing the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a second sensing signal SN12; Within a specified time TG12 after the operation time TD11, a second measurement value VN12 is obtained in response to the second sensing signal SN12; and under the condition that the signal generation control GS11 is executed, based on the obtained control data The code CK1T and the determined measured value application range code EM1L determine the measured value target range code EM1T.

該方法MT10進一步包含下列步驟:基於所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T,獲得該目標範圍界限值對DN1T;以及在該特定測量值範圍碼EM14不同於所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T且該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET於該指定時間TG12之內藉由比較該第二測量值VN12和所獲得的該目標範圍界限值對DN1T而被確定的條件下,基於等於該特定測量值範圍碼EM14的該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A和所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T之間的一碼差異DF11來將所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。 The method MT10 further comprises the following steps: based on the determined measured value target range code EM1T, obtaining the target range limit value pair DN1T; and when the specific measured value range code EM14 is different from the determined measured value target range code EM1T And under the condition that the physical parameter target range RD1ET in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located is determined within the specified time TG12 by comparing the second measured value VN12 with the obtained target range limit value pair DN1T, Assigning the determined measured value target range code EM1T to The variable physical parameter range code is UN1A.

該方法MT10進一步包含下列步驟:當該觸發事件EQ11發生時,顯示一第一狀態指示LB11,其中該 第一狀態指示LB11用於指示該可變物理參數QU1A被配置於該特定物理參數範圍RD1E4之內的一第一特定狀態XJ11;以及在該特定測量值範圍碼EM14不同於所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T且該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET於該指定時間TG12之內藉由比較該第二測量值VN12和所獲得的該目標範圍界限值對DN1T而被確定的條件下,基於該碼差異DF11來將該第一狀態指示LB11改變成一第二狀態指示LB12。例如,該第二狀態指示LB12用於指示該可變物理參數QU1A被配置於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的一第二特定狀態XJ12。 The method MT10 further includes the following steps: when the trigger event EQ11 occurs, displaying a first status indication LB11, wherein the The first state indicator LB11 is used to indicate that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured in a first specific state XJ11 within the specific physical parameter range RD1E4; and the code EM14 is different from the determined measured value in the specific measured value range Under the condition that the target range code EM1T and the physical parameter target range RD1ET are determined within the specified time TG12 by comparing the second measured value VN12 with the obtained target range limit value pair DN1T, based on the code difference DF11 to change the first status indicator LB11 into a second status indicator LB12. For example, the second state indicator LB12 is used to indicate a second specific state XJ12 in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured within the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

請參閱第8圖。第8圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8017的示意圖。請額外參閱第1圖、第2圖、第3圖、第4圖、第5圖、第6圖和第7圖。一種用於藉由在一第一操作時間TD11之內產生一第一控制訊號SC11而控制一可變物理參數QU1A的方法MT12被揭露。該可變物理參數QU1A基於由一測量值應用範圍RN1L所代表的一物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和不同於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的一物理參數目標範圍RD1ET而被特徵化。 See Figure 8. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8017 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . Please also see Figures 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7. A method MT12 for controlling a variable physical parameter QU1A by generating a first control signal SC11 within a first operating time TD11 is disclosed. The variable physical parameter QU1A is characterized based on a physical parameter application range RD1EL represented by a measurement value application range RN1L and a physical parameter target range RD1ET different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL.

該方法MT12包含下列步驟:該感測單元334感測該可變物理參數QU1A以產生一第一感測訊號SN11;在一觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該處理單元230響應該第一感測訊號SN11來獲得一第一測量值VN11;以及在該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL藉由檢查該第一測量值VN11和該測量值應用範 圍RN1L之間的一第一數學關係KV11而被該處理單元230確定的條件下,該處理單元230做出用於到達該第一操作時間TD11的一第一觸發訊號WX11是否要被額外產生的一合理決定PW11,該第一控制訊號SC11用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。 The method MT12 includes the following steps: the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a first sensing signal SN11; when a trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 responds to the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain a first measurement value VN11; and the physical parameter application range RD1EL in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located is checked by checking the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range Under the condition determined by the processing unit 230 around a first mathematical relationship KV11 between RN1L, the processing unit 230 determines whether a first trigger signal WX11 for reaching the first operation time TD11 is to be additionally generated A reasonable decision PW11, the first control signal SC11 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

在一些實施例中,做出該合理決定PW11的步驟包含下列子步驟:在該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL被該處理單元230確定的條件下,該處理單元230執行用於檢查所確定的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和一預設物理參數範圍RD1EF之間的一第一範圍關係KC1A的一第一檢查操作ZY11;該處理單元230基於該第一檢查操作ZY11來做出所確定的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL是否相同於該預設物理參數範圍RD1EF的一第一特定決定PD11;以及在該第一特定決定PD11是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230做出該合理決定PW11以成為肯定的。 In some embodiments, the step of making the reasonable decision PW11 includes the following sub-steps: under the condition that the physical parameter application range RD1EL is determined by the processing unit 230, the processing unit 230 executes a method for checking the determined physical parameter A first checking operation ZY11 of a first range relationship KC1A between the application range RD1EL and a preset physical parameter range RD1EF; the processing unit 230 makes the determined application range of the physical parameter based on the first checking operation ZY11 Whether RD1EL is the same as a first specific decision PD11 of the preset physical parameter range RD1EF; and if the first specific decision PD11 is positive, the processing unit 230 makes the reasonable decision PW11 to be positive.

該第一觸發訊號WX11是一中斷請求訊號和一狀態改變控制訊號的其中之一。該第一控制訊號SC11用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL以進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET由一測量值目標範圍RN1T所代表,並相同或不同於一第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2。例如,該測量值目標範圍RN1T具有一目標範圍界限值對DN1T。該目標範圍界限值對DN1T被預設。該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和不同於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2皆包含於複數不同物理參數參考範圍 RD1E1、RD1E2、…中。 The first trigger signal WX11 is one of an interrupt request signal and a state change control signal. The first control signal SC11 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter application range RD1EL and enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET. The physical parameter target range RD1ET is represented by a measured value target range RN1T, and is the same as or different from a first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2. For example, the measured value target range RN1T has a target range limit value pair DN1T. The target range limit is preset for DN1T. The physical parameter application range RD1EL and the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL are both included in a plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, ... in.

該方法MT12進一步包含一步驟:該控制裝置210提供一感測單元334。例如,感測該可變物理參數QU1A的步驟藉由使用該感測單元334而被執行。該感測單元334被配置以符合與該測量值應用範圍RN1L相關的一感測器規格FU11。例如,該感測器規格FU11包含用於表示一感測器靈敏度YW11的一感測器靈敏度表示GW11。該感測器靈敏度YW11相關於由該感測單元334所執行的一感測訊號產生HF11。該第一測量值VN11以一指定測量值格式HH11而被該處理單元230獲得。 The method MT12 further includes a step: the control device 210 provides a sensing unit 334 . For example, the step of sensing the variable physical parameter QU1A is performed by using the sensing unit 334 . The sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with a sensor specification FU11 associated with the measurement application range RN1L. For example, the sensor specification FU11 includes a sensor sensitivity representation GW11 for representing a sensor sensitivity YW11. The sensor sensitivity YW11 is related to a sensing signal generated HF11 performed by the sensing unit 334 . The first measurement value VN11 is obtained by the processing unit 230 in a specified measurement value format HH11.

該測量值應用範圍RN1L和代表該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2的一測量值候選範圍RN12皆基於該感測器靈敏度表示GW11來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。該測量值應用範圍RN1L具有一應用範圍界限值對DN1L。例如,該應用範圍界限值對DN1L被預設。該測量值候選範圍RN12具有一候選範圍界限值對DN1B。例如,該候選範圍界限值對DN1B被預設。 Both the measured value application range RN1L and a measured value candidate range RN12 representing the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 are preset in the designated measured value format HH11 based on the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 . The measured value application range RN1L has an application range limit value pair DN1L. For example, the application range limit value is preset for DN1L. The measurement value candidate range RN12 has a candidate range limit value pair DN1B. For example, the candidate range limit value is preset for DN1B.

在一些實施例中,該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11,獲得該應用範圍界限值對DN1L;以及該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11,獲得基於在該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的一指定物理參數QD1T而被預先設定的一控制資料碼CK1T;以及在該合理決定PW11是否定的條件下,該處理單元230直接地到達獨立於該第一觸發訊號WX11的該第一操作時間TD11。 In some embodiments, the method MT12 further includes the following steps: the processing unit 230 responds to the trigger event EQ11 to obtain the application range limit value pair DN1L; and the processing unit 230 responds to the trigger event EQ11 to obtain a control data code CK1T preset for a specified physical parameter QD1T within the target range RD1ET; and under the condition that the rationale decision PW11 is negative, the processing unit 230 directly reaches the trigger signal independent of the first trigger signal WX11 The first operating time TD11.

該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:在該合理決定PW11是肯定的條件下,該控制裝置210和該操作單元297的其中之一響應與該可變物理參數QU1A相關的一第一指定應用操作ZA11來產生該第一觸發訊號WX11;在該合理決定PW11是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230響應該第一觸發訊號WX11來到達相依於該第一觸發訊號WX11的該第一操作時間TD11;以及該處理單元230在該第一操作時間TD11之內,基於所獲得的該控制資料碼CK1T,執行一訊號產生控制GS11以產生該第一控制訊號SC11。 The method MT12 further comprises the following steps: under the condition that the reasonable decision PW11 is affirmative, one of the control device 210 and the operating unit 297 responds to a first designated application operation ZA11 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A to generating the first trigger signal WX11; under the condition that the reasonable decision PW11 is positive, the processing unit 230 responds to the first trigger signal WX11 to reach the first operation time TD11 dependent on the first trigger signal WX11; and the The processing unit 230 executes a signal generation control GS11 to generate the first control signal SC11 based on the obtained control data code CK1T within the first operation time TD11 .

在一些實施例中,該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL被配置以對應於在該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL之外的一對應物理參數範圍RY1EL。該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:在該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該對應物理參數範圍RY1EL藉由檢查該第一數學關係KV11而被該處理單元230確定的條件下,該處理單元230獲得所預設的該候選範圍界限值對DN1B;以及該處理單元230執行該第一測量值VN11和所獲得的該候選範圍界限值對DN1B之間的一資料比較CD21。 In some embodiments, the physical parameter application range RD1EL is configured to correspond to a corresponding physical parameter range RY1EL outside the physical parameter application range RD1EL. The method MT12 further comprises the following steps: under the condition that the corresponding physical parameter range RY1EL in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located is determined by the processing unit 230 by checking the first mathematical relationship KV11, the processing unit 230 obtains the The preset candidate range limit value pair DN1B; and the processing unit 230 performs a data comparison CD21 between the first measurement value VN11 and the obtained candidate range limit value pair DN1B.

該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:在該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2基於該資料比較CD21而被該處理單元230確定的條件下,該處理單元230執行用於檢查所確定的該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2和該預設物理參數範圍RD1EF之間的一第二範圍關係KC2A的一第二檢查操作ZY21;該處理單 元230基於該第二檢查操作ZY21,做出用於到達一第二操作時間TD21的一第二觸發訊號WX21是否要被額外產生的一第二特定決定PW21,其中與該第一控制訊號SC11不同的一第二控制訊號SC12要於該第二操作時間TD21之內被產生;以及在該第二特定決定PW21是否定的條件下,該處理單元230直接地到達獨立於該第二觸發訊號WX21的該第二操作時間TD21。 The method MT12 further includes the following steps: under the condition that the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in is determined by the processing unit 230 based on the data comparison CD21, the processing unit 230 executes a method for checking A second checking operation ZY21 of a second range relation KC2A between the determined first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 and the preset physical parameter range RD1EF; the processing sheet The unit 230 makes a second specific decision PW21 whether a second trigger signal WX21 for reaching a second operation time TD21 is to be additionally generated based on the second checking operation ZY21, which is different from the first control signal SC11 A second control signal SC12 is to be generated within the second operating time TD21; and under the condition that the second specific decision PW21 is negative, the processing unit 230 directly reaches the trigger signal independent of the second trigger signal WX21 The second operating time TD21.

該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:在該第二特定決定PW21是肯定的條件下,該控制裝置210和該操作單元297的其中之一響應與該可變物理參數QU1A相關的一第二指定應用操作ZA21來產生該第二觸發訊號WX21;在該第二特定決定PW21是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230響應該第二觸發訊號WX21來到達相依於該第二觸發訊號WX21的該第二操作時間TD21;以及在該第二操作時間TD21之內,該處理單元230導致該輸出單元240產生該第二控制訊號SC12。該第二控制訊號SC12用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2以進入包含於該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…中的一第二物理參數候選範圍RD1E3。 The method MT12 further comprises the following steps: on the condition that the second specific decision PW21 is affirmative, one of the control device 210 and the operating unit 297 responds to a second specified application operation related to the variable physical parameter QU1A ZA21 to generate the second trigger signal WX21; under the condition that the second specific decision PW21 is positive, the processing unit 230 responds to the second trigger signal WX21 to reach the second operation time dependent on the second trigger signal WX21 TD21; and within the second operating time TD21, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to generate the second control signal SC12. The second control signal SC12 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 to enter a second physical parameter candidate range RD1E3 included in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . .

在一些實施例中,該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11,獲得所預設的該目標範圍界限值對DN1T;以及在該訊號產生控制GS11於一操作時間TD11之內被該處理單元230執行之後,該感測單元334感測該可變物理參數QU1A以產生一第二感測訊號SN12。 In some embodiments, the method MT12 further includes the following steps: the processing unit 230 responds to the trigger event EQ11 to obtain the preset target range limit value pair DN1T; After being executed by the processing unit 230 , the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a second sensing signal SN12 .

該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:該處理單元230在該操作時間TD11之後的一指定時間TG12之內,響應該第二感測訊號SN12來以該指定測量值格式HH11獲得一第二測量值VN12;以及在該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET於該指定時間TG12之內藉由比較該第二測量值VN12和所獲得的該目標範圍界限值對DN1T而被該處理單元230確定的條件下,該處理單元230執行一確保操作GU11,該確保操作GU11用於導致代表所確定的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的一物理參數目標範圍碼UN1T被該儲存單元250記錄。 The method MT12 further includes the following steps: the processing unit 230 obtains a second measurement value VN12 in the specified measurement value format HH11 in response to the second sensing signal SN12 within a specified time TG12 after the operation time TD11; And the physical parameter target range RD1ET in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located is determined by the processing unit 230 by comparing the second measured value VN12 with the obtained target range limit value pair DN1T within the specified time TG12 Under certain conditions, the processing unit 230 executes a guarantee operation GU11 for causing a physical parameter target range code UN1T representing the determined physical parameter target range RD1ET to be recorded by the storage unit 250 .

該可變物理參數QU1A相關於一可變時間長度LF1A。例如,該可變時間長度LF1A基於一時間長度參考範圍HJ11和一參考時間長度LJ1T而被特徵化。該時間長度參考範圍HJ11由一時間長度值參考範圍GJ11所代表。該參考時間長度LJ1T由一時間長度值CL1T所代表。所獲得的該控制資料碼CK1T包含該時間長度值CL1T。該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:該處理單元230檢查該時間長度值CL1T和該時間長度值參考範圍GJ11之間的一數值關係KJ11以做出用於控制一特定時間TJ1T的一計數操作BC1T是否要被執行的一邏輯決定PE11;以及在該邏輯決定PE11是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230基於該時間長度值CL1T來執行該計數操作BC1T。 The variable physical parameter QU1A is associated with a variable time length LF1A. For example, the variable time length LF1A is characterized based on a time length reference range HJ11 and a reference time length LJ1T. The time length reference range HJ11 is represented by a time length value reference range GJ11. The reference time length LJ1T is represented by a time length value CL1T. The obtained control data code CK1T includes the time length value CL1T. The method MT12 further comprises the following steps: the processing unit 230 checks a numerical relationship KJ11 between the time length value CL1T and the time length value reference range GJ11 to make a counting operation BC1T for controlling a specific time TJ1T whether to A logical decision PE11 is executed; and if the logical decision PE11 is positive, the processing unit 230 executes the counting operation BC1T based on the time length value CL1T.

該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:在該可變物理參數QU1A由於該觸發事件EQ11而被配置以於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的條件下,該處理單元230基 於該計數操作BC1T來到達該特定時間TJ1T;以及該處理單元230在該特定時間TJ1T之內,導致該輸出單元240產生不同於該第一控制訊號SC11的一第三控制訊號SC22。該第三控制訊號SC22用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET以進入該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL。 The method MT12 further comprises the following steps: under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET due to the trigger event EQ11, the processing unit 230 basically The counting operation BC1T reaches the specific time TJ1T; and the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to generate a third control signal SC22 different from the first control signal SC11 within the specific time TJ1T. The third control signal SC22 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the physical parameter application range RD1EL.

在一些實施例中,該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:該控制裝置210提供一感測單元334,其中感測該可變物理參數QU1A的步驟藉由使用該感測單元334而被執行;以及該操作單元297執行與該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL相關的一觸發應用功能FC11。該觸發應用功能FC11被配置以符合與該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL相關的一觸發應用功能規格GCL1。 In some embodiments, the method MT12 further includes the following steps: the control device 210 provides a sensing unit 334, wherein the step of sensing the variable physical parameter QU1A is performed by using the sensing unit 334; and the The operation unit 297 executes a trigger application function FC11 related to the physical parameter application range RD1EL. The trigger application function FC11 is configured to comply with a trigger application function specification GCL1 related to the physical parameter application range RD1EL.

該感測單元334被配置以符合與該測量值應用範圍RN1L相關的一感測器規格FU11。例如,該感測器規格FU11包含用於表示一感測器靈敏度YW11的一感測器靈敏度表示GW11。該感測器靈敏度YW11相關於由該感測單元334所執行的一感測訊號產生HF11。該指定測量值格式HH11基於一指定位元數目UY11而被特徵化。該第一測量值VN11以一指定測量值格式HH11而被該處理單元230獲得。例如,該指定測量值格式HH11基於一指定位元數目UY11而被特徵化。例如,當該觸發事件EQ11發生時,該感測單元334感測該可變物理參數QU1A以執行相依於該感測器靈敏度YW11的該感測訊號產生HF11,該感測訊號產生HF11用於產生該第一感測訊號SN11。 The sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with a sensor specification FU11 associated with the measurement application range RN1L. For example, the sensor specification FU11 includes a sensor sensitivity representation GW11 for representing a sensor sensitivity YW11. The sensor sensitivity YW11 is related to a sensing signal generated HF11 performed by the sensing unit 334 . The specified measurement value format HH11 is characterized based on a specified bit number UY11. The first measurement value VN11 is obtained by the processing unit 230 in a specified measurement value format HH11. For example, the specified measurement value format HH11 is characterized based on a specified bit number UY11. For example, when the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to perform the sensing signal generation HF11 dependent on the sensor sensitivity YW11, and the sensing signal generation HF11 is used to generate The first sensing signal SN11.

該可變物理參數QU1A進一步基於一額定物理參數範圍RD1E而被特徵化。例如,該額定物理參數範圍RD1E由一額定測量值範圍RD1N所代表,並包含由複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…所分別代表的複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…。該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET皆包含於該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…中。該觸發應用功能規格GCL1包含該感測器規格FU11、用於表示該額定物理參數範圍RD1E的一額定物理參數範圍表示GC1E、和用於表示該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的一物理參數應用範圍表示GC1L。 The variable physical parameter QU1A is further characterized based on a nominal physical parameter range RD1E. For example, the rated physical parameter range RD1E is represented by a rated measured value range RD1N, and includes a plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . represented by multiple different measured value reference ranges RN11, RN12, . Both the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter target range RD1ET are contained in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1 , RD1E2 , . . . The trigger application function specification GCL1 includes the sensor specification FU11, a rated physical parameter range representation GC1E for representing the rated physical parameter range RD1E, and a physical parameter application range representation GC1L for representing the physical parameter application range RD1EL .

在一些實施例中,該額定測量值範圍RD1N基於該額定物理參數範圍表示GC1E、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和用於轉換該額定物理參數範圍表示GC1E的一第一資料編碼操作ZX11來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設,具有一額定範圍界限值對DD1A,並包含由複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…所分別代表的該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…。例如,該額定範圍界限值對DD1A用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…包含該測量值應用範圍RN1L。 In some embodiments, the nominal range of measured values RD1N is used based on the nominal physical parameter range representation GC1E, the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and a first data encoding operation ZX11 for converting the nominal physical parameter range representation GC1E to the It is preset by specifying the measured value format HH11, has a rated range limit value pair DD1A, and includes the plural different measured value reference ranges RN11, RN12, ... represented by the complex different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ... . For example, the nominal range limit pair DD1A is preset with the specified measurement value format HH11. The plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, . . . include the measurement value application range RN1L.

該測量值應用範圍RN1L由包含於該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…中的一測量值應用範圍碼EM1L所代表,並具有一應用範圍界限值對DN1L;藉此該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L被配置以指示該物 理參數應用範圍RD1EL。例如,該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…皆基於該觸發應用功能規格GCL1而被預設。 The measured value application range RN1L is represented by a measured value application range code EM1L contained in the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ..., and has an application range limit value pair DN1L; thereby the measured value application Range code EM1L is configured to indicate that the The application range of the physical parameters is RD1EL. For example, the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . . are all preset based on the trigger application function specification GCL1.

該應用範圍界限值對DN1L包含該測量值應用範圍RN1L的一第一應用範圍界限值DN15和相對於該第一應用範圍界限值DN15的一第二應用範圍界限值DN16,並基於該物理參數應用範圍表示GC1L、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和用於轉換該物理參數應用範圍表示GC1L的一第二資料編碼操作ZX12來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。該測量值應用範圍RN1L基於該物理參數應用範圍表示GC1L、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和該第二資料編碼操作ZX12來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。 The application range limit value pair DN1L comprises a first application range limit value DN15 of the measured value application range RN1L and a second application range limit value DN16 relative to the first application range limit value DN15, and is applied based on the physical parameter The range representation GC1L, the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and a second data encoding operation ZX12 for converting the physical parameter application range representation GC1L are preset with the specified measurement value format HH11. The measured value application range RN1L is preset with the specified measured value format HH11 based on the physical parameter application range representation GC1L, the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and the second data encoding operation ZX12.

在一些實施例中,該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:該儲存單元250提供一儲存空間SS11;以及該儲存單元250在該儲存空間SS11中儲存所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A和一可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。當該觸發事件EQ11發生時,該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A等於選擇自該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…的一特定測量值範圍碼EM14。 In some embodiments, the method MT12 further includes the following steps: the storage unit 250 provides a storage space SS11; and the storage unit 250 stores the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A and a variable in the storage space SS11 Change physical parameter range code UN1A. When the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the variable physical parameter range code UN1A is equal to a specific measured value range code EM14 selected from the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . .

例如,該特定測量值範圍碼EM14指示基於一感測操作ZS11而被該處理單元230先前確定的一第一特定物理參數範圍RD1E4。該第一特定物理參數範圍RD1E4選擇自該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…。由該感測單元334所執行的該感測操作ZS11用於感測該可 變物理參數QU1A。在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該特定測量值範圍碼EM14被指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。 For example, the specific measurement value range code EM14 indicates a first specific physical parameter range RD1E4 previously determined by the processing unit 230 based on a sensing operation ZS11 . The first specific physical parameter range RD1E4 is selected from the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . The sensing operation ZS11 performed by the sensing unit 334 is used to sense the possible Change the physical parameters of QU1A. Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the specific measured value range code EM14 is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.

例如,在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230獲得該特定測量值範圍碼EM14。在該處理單元230於該觸發事件EQ11發生之前基於該感測操作ZS11而確定該第一特定物理參數範圍RD1E4的條件下,該處理單元230藉由使用該儲存單元250來將所獲得的該特定測量值範圍碼EM14指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。該特定測量值範圍碼EM14代表被配置以代表該第一特定物理參數範圍RD1E4的一特定測量值範圍。該特定測量值範圍基於該感測器靈敏度表示GW11來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。例如,該感測單元334藉由執行該感測操作ZS11來執行相依於該感測器靈敏度YW11的一感測訊號產生以產生一感測訊號。 For example, before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 obtains the specific measurement value range code EM14. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the first specific physical parameter range RD1E4 based on the sensing operation ZS11 before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 uses the storage unit 250 to obtain the specific The measured value range code EM14 is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A. The specific measurement value range code EM14 represents a specific measurement value range configured to represent the first specific physical parameter range RD1E4. The specific measurement value range is preset with the specified measurement value format HH11 based on the sensor sensitivity indication GW11. For example, the sensing unit 334 performs a sensing signal generation dependent on the sensor sensitivity YW11 by performing the sensing operation ZS11 to generate a sensing signal.

在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230接收該感測訊號,響應該感測訊號來以該指定測量值格式HH11獲得一特定測量值,並執行用於檢查該特定測量值和該特定測量值範圍之間的一數學關係的一特定檢查操作。在該處理單元230基於該特定檢查操作而確定該可變物理參數QU1A處於的該第一特定物理參數範圍RD1E4的條件下,該處理單元230藉由使用該儲存單元250來將所獲得的該特定測量值範圍碼EM14指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。該處理單元230響應用於感測該可變物理參數QU1A的一特定感測操作來決定該處理單元230是否要 使用該儲存單元250以改變該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。例如,該特定感測操作由該感測單元334所執行。 Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 receives the sensing signal, obtains a specific measurement value in the specified measurement value format HH11 in response to the sensing signal, and executes a method for checking the specific measurement value and the specific measurement value A specific checking operation for a mathematical relationship between ranges of values. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is in the first specific physical parameter range RD1E4 based on the specific checking operation, the processing unit 230 uses the storage unit 250 to store the obtained specific The measured value range code EM14 is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A. The processing unit 230 determines whether the processing unit 230 is to respond to a specific sensing operation for sensing the variable physical parameter QU1A Use the storage unit 250 to change the variable physical parameter range code UN1A. For example, the specific sensing operation is performed by the sensing unit 334 .

在一些實施例中,該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:在該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11來從該儲存空間SS11獲得一操作參考資料碼XU11;以及該處理單元230藉由運行一資料確定程序NA1A,執行使用該操作參考資料碼XU11的一資料確定AA1A以確定選擇自該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L以便從該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…中選擇該測量值應用範圍RN1L。 In some embodiments, the method MT12 further includes the following steps: under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 obtains an operation reference code XU11 from the storage space SS11 in response to the trigger event EQ11; and the processing The unit 230 executes a data determination AA1A using the operation reference data code XU11 by running a data determination program NA1A to determine the measurement value application range code EM1L selected from the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . . The measured value application range RN1L is selected from the plurality of different measured value reference ranges RN11, RN12, . . .

該操作參考資料碼XU11相同於基於該觸發應用功能規格GCL1而被預設的一可允許參考資料碼。該資料確定程序NA1A基於該觸發應用功能規格GCL1而被建構。該資料確定AA1A是一第一資料確定操作AA11和一第二資料確定操作AA12的其中之一。在該操作參考資料碼XU11藉由存取被儲存在該儲存空間SS11中的該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A而被該處理單元230獲得以相同於該特定測量值範圍碼EM14的條件下,是該第一資料確定操作AA11的該資料確定AA1A基於所獲得的該特定測量值範圍碼EM14來確定該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L。例如,所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L相同或不同於所獲得的該特定測量值範圍碼EM14。 The operation reference code XU11 is the same as an allowable reference code preset based on the trigger application function specification GCL1. The data determination program NA1A is constructed based on the trigger application function specification GCL1. The data determination AA1A is one of a first data determination operation AA11 and a second data determination operation AA12. Under the condition that the operation reference data code XU11 is obtained by the processing unit 230 by accessing the variable physical parameter range code UN1A stored in the storage space SS11 to be the same as the specific measured value range code EM14, is The material determination AA1A of the first material determination operation AA11 determines the measurement value application range code EM1L based on the obtained specific measurement value range code EM14 . For example, the determined measurement value application range code EM1L is the same as or different from the specific measurement value range code EM14 obtained.

在該操作參考資料碼XU11藉由存取被儲存在該儲存空間SS11中的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A而被該 處理單元230獲得以相同於所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A的條件下,是該第二資料確定操作AA12的該資料確定AA1A藉由執行使用該第一測量值VN11和所獲得的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A的一第一科學計算MR11來從該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…中選擇該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L以確定該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L。例如,該第一科學計算MR11基於一特定經驗公式XR11而被執行。該特定經驗公式XR11基於所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A和該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…而被預先制定。例如,該特定經驗公式XR11基於該觸發應用功能規格GCL1而被預先制定。 In the operation reference code XU11 by accessing the nominal range limit value pair DD1A stored in the storage space SS11, the The processing unit 230 obtains the data determination AA1A of the second data determination operation AA12 under the same condition as the preset nominal range limit value pair DD1A by using the first measurement value VN11 and the obtained A first scientific calculation MR11 of the rated range limit value pair DD1A selects the measured value application range code EM1L from the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . . to determine the measured value application range code EM1L. For example, the first scientific calculation MR11 is performed based on a specific empirical formula XR11. The specific empirical formula XR11 is pre-established based on the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A and the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11 , EM12 , . . . . For example, the specific empirical formula XR11 is pre-established based on the triggering application function specification GCL1.

在一些實施例中,該方法MT12進一步包含一步驟:該處理單元230基於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L,獲得該應用範圍界限值對DN1L。做出該合理決定PW11的步驟包含下列子步驟:該處理單元230基於該第一測量值VN11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L之間的一第一資料比較CD11,檢查該第一數學關係KV11以做出該第一測量值VN11是否為於所選擇的該測量值應用範圍RN1L之內的一第一邏輯決定PB11;以及在該第一邏輯決定PB11是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL。 In some embodiments, the method MT12 further includes a step: the processing unit 230 obtains the application range limit value pair DN1L based on the determined measurement value application range code EM1L. The step of making the plausible decision PW11 comprises the following sub-steps: The processing unit 230 checks the first mathematical relationship KV11 to make a first logical decision PB11 whether the first measured value VN11 is within the selected measured value application range RN1L; and under the condition that the first logical decision PB11 is affirmative, the processing unit 230 Determine the application range RD1EL of the physical parameter that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in.

例如,在該第一應用範圍界限值DN15不同於該第二應用範圍界限值DN16且該第一測量值VN11是於該第一應用範圍界限值DN15和該第二應用範圍界限值 DN16之間的條件下,該處理單元230藉由比較該第一測量值VN11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L來做出該第一邏輯決定PB11以成為肯定的。在該第一應用範圍界限值DN15、該第二應用範圍界限值DN16和該第一測量值VN11是相等的條件下,該處理單元230藉由比較該第一測量值VN11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L來做出該第一邏輯決定PB11以成為肯定的。 For example, when the first application range limit value DN15 is different from the second application range limit value DN16 and the first measured value VN11 is between the first application range limit value DN15 and the second application range limit value Under the condition between DN16, the processing unit 230 makes the first logical decision PB11 by comparing the first measurement value VN11 with the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L to be positive. Under the condition that the first application range limit value DN15, the second application range limit value DN16 and the first measurement value VN11 are equal, the processing unit 230 compares the first measurement value VN11 with the obtained application The first logical decision PB11 is made affirmative for the range limit pair DN1L.

在一些實施例中,該可變物理參數QU1A存在於一控制目標裝置330中。該觸發事件EQ11是一觸發作用事件、一使用者輸入事件、一訊號輸入事件、一狀態改變事件和一識別媒介出現事件的其中之一,並被應用到該觸發應用功能FC11。該觸發應用功能規格GCL1進一步包含一物理參數表示GC1T1。該物理參數表示GC1T1用於表示在該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的一指定物理參數QD1T。該方法MT12進一步包含一步驟:在是該觸發作用事件的該觸發事件EQ11要發生的條件下,藉由使用該控制目標裝置330來執行與該可變物理參數QU1A相關的一指定功能操作ZH11。例如,該指定功能操作ZH11用於導致該觸發作用事件發生。 In some embodiments, the variable physical parameter QU1A exists in a control target device 330 . The trigger event EQ11 is one of a trigger action event, a user input event, a signal input event, a state change event and a recognition medium occurrence event, and is applied to the trigger application function FC11. The trigger application function specification GCL1 further includes a physical parameter representation GC1T1. The physical parameter representation GC1T1 is used to represent a specified physical parameter QD1T within the physical parameter target range RD1ET. The method MT12 further includes a step of executing a specified function operation ZH11 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A by using the control target device 330 under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 that is the trigger action event will occur. For example, the specified functional operation ZH11 is used to cause the triggering event to occur.

該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:該操作單元297提供用於執行該觸發應用功能FC11的一響應區域AC1;以及該記憶體單元25Y1提供相關於該觸發應用功能FC11的一記憶體空間SA1。例如,該記憶體空間SA1具有一第一記憶體位置PN1L和不同於該第一記憶體位置PN1L的一第二記憶體位置PX1L。該第一記憶體位置PN1L和該 第二記憶體位置PX1L皆基於所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L而被識別。 The method MT12 further includes the following steps: the operating unit 297 provides a response area AC1 for executing the triggering application function FC11 ; and the memory unit 25Y1 provides a memory space SA1 related to the triggering application function FC11 . For example, the memory space SA1 has a first memory location PN1L and a second memory location PX1L different from the first memory location PN1L. The first memory location PN1L and the The second memory location PX1L is identified based on the preset measurement value application range code EM1L.

該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:該記憶體單元25Y1在該第一記憶體位置PN1L儲存該應用範圍界限值對DN1L;以及該記憶體單元25Y1在該第二記憶體位置PX1L儲存一控制資料碼CK1T。例如,該控制資料碼CK1T包含一控制碼CC1T。該控制碼CC1T基於該物理參數表示GC1T1和用於轉換該物理參數表示GC1T1的一第三資料編碼操作ZX21而被預設。例如,該應用範圍界限值對DN1L和該控制資料碼CK1T皆基於所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L而被該記憶體單元25Y1儲存。 The method MT12 further includes the following steps: the memory unit 25Y1 stores the application range limit value pair DN1L in the first memory location PN1L; and the memory unit 25Y1 stores a control data code CK1T in the second memory location PX1L . For example, the control data code CK1T includes a control code CC1T. The control code CC1T is preset based on the physical parameter representation GC1T1 and a third data encoding operation ZX21 for converting the physical parameter representation GC1T1. For example, both the application range limit pair DN1L and the control data code CK1T are stored in the memory unit 25Y1 based on the preset measurement value application range code EM1L.

在一些實施例中,獲得該應用範圍界限值對DN1L的步驟包含一子步驟:該處理單元230藉由運行一資料獲取程序ND1A,執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L的一資料獲取AD1A以獲得該應用範圍界限值對DN1L。例如,該資料獲取AD1A是一第一資料獲取操作AD11和一第二資料獲取操作AD12的其中之一。該資料獲取程序ND1A基於該觸發應用功能規格GCL1而被建構。該第一資料獲取操作AD11基於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該第一記憶體位置PN1L的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L以獲得該應用範圍界限值對DN1L。 In some embodiments, the step of obtaining the application range limit value pair DN1L includes a sub-step: the processing unit 230 executes a data acquisition using the determined application range code EM1L of the measured value by running a data acquisition program ND1A AD1A to obtain the application range limit value to DN1L. For example, the data acquisition AD1A is one of a first data acquisition operation AD11 and a second data acquisition operation AD12. The data acquisition program ND1A is constructed based on the trigger application function specification GCL1. The first data acquisition operation AD11 uses the memory unit 25Y1 to access the application range limit value pair DN1L stored in the first memory location PN1L based on the determined measurement value application range code EM1L to obtain the application Range cutoffs to DN1L.

該第二資料獲取操作AD12藉由讀取被儲存在該儲存空間SS11中的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A來取得所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A,並藉由執行使用所 確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L和所獲得的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A的一第二科學計算MZ11來獲得該應用範圍界限值對DN1L。例如,該額定範圍界限值對DD1A包含該額定測量值範圍RD1N的一額定範圍界限值DD11和相對於該額定範圍界限值DD11的一額定範圍界限值DD12,並基於該額定物理參數範圍表示GC1E、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和該第一資料編碼操作ZX11來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。 The second data acquisition operation AD12 obtains the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A by reading the rated range limit value pair DD1A stored in the storage space SS11, and executes using the The determined measured value application range code EM1L and a second scientific calculation MZ11 of the obtained nominal range limit value pair DD1A are used to obtain the application range limit value pair DN1L. For example, the rated range limit value pair DD1A includes a rated range limit value DD11 of the rated measured value range RD1N and a rated range limit value DD12 relative to the rated range limit value DD11, and based on the rated physical parameter range represents GC1E, The sensor sensitivity indication GW11 and the first data encoding operation ZX11 are preset with the designated measurement value format HH11.

在一些實施例中,該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:在該合理決定PW11是否定的條件下,該處理單元230直接地到達獨立於該第一觸發訊號WX11的該第一操作時間TD11;在該合理決定PW11是肯定的條件下,該控制裝置和該操作單元297的其中之一響應與該可變物理參數QU1A相關的一指定應用操作ZA11來產生該第一觸發訊號WX11;在該合理決定PW11是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230響應該第一觸發訊號WX11來到達相依於該第一觸發訊號WX11的該第一操作時間TD11;以及該處理單元230在該第一操作時間TD11之內,基於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該第二記憶體位置PX1L的該控制資料碼CK1T。 In some embodiments, the method MT12 further includes the following steps: under the condition that the rational decision PW11 is negative, the processing unit 230 directly reaches the first operation time TD11 independent of the first trigger signal WX11; at the Under the condition that the reasonable decision PW11 is affirmative, one of the control device and the operation unit 297 responds to a specified application operation ZA11 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate the first trigger signal WX11; In the affirmative condition, the processing unit 230 responds to the first trigger signal WX11 to reach the first operation time TD11 dependent on the first trigger signal WX11; and the processing unit 230 is within the first operation time TD11, The range code EM1L is used based on the determined measurement value to use the memory unit 25Y1 to access the control data code CK1T stored in the second memory location PX1L.

該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:該處理單元230在該第一操作時間TD11之內,基於所存取的該控制資料碼CK1T來執行用於該觸發應用功能FC11的一訊號產生控制GS11以控制該輸出單元240;以及該輸出單元240響應該訊號產生控制GS11,執行用於該觸發應用功能FC11 的一第一訊號產生操作BS11以在該第一操作時間TD11之內產生該第一控制訊號SC11。例如,該第一控制訊號SC11輸送該控制碼CC1T,並用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL以進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。 The method MT12 further includes the following steps: the processing unit 230 executes a signal generation control GS11 for the trigger application function FC11 based on the accessed control data code CK1T within the first operation time TD11 to control the an output unit 240; and the output unit 240 generates a control GS11 in response to the signal, and executes the trigger application function FC11 A first signal generating operation BS11 to generate the first control signal SC11 within the first operation time TD11. For example, the first control signal SC11 conveys the control code CC1T and is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter application range RD1EL and enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…進一步包含不同於該測量值應用範圍RN1L的一測量值目標範圍RN1T。該觸發應用功能規格GCL1進一步包含用於表示該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的一第一物理參數候選範圍表示GC1T。該測量值目標範圍RN1T由不同於該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L的一測量值目標範圍碼EM1T所代表,具有一目標範圍界限值對DN1T,並被配置以代表該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET;藉此該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T被配置以指示該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。例如,該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T包含於該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…中。 The plurality of different measured value reference ranges RN11 , RN12 , . . . further include a measured value target range RN1T different from the measured value application range RN1L. The trigger application function specification GCL1 further includes a first physical parameter candidate range representation GC1T for representing the physical parameter target range RD1ET. The measured value target range RN1T is represented by a measured value target range code EM1T different from the measured value application range code EM1L, has a target range limit value pair DN1T, and is configured to represent the physical parameter target range RD1ET; thereby The measured value target range code EM1T is configured to indicate the physical parameter target range RD1ET. For example, the measured value target range code EM1T is included in the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . .

該目標範圍界限值對DN1T基於該第一物理參數候選範圍表示GC1T、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和用於轉換該第一物理參數候選範圍表示GC1T的一第四資料編碼操作ZX13來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。該測量值目標範圍RN1T基於該第一物理參數候選範圍表示GC1T、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和該第四資料編碼操作ZX13來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。 The target range limit pair DN1T uses the specification based on the first physical parameter candidate range representation GC1T, the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and a fourth data encoding operation ZX13 for converting the first physical parameter candidate range representation GC1T The measured value format HH11 is preset. The measured value target range RN1T is preset with the designated measured value format HH11 based on the first physical parameter candidate range representation GC1T, the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and the fourth data encoding operation ZX13.

在一些實施例中,該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…具有一總參考範圍數目NT11。例如, 該總參考範圍數目NT11基於該觸發應用功能規格GCL1而被預設。該方法MT12進一步包含一步驟:該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11,獲得該總參考範圍數目NT11。該第一科學計算MR11進一步使用所獲得的該總參考範圍數目NT11。該第二科學計算MZ11進一步使用所獲得的該總參考範圍數目NT11。例如,該總參考範圍數目NT11≧3;該總參考範圍數目NT11≧4;該總參考範圍數目NT11≧5;該總參考範圍數目NT11≧6;且該總參考範圍數目NT11≦255。 In some embodiments, the plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, . . . has a total reference range number NT11. For example, The total reference range number NT11 is preset based on the trigger application function specification GCL1. The method MT12 further includes a step: the processing unit 230 obtains the total number of reference ranges NT11 in response to the trigger event EQ11 . The first scientific calculation MR11 further uses the obtained total reference range number NT11. The second scientific calculation MZ11 further uses the obtained total reference range number NT11. For example, the total number of reference ranges NT11≧3; the total number of reference ranges NT11≧4; the total number of reference ranges NT11≧5; the total number of reference ranges NT11≧6; and the total number of reference ranges NT11≦255.

該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:藉由使用一控制目標裝置330,接收該第一控制訊號SC11;藉由使用該控制目標裝置330,從所接收的該第一控制訊號SC11獲得該控制碼CC1T;以及藉由使用該控制目標裝置330,基於所獲得的該控制碼CC1T來導致該可變物理參數QU1A從一第一特定物理參數QU13改變成一第二特定物理參數QU14。例如,該第一特定物理參數QU13是於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL之內。該第二特定物理參數QU14是於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內。例如,該控制目標裝置330耦合於該輸出單元240。該控制目標裝置330設置於該控制裝置210上,或由該控制裝置210所支撐。 The method MT12 further includes the following steps: receiving the first control signal SC11 by using a control target device 330; obtaining the control code CC1T from the received first control signal SC11 by using the control target device 330; And by using the control target device 330, the variable physical parameter QU1A is changed from a first specific physical parameter QU13 to a second specific physical parameter QU14 based on the obtained control code CC1T. For example, the first specific physical parameter QU13 is within the physical parameter application range RD1EL. The second specific physical parameter QU14 is within the physical parameter target range RD1ET. For example, the control target device 330 is coupled to the output unit 240 . The control target device 330 is disposed on the control device 210 or supported by the control device 210 .

該測量值應用範圍RN1L是該額定測量值範圍RD1N的一第一部分。該測量值目標範圍RN1T是該額定測量值範圍RD1N的一第二部分。該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET是分開的或相鄰的。在該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該物理參數目標範圍 RD1ET是分開的條件下,該測量值應用範圍RN1L和該測量值目標範圍RN1T是分開的。在該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET是相鄰的條件下,該測量值應用範圍RN1L和該測量值目標範圍RN1T是相鄰的。 The measured value application range RN1L is a first part of the nominal measured value range RD1N. The measured value target range RN1T is a second part of the nominal measured value range RD1N. The physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter target range RD1ET are separate or adjacent. In the application range of this physical parameter RD1EL and the target range of this physical parameter RD1ET is separated under the condition that the measured value application range RN1L and the measured value target range RN1T are separated. On the condition that the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter target range RD1ET are adjacent, the measurement value application range RN1L and the measurement value target range RN1T are adjacent.

例如,該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L被配置以等於一整數。該額定範圍界限值DD12大於該額定範圍界限值DD11。該額定範圍界限值DD12和該額定範圍界限值DD11之間具有相對於該額定範圍界限值DD11的一相對值VA11。該相對值VA11等於該額定範圍界限值DD12減去該額定範圍界限值DD11的一計算結果。例如,該應用範圍界限值對DN1L基於該額定範圍界限值DD11、該額定範圍界限值DD12、該整數、和該相對值VA11對於該總參考範圍數目NT11的一比率而被預設。該第二科學計算MZ11使用該額定範圍界限值DD11、該額定範圍界限值DD12、該整數、該比率和其任意組合的其中之一。 For example, the measurement value application range code EM1L is configured to be equal to an integer. The setpoint range limit value DD12 is greater than the setpoint range limit value DD11 . There is a relative value VA11 between the rated range limit value DD12 and the rated range limit value DD11 relative to the rated range limit value DD11 . The relative value VA11 is equal to a calculation result obtained by subtracting the rated range limit value DD11 from the rated range limit value DD11 . For example, the application range limit pair DN1L is preset based on the nominal range limit DD11, the nominal range limit DD12, the integer, and a ratio of the relative value VA11 to the total reference range number NT11. The second scientific calculation MZ11 uses one of the rated range limit value DD11, the rated range limit value DD12, the integer, the ratio and any combination thereof.

該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET相同或不同於包含於該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…中的一第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2。例如,該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2不同於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL。該測量值目標範圍RN1T相同或不同於包含於該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…中的一測量值候選範圍RN12。例如,該測量值候選範圍RN12不同於該測量值應用範圍RN1L。 The physical parameter target range RD1ET is the same as or different from a first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 included in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . . For example, the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 is different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL. The measurement value target range RN1T is the same as or different from a measurement value candidate range RN12 included in the plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, . . . . For example, the measurement value candidate range RN12 is different from the measurement value application range RN1L.

在一些實施例中,該觸發應用功能規格 GCL1進一步包含用於表示該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2的一第二物理參數候選範圍表示GC12。該測量值候選範圍RN12由不同於該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L的一測量值候選範圍碼EM12所代表,具有一候選範圍界限值對DN1B,並被配置以代表該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2;藉此該測量值候選範圍碼EM12被配置以指示該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2。例如,該候選範圍界限值對DN1B基於該第二物理參數候選範圍表示GC12、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和用於轉換該第二物理參數候選範圍表示GC12的的一第五資料編碼操作ZX14來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。該測量值候選範圍RN12基於該第二物理參數候選範圍表示GC12、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和該第五資料編碼操作ZX14來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。 In some embodiments, the trigger application function specification GCL1 further includes a second physical parameter candidate range representation GC12 for representing the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2. The measured value candidate range RN12 is represented by a measured value candidate range code EM12 different from the measured value application range code EM1L, has a candidate range limit value pair DN1B, and is configured to represent the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2; thereby The measurement value candidate range code EM12 is configured to indicate the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2. For example, the candidate range limit pair DN1B is based on the second physical parameter candidate range representation GC12, the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and a fifth data encoding operation ZX14 for converting the second physical parameter candidate range representation GC12 Preset with the specified measurement value format HH11. The measured value candidate range RN12 is preset with the designated measured value format HH11 based on the second physical parameter candidate range representation GC12 , the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and the fifth data encoding operation ZX14 .

該方法MT12進一步包含一步驟:在該第一邏輯決定PB11是否定的條件下,該處理單元230藉由執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L的一第三科學計算MR21來確定選擇自該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…的該測量值候選範圍碼EM12以便從該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…中選擇該測量值候選範圍RN12。 The method MT12 further comprises a step: under the condition that the first logic decision PB11 is negative, the processing unit 230 determines the selection from The measured value candidate range code EM12 of the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11 , EM12 , .

該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:該處理單元230基於所確定的該測量值候選範圍碼EM12,獲得該候選範圍界限值對DN1B;以及該處理單元230基於該第一測量值VN11和所獲得的該候選範圍界限值對DN1B之間的一第二資料比較CD21,檢查該第一測量值VN11和所選擇 的該測量值候選範圍RN12之間的一第二數學關係KV21以做出該第一測量值VN11是否為於所選擇的該測量值候選範圍RN12之內的一第二邏輯決定PB21。 The method MT12 further includes the following steps: the processing unit 230 obtains the candidate range limit value pair DN1B based on the determined measurement value candidate range code EM12; and the processing unit 230 obtains the candidate range limit value pair DN1B based on the first measurement value VN11 and the obtained A second data comparison CD21 between the candidate range limit value pair DN1B checks the first measured value VN11 and the selected A second mathematical relationship KV21 between the measured value candidate ranges RN12 is used to make a second logical decision PB21 whether the first measured value VN11 is within the selected measured value candidate range RN12.

該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:在該第二邏輯決定PB21是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2;以及在該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2被該處理單元230確定的條件下,該處理單元230執行用於該觸發應用功能FC11的一第二訊號產生操作BS21以產生不同於該第一控制訊號SC11的一第二控制訊號SC12。該第二控制訊號SC12用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2以進入包含於該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…中的一第二物理參數候選範圍RD1E3。 The method MT12 further includes the following steps: under the condition that the second logical decision PB21 is positive, the processing unit 230 determines the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located; Under the condition that the parameter candidate range RD1E2 is determined by the processing unit 230, the processing unit 230 executes a second signal generating operation BS21 for the trigger application function FC11 to generate a second control signal different from the first control signal SC11 SC12. The second control signal SC12 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 to enter a second physical parameter candidate range RD1E3 included in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . .

在一些實施例中,該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:在該訊號產生控制GS11於一操作時間TD11之內被該處理單元230執行之後,該感測單元334感測該可變物理參數QU1A以產生一第二感測訊號SN12;該處理單元230於該操作時間TD11之後的一指定時間TG12之內,響應該第二感測訊號SN12來以該指定測量值格式HH11獲得一第二測量值VN12;以及在該訊號產生控制GS11被該處理單元230執行的條件下,該處理單元230基於所存取的該控制資料碼CK1T和所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L的其中之一來確定該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T以確定該測量值目標範圍RN1T。 In some embodiments, the method MT12 further includes the following steps: after the signal generation control GS11 is executed by the processing unit 230 within an operation time TD11, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate A second sensing signal SN12; the processing unit 230 responds to the second sensing signal SN12 within a specified time TG12 after the operating time TD11 to obtain a second measured value VN12 in the specified measured value format HH11; And under the condition that the signal generation control GS11 is executed by the processing unit 230, the processing unit 230 determines the measurement based on one of the accessed control data code CK1T and the determined measurement value application range code EM1L Value target range code EM1T to determine the measured value target range RN1T.

該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:該處理單元230基於所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T,獲得該目標範圍界限值對DN1T;以及該處理單元230基於該第二測量值VN12和所獲得的該目標範圍界限值對DN1T之間的一第三資料比較CD22,檢查該第二測量值VN12和所確定的該測量值目標範圍RN1T之間的一第三數學關係KV22以做出該第二測量值VN12是否為於所確定的該測量值目標範圍RN1T之內的一第三邏輯決定PB22。例如,在該處理單元230執行該訊號產生控制GS11之後,該感測單元334感測該可變物理參數QU1A以執行相依於該感測器靈敏度YW11的一感測訊號產生HF12,該感測訊號產生HF12用於產生該第二感測訊號SN12。 The method MT12 further includes the following steps: the processing unit 230 obtains the target range limit value pair DN1T based on the determined measurement value target range code EM1T; and the processing unit 230 obtains the target range limit value pair DN1T based on the second measurement value VN12 and the obtained A third data comparison CD22 between target range limit value pair DN1T checks a third mathematical relationship KV22 between the second measured value VN12 and the determined measured value target range RN1T to make the second measured value A third logical decision PB22 is whether VN12 is within the determined measurement value target range RN1T. For example, after the processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS11, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to perform a sensing signal generation HF12 dependent on the sensor sensitivity YW11, the sensing signal Generate HF12 for generating the second sensing signal SN12.

該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:在該第三邏輯決定PB22是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230於該指定時間TG12之內確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET;以及在該特定測量值範圍碼EM14不同於所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T且該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET藉由做出該第三邏輯決定PB22而被該處理單元230確定的條件下,該處理單元230基於等於該特定測量值範圍碼EM14的該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A和所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T之間的一第一碼差異DF11來將所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。 The method MT12 further includes the following steps: under the condition that the third logical decision PB22 is positive, the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter target range RD1ET where the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently within the specified time TG12; and Under the condition that the specific measured value range code EM14 is different from the determined measured value target range code EM1T and the physical parameter target range RD1ET is determined by the processing unit 230 by making the third logical decision PB22, the processing Unit 230 converts the determined measured value target range based on a first code difference DF11 between the variable physical parameter range code UN1A equal to the specific measured value range code EM14 and the determined measured value target range code EM1T Code EM1T is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.

該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:當該觸發事件EQ11發生時,該輸出單元240顯示一第一狀態指示 LB11,其中該第一狀態指示LB11用於指示該可變物理參數QU1A被配置於該第一特定物理參數範圍RD1E4之內的一第一特定狀態XJ11;以及在該特定測量值範圍碼EM14不同於所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T且該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET藉由做出該第三邏輯決定PB22而被該處理單元230確定的條件下,該處理單元230基於該第一碼差異DF11來導致該輸出單元240將該第一狀態指示LB11改變成一第二狀態指示LB12。例如,該第二狀態指示LB12用於指示該可變物理參數QU1A被配置於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的一第二特定狀態XJ12。 The method MT12 further includes the following steps: when the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the output unit 240 displays a first status indication LB11, wherein the first state indication LB11 is used to indicate that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured in a first specific state XJ11 within the first specific physical parameter range RD1E4; and the specific measurement value range code EM14 is different from Under the condition that the measured value target range code EM1T is determined and the physical parameter target range RD1ET is determined by the processing unit 230 by making the third logical decision PB22, the processing unit 230 determines based on the first code difference DF11 This causes the output unit 240 to change the first status indicator LB11 into a second status indicator LB12. For example, the second state indicator LB12 is used to indicate a second specific state XJ12 in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured within the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

在一些實施例中,獲得該第一測量值VN11的步驟包含一子步驟:在該觸發事件EQ11是該識別媒介出現事件且出現於該響應區域AC1的一識別媒介310被該處理單元230辨識了的條件下,該處理單元230基於該第一感測訊號SN11來獲得該第一測量值VN11。該方法MT12進一步包含一步驟:在該可變物理參數QU1A由於該觸發事件EQ11而被配置於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的條件下,該輸入單元270接收一使用者輸入操作BQ11。 In some embodiments, the step of obtaining the first measurement value VN11 includes a sub-step: when the trigger event EQ11 is the occurrence event of the identification medium and an identification medium 310 appearing in the response area AC1 is recognized by the processing unit 230 Under the condition of , the processing unit 230 obtains the first measurement value VN11 based on the first sensing signal SN11 . The method MT12 further includes a step: under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured within the physical parameter target range RD1ET due to the trigger event EQ11 , the input unit 270 receives a user input operation BQ11 .

該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:該處理單元230響應該使用者輸入操作BQ11,確定一特定輸入碼UW11,其中該特定輸入碼UW11選擇自該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…;以及在該特定輸入碼UW11不同於所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的條件下,該處理單元230基於等於所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A和該特定輸入碼 UW11之間的一第二碼差異DX11來導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET以進入包含於該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…中的一第二特定物理參數範圍RD1E5。 The method MT12 further includes the following steps: the processing unit 230 determines a specific input code UW11 in response to the user input operation BQ11, wherein the specific input code UW11 is selected from the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . . ; and Under the condition that the specific input code UW11 is different from the preset measured value target range code EM1T, the processing unit 230 is based on the variable physical parameter range code UN1A equal to the determined measured value target range code EM1T and the specific input code A second code difference DX11 between UW11 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter a second specific physical parameter range included in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . RD1E5.

在一些實施例中,感測該可變物理參數QU1A的步驟包含一子步驟:在該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該感測單元334感測處於一拘束條件FR11的該可變物理參數QU1A以提供該第一感測訊號SN11。例如,該拘束條件FR11是該可變物理參數QU1A等於包含於該額定物理參數範圍RD1E中的一第三特定物理參數QU11。獲得該第一測量值VN11的步驟包含一子步驟:該處理單元230基於該第一感測訊號SN11,估計該第三特定物理參數QU11以獲得該第一測量值VN11。 In some embodiments, the step of sensing the variable physical parameter QU1A includes a sub-step: under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A under a constraint condition FR11 to provide the first sensing signal SN11. For example, the constraint condition FR11 is that the variable physical parameter QU1A is equal to a third specific physical parameter QU11 included in the rated physical parameter range RD1E. The step of obtaining the first measurement value VN11 includes a sub-step: the processing unit 230 estimates the third specific physical parameter QU11 based on the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain the first measurement value VN11.

由於處於該拘束條件FR11的該可變物理參數QU1A是於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL之內,該處理單元230辨識該第一測量值VN11為於該測量值應用範圍RN1L之內的一可允許值,藉此辨識該第一測量值VN11和該測量值應用範圍RN1L之間的該第一數學關係KV11為一數值交集關係,並藉此確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL。 Since the variable physical parameter QU1A under the constraint condition FR11 is within the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the processing unit 230 identifies the first measurement value VN11 as an allowable value within the measurement value application range RN1L , thereby identifying the first mathematical relationship KV11 between the first measured value VN11 and the measured value application range RN1L as a numerical intersection relationship, and thereby determining the physical parameter application range where the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located RD1EL.

在一些實施例中,該感測單元334基於與該感測訊號產生HF11相關的該感測器靈敏度YW11而被特徵化,並被配置以符合該感測器規格FU11。該感測器規格FU11包含用於表示該感測器靈敏度YW11的該感測器靈敏度表示GW11、和用於表示一感測器測量範圍RB1E的一感 測器測量範圍表示GW1R。例如,該額定物理參數範圍RD1E被配置以相同於該感測器測量範圍RB1E,或被配置以是該感測器測量範圍RB1E的一部分。該感測器測量範圍RB1E相關於由該感測單元334所執行的一物理參數感測。該感測器測量範圍表示GW1R基於一第一預設測量單位而被提供。例如,該第一預設測量單位是一公制測量單位和一英制測量單位的其中之一。 In some embodiments, the sensing unit 334 is characterized based on the sensor sensitivity YW11 associated with the sensing signal generation HF11 and is configured to comply with the sensor specification FU11. The sensor specification FU11 includes the sensor sensitivity indication GW11 for indicating the sensor sensitivity YW11, and a sensor sensitivity indication GW11 for indicating a sensor measurement range RB1E. The measurement range of the instrument indicates GW1R. For example, the nominal physical parameter range RD1E is configured to be identical to the sensor measurement range RB1E, or configured to be a part of the sensor measurement range RB1E. The sensor measurement range RB1E is related to a physical parameter sensing performed by the sensing unit 334 . The sensor measurement range indicates that GW1R is provided based on a first preset measurement unit. For example, the first preset measurement unit is one of a metric measurement unit and an imperial measurement unit.

該額定測量值範圍RD1N和該額定範圍界限值對DD1A皆基於該額定物理參數範圍表示GC1E、該感測器測量範圍表示GW1R、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和該第一資料編碼操作ZX11來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。該測量值應用範圍RN1L和該應用範圍界限值對DN1L皆基於該物理參數應用範圍表示GC1L、該感測器測量範圍表示GW1R、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和該第二資料編碼操作ZX12來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。該測量值目標範圍RN1T和該目標範圍界限值對DN1T皆基於該第一物理參數候選範圍表示GC1T、該感測器測量範圍表示GW1R、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和該第四資料編碼操作ZX13來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。 The rated measurement value range RD1N and the rated range limit value pair DD1A are based on the rated physical parameter range indicating GC1E, the sensor measuring range indicating GW1R, the sensor sensitivity indicating GW11 and the first data encoding operation ZX11. The specified measurement value format is HH11 and is preset. The measurement value application range RN1L and the application range limit value pair DN1L are based on the physical parameter application range representation GC1L, the sensor measurement range representation GW1R, the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and the second data encoding operation ZX12. The specified measurement value format is HH11 and is preset. The measured value target range RN1T and the target range threshold pair DN1T are based on the first physical parameter candidate range representation GC1T, the sensor measurement range representation GW1R, the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and the fourth data encoding operation ZX13 to be preset with the specified measurement value format HH11.

該測量值候選範圍RN12和該候選範圍界限值對DN1B皆基於該第二物理參數候選範圍表示GC12、該感測器測量範圍表示GW1R、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和該第五資料編碼操作ZX14來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。該額定物理參數範圍表示GC1E、該物理參數應用範圍表示GC1L、該物理參數表示GC1T1、該第一物理參 數候選範圍表示GC1T和該第二物理參數候選範圍表示GC12皆基於一第二預設測量單位而被提供。例如,該第二預設測量單位是一公制測量單位和一英制測量單位的其中之一,並相同或不同於該第一預設測量單位。 The measurement value candidate range RN12 and the candidate range limit value pair DN1B are both based on the second physical parameter candidate range representation GC12, the sensor measurement range representation GW1R, the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and the fifth data encoding operation ZX14 to be preset with the specified measurement value format HH11. The rated physical parameter range indicates GC1E, the physical parameter application range indicates GC1L, the physical parameter indicates GC1T1, and the first physical parameter Both the number candidate range representation GC1T and the second physical parameter candidate range representation GC12 are provided based on a second preset measurement unit. For example, the second default measurement unit is one of a metric measurement unit and an imperial measurement unit, and is the same as or different from the first default measurement unit.

該可變物理參數QU1A進一步基於該感測器測量範圍RB1E而被特徵化。例如,該感測器測量範圍表示GW1R、該額定物理參數範圍表示GC1E、該物理參數應用範圍表示GC1L、該第一物理參數候選範圍表示GC1T、該第二物理參數候選範圍表示GC12和該物理參數表示GC1T1皆屬於十進制資料類型。該第一測量值VN11、該第二測量值VN12、該額定範圍界限值對DD1A、該應用範圍界限值對DN1L、該目標範圍界限值對DN1T、該候選範圍界限值對DN1B和該控制碼CC1T皆屬於該二進制資料類型,並皆適用於電腦處理。該感測器規格FU11和該觸發應用功能規格GCL1皆被預設。 The variable physical parameter QU1A is further characterized based on the sensor measurement range RB1E. For example, the sensor measurement range represents GW1R, the rated physical parameter range represents GC1E, the physical parameter application range represents GC1L, the first physical parameter candidate range represents GC1T, the second physical parameter candidate range represents GC12 and the physical parameter Indicates that GC1T1 belongs to the decimal data type. The first measured value VN11, the second measured value VN12, the pair of nominal range limit values DD1A, the pair of application range limit values DN1L, the pair of target range limit values DN1T, the pair of candidate range limit values DN1B and the control code CC1T All belong to the binary data type, and are suitable for computer processing. Both the sensor specification FU11 and the trigger application function specification GCL1 are preset.

在一些實施例中,該第一記憶體位置PN1L基於一第一記憶體位址FN1L而被識別。該第一記憶體位址FN1L基於所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L而被預設。該第二記憶體位置PX1L基於一第二記憶體位址FX1L而被識別。該第二記憶體位址FX1L基於所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L而被預設。 In some embodiments, the first memory location PN1L is identified based on a first memory address FN1L. The first memory address FN1L is preset based on the preset measurement value application range code EM1L. The second memory location PX1L is identified based on a second memory address FX1L. The second memory address FX1L is preset based on the preset measurement value application range code EM1L.

該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230取得所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L、所預設的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L和所預設的該控制資料碼CK1T;該處理單元230基 於所取得的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L,獲得該第一記憶體位址FN1L;以及在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230基於所取得的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L和所獲得的該第一記憶體位址FN1L來提供輸送所取得的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L和所獲得的該第一記憶體位址FN1L的一第一寫入請求訊息WD1L。例如,該第一寫入請求訊息WD1L用於在該第一記憶體位置PN1L儲存所輸送的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L。 The method MT12 further includes the following steps: before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 obtains the preset measurement value application range code EM1L, the preset application range limit value pair DN1L and the preset Control data code CK1T; The processing unit 230 base Apply range code EM1L to the obtained measurement value to obtain the first memory address FN1L; and before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 based on the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L and the obtained The first memory address FN1L is used to provide a first write request message WD1L for conveying the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L and the obtained first memory address FN1L. For example, the first write request message WD1L is used to store the transmitted application range limit value pair DN1L in the first memory location PN1L.

該方法MT12進一步包含下列步驟:該處理單元230基於所取得的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L,獲得該第二記憶體位址FX1L;以及在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230基於所取得的該控制資料碼CK1T和所獲得的該第二記憶體位址FX1L來提供輸送所取得的該控制資料碼CK1T和所獲得的該第二記憶體位址FX1L的一第二寫入請求訊息WC1L。例如,該第二寫入請求訊息WC1L用於在該第二記憶體位置PX1L儲存所輸送的該控制資料碼CK1T。該識別媒介310是一電子標籤350、一條碼媒介360和一生物識別作用媒介370的其中之一。 The method MT12 further includes the following steps: the processing unit 230 obtains the second memory address FX1L based on the obtained measurement value by applying a range code EM1L; and before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 obtains the address based on the obtained The control data code CK1T and the obtained second memory address FX1L are used to provide a second write request message WC1L conveying the obtained control data code CK1T and the obtained second memory address FX1L. For example, the second write request message WC1L is used to store the transmitted control data code CK1T in the second memory location PX1L. The identification medium 310 is one of an electronic tag 350 , a barcode medium 360 and a biometric identification medium 370 .

請參閱第9圖。第9圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8018的示意圖。如第9圖所示,該實施結構8018包含該識別媒介310、該控制裝置210、該控制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制裝置210鏈接於該伺服器280。該控制裝置210用於依靠該觸發事件EQ11而控制存在於該控制目標裝置330中的該可變物理參數QU1A,並包含該感測單元334、該操作單元297和該儲 存單元250。該操作單元297包含該處理單元230、該響應區域AC1、該讀取器220、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該處理單元230耦合於該伺服器280、該感測單元334、該儲存單元250、該讀取器220、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該感測單元334、該儲存單元250、該讀取器220、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240皆受該處理單元230控制。 See Figure 9. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8018 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in FIG. 9 , the implementation structure 8018 includes the identification medium 310 , the control device 210 , the control target device 330 and the server 280 . The control device 210 is linked to the server 280 . The control device 210 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 depending on the trigger event EQ11, and includes the sensing unit 334, the operating unit 297 and the storage storage unit 250. The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230 , the response area AC1 , the reader 220 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280 , the sensing unit 334 , the storage unit 250 , the reader 220 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The sensing unit 334 , the storage unit 250 , the reader 220 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 are all controlled by the processing unit 230 .

在一些實施例中,該觸發事件EQ11是該識別媒介310出現於該響應區域AC1的該識別媒介出現事件。該觸發應用功能FC11是一識別應用功能。該響應區域AC1用於執行該觸發應用功能FC11。該讀取器220耦合於該響應區域AC1和該處理單元230。例如,在該識別媒介310出現於該響應區域AC1的該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該感測單元334感測該可變物理參數QU1A以產生該第一感測訊號SN11。 In some embodiments, the trigger event EQ11 is the recognition medium appearance event that the recognition medium 310 appears in the response area AC1. The trigger application function FC11 is an identification application function. The response area AC1 is used to execute the triggered application function FC11. The reader 220 is coupled to the response area AC1 and the processing unit 230 . For example, under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 of the identification medium 310 appearing in the response area AC1 occurs, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate the first sensing signal SN11 .

該處理單元230接收該第一感測訊號SN11,並響應該觸發事件EQ11來處理所接收的該第一感測訊號SN11以獲得該第一測量值VN11。例如,在該處理單元230通過該讀取器220而辨識了出現於該響應區域AC1的該識別媒介310的條件下,該處理單元230處理所接收的該第一感測訊號SN11以獲得該第一測量值VN11。 The processing unit 230 receives the first sensing signal SN11 , and processes the received first sensing signal SN11 in response to the trigger event EQ11 to obtain the first measurement value VN11 . For example, under the condition that the processing unit 230 identifies the identification medium 310 appearing in the response area AC1 through the reader 220, the processing unit 230 processes the received first sensing signal SN11 to obtain the second - Measured value VN11.

該識別媒介310由一識別媒介識別符HU11所識別,並是該電子標籤350、該條碼媒介360和該生物識別作用媒介370的其中之一。在該識別媒介310出現於該響應區域AC1的條件下,該讀取器220藉由執行用於該識 別應用功能的一讀取操作BX11來讀取該識別媒介310以獲得一讀取資料DB11。該處理單元230基於該讀取資料DB11來確定等於該識別媒介識別符HU11的一識別媒介辨識碼CU11,並藉此辨識該識別媒介310。 The identification medium 310 is identified by an identification medium identifier HU11 and is one of the electronic tag 350 , the barcode medium 360 and the biometric identification medium 370 . Under the condition that the identification medium 310 appears in the response area AC1, the reader 220 executes the A read operation BX11 of the application function is used to read the identification medium 310 to obtain a read data DB11. The processing unit 230 determines an identification medium identification code CU11 equal to the identification medium identifier HU11 based on the read data DB11 , thereby identifying the identification medium 310 .

在該處理單元230獲得該第一測量值VN11的條件下,該處理單元230執行用於檢查該第一測量值VN11和該測量值應用範圍RN1L之間的該第一數學關係KV11的一檢查操作BV11。在該處理單元230基於該檢查操作BV11而確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下,該處理單元230導致該輸出單元240產生該第一控制訊號SC11。例如,該第一控制訊號SC11是一脈衝寬度調變訊號、一電位準訊號、一驅動訊號和一指令訊號的其中之一。 Under the condition that the processing unit 230 obtains the first measurement value VN11, the processing unit 230 performs a checking operation for checking the first mathematical relationship KV11 between the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L BV11. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RD1EL in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located based on the checking operation BV11 , the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to generate the first control signal SC11 . For example, the first control signal SC11 is one of a pulse width modulation signal, a potential signal, a driving signal and a command signal.

在一些實施例中,該實施結構8018進一步包含一控制目標裝置630。該控制裝置210由一控制裝置識別符HA0T所識別,並用於控制該控制目標裝置630。該輸出單元240具有一輸出端240P和一輸出端240Q;藉此該操作單元297具有該輸出端240P和該輸出端240Q。該輸出端240P和該輸出端240Q分別位於不同空間位置。該控制目標裝置330耦合於該輸出端240P,並由一控制目標裝置識別符HA1T所識別。該控制目標裝置630耦合於該輸出端240Q,並由一控制目標裝置識別符HA12所識別。 In some embodiments, the implementing structure 8018 further includes a control target device 630 . The control device 210 is identified by a control device identifier HAOT, and is used to control the control target device 630 . The output unit 240 has an output terminal 240P and an output terminal 240Q; thereby the operation unit 297 has the output terminal 240P and the output terminal 240Q. The output end 240P and the output end 240Q are respectively located at different spatial positions. The control target device 330 is coupled to the output terminal 240P, and is identified by a control target device identifier HA1T. The control target device 630 is coupled to the output terminal 240Q, and is identified by a control target device identifier HA12.

例如,該控制裝置識別符HA0T是一控制裝置號碼,並被預設。該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T被配置以指示該輸出端240P,是一第一控制目標裝置號碼,並被 預設。該控制目標裝置識別符HA12被配置以指示該輸出端240Q,是一第二控制目標裝置號碼,並被預設。該第一記憶體位置PN1L基於該第一記憶體位址FN1L而被識別。該第一記憶體位址FN1L基於所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L和所預設的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T而被預設。該第二記憶體位置PX1L基於該第二記憶體位址FX1L而被識別。該第二記憶體位址FX1L基於所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L和所預設的該控制目標裝置識別符HA12而被預設。 For example, the control device identifier HAOT is a control device number and is preset. The control target device identifier HA1T is configured to indicate that the output terminal 240P is a first control target device number, and is default. The control target device identifier HA12 is configured to indicate that the output terminal 240Q is a second control target device number and is preset. The first memory location PN1L is identified based on the first memory address FN1L. The first memory address FN1L is preset based on the preset measurement value application range code EM1L and the preset control target device identifier HA1T. The second memory location PX1L is identified based on the second memory address FX1L. The second memory address FX1L is preset based on the preset measurement value application range code EM1L and the preset control target device identifier HA12 .

在一些實施例中,該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11來獲得所預設的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T。該第一資料獲取操作AD11基於所獲得的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T和所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L來獲得該第一記憶體位址FN1L,並基於所獲得的該第一記憶體位址FN1L來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該第一記憶體位置PN1L的所預設的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L。在該處理單元230確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下,該處理單元230基於所獲得的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T和所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L來獲得該第二記憶體位址FX1L,並基於所獲得的該第二記憶體位址FX1L來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該第二記憶體位置PX1L的該控制資料碼CK1T。 In some embodiments, the processing unit 230 obtains the preset control target device identifier HA1T in response to the trigger event EQ11 . The first data acquisition operation AD11 obtains the first memory address FN1L based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T and the determined measurement value application range code EM1L, and based on the obtained first memory address FN1L uses the memory unit 25Y1 to access the preset application range threshold pair DN1L stored in the first memory location PN1L. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the processing unit 230 based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T and the determined measurement value application range code EM1L to obtain the second memory address FX1L, and use the memory unit 25Y1 to access the control data code CK1T stored in the second memory location PX1L based on the obtained second memory address FX1L.

該處理單元230基於所獲得的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T和所獲得的該控制資料碼CK1T來執行用 於該觸發應用功能FC11的該訊號產生控制GS11以控制該輸出單元240。該訊號產生控制GS11起到指示該輸出端240P的作用,並用於導致該處理單元230提供一控制訊號SH11到該輸出單元240。該控制訊號SH11起到指示該輸出端240P的作用。該輸出單元240響應該訊號產生控制GS11和該控制訊號SH11的其中之一來執行使用該輸出端240P的該訊號產生操作BS11以向該控制目標裝置330傳輸該第一控制訊號SC11。 The processing unit 230 executes the operation based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T and the obtained control data code CK1T The signal generation at the trigger application function FC11 controls GS11 to control the output unit 240 . The signal generation control GS11 is used to indicate the output terminal 240P, and is used to cause the processing unit 230 to provide a control signal SH11 to the output unit 240 . The control signal SH11 serves to indicate the output terminal 240P. The output unit 240 responds to one of the signal generation control GS11 and the control signal SH11 to execute the signal generation operation BS11 using the output terminal 240P to transmit the first control signal SC11 to the control target device 330 .

在一些實施例中,該處理單元230被配置以獲得所預設的該控制裝置識別符HA0T。該第一控制訊號SC11包含所獲得的該控制裝置識別符HA0T、所獲得的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T和所獲得的該控制碼CC1T的至少其中之一。在一特定情況中,該處理單元230響應一觸發事件EQ21來獲得所預設的該控制目標裝置識別符HA12,並基於所獲得的該控制目標裝置識別符HA12來通過該輸出端240Q而向該控制目標裝置630傳輸一控制訊號SC19。該控制訊號SC19用於控制該控制目標裝置630。 In some embodiments, the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the preset control device identifier HAOT. The first control signal SC11 includes at least one of the obtained control device identifier HA0T, the obtained control target device identifier HA1T and the obtained control code CC1T. In a specific case, the processing unit 230 responds to a trigger event EQ21 to obtain the preset control target device identifier HA12, and based on the obtained control target device identifier HA12, send the output terminal 240Q to the The control target device 630 transmits a control signal SC19. The control signal SC19 is used to control the control target device 630 .

例如,該儲存單元250儲存所預設的該控制裝置識別符HA0T、所預設的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T和所預設的該控制目標裝置識別符HA12。該處理單元230被配置以從該儲存單元250獲得所預設的該控制裝置識別符HA0T。該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11來從該儲存單元250獲得所預設的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T。該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ21來從該儲存單元250獲得所預設的該控制目標裝置識別符HA12。 For example, the storage unit 250 stores the preset control device identifier HA0T, the preset control target device identifier HA1T, and the preset control target device identifier HA12. The processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the preset control device identifier HAOT from the storage unit 250 . The processing unit 230 obtains the preset control target device identifier HA1T from the storage unit 250 in response to the trigger event EQ11 . The processing unit 230 obtains the preset control target device identifier HA12 from the storage unit 250 in response to the trigger event EQ21 .

例如,該儲存單元250具有一第一應用記憶體位置和一第二應用記憶體位置,在該第一應用記憶體位置儲存該額定範圍界限值對DD1A,並在該第二應用記憶體位置儲存該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。該第一應用記憶體位置由一第一應用記憶體位址所識別,或基於該第一應用記憶體位址而被識別。該第二應用記憶體位置由一第二應用記憶體位址所識別,或基於該第二應用記憶體位址而被識別。該第一應用記憶體位址和該第二應用記憶體位址皆基於所預設的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T而被預設。 For example, the storage unit 250 has a first application memory location and a second application memory location, the nominal range limit value pair DD1A is stored in the first application memory location, and stored in the second application memory location The variable physical parameter range code is UN1A. The first application memory location is identified by or based on a first application memory address. The second application memory location is identified by or based on a second application memory address. Both the first application memory address and the second application memory address are preset based on the preset control target device identifier HA1T.

在一些實施例中,該第二資料獲取操作AD12基於所獲得的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T來獲得該第一應用記憶體位址,並基於所獲得的該第一應用記憶體位址來使用該儲存單元250以讀取被儲存在該第一應用記憶體位置的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A以取得所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A。該處理單元230被配置以基於所獲得的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T而獲得該第二應用記憶體位址,並基於所獲得的該第二應用記憶體位址來使用該儲存單元250以存取被儲存在該第二應用記憶體位置的該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。 In some embodiments, the second data obtaining operation AD12 obtains the first application memory address based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T, and uses the stored address based on the obtained first application memory address. The unit 250 reads the rated range limit value pair DD1A stored in the first application memory location to obtain the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A. The processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the second application memory address based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T, and use the storage unit 250 to access the second application memory address based on the obtained second application memory address. The variable physical parameter range code UN1A stored in the second application memory location.

該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET具有一預設物理參數目標範圍界限ZD1T1和相對於該預設物理參數目標範圍界限ZD1T1的一預設物理參數目標範圍界限ZD1T2。該目標範圍界限值對DN1T包含該測量值目標範圍RN1T的一目標範圍界限值DN17和相對於該目標範圍界限值DN17的一目標範圍界限值DN18。該預設物理參數目標範 圍界限ZD1T1由該目標範圍界限值DN17所代表。該預設物理參數目標範圍界限ZD1T2由該目標範圍界限值DN18所代表。 The physical parameter target range RD1ET has a predetermined physical parameter target range limit ZD1T1 and a predetermined physical parameter target range limit ZD1T2 relative to the predetermined physical parameter target range limit ZD1T1 . The target range limit value pair DN1T comprises a target range limit value DN17 of the measured value target range RN1T and a target range limit value DN18 corresponding to the target range limit value DN17. The target range of the preset physical parameters The boundary limit ZD1T1 is represented by the target range limit value DN17. The target range limit ZD1T2 of the preset physical parameter is represented by the target range limit value DN18.

請參閱第10圖。第10圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8019的示意圖。如第10圖所示,該實施結構8019包含該控制裝置210、該控制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制裝置210鏈接於該伺服器280。該控制裝置210用於依靠該觸發事件EQ11而控制存在於該控制目標裝置330中的該可變物理參數QU1A,並包含該感測單元334、該操作單元297和該儲存單元250。該操作單元297包含該處理單元230、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該處理單元230耦合於該伺服器280、該感測單元334、該儲存單元250、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該輸出單元240耦合於該控制目標裝置330。 See Figure 10. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8019 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in FIG. 10 , the implementation structure 8019 includes the control device 210 , the control target device 330 and the server 280 . The control device 210 is linked to the server 280 . The control device 210 is used for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 depending on the trigger event EQ11 , and includes the sensing unit 334 , the operating unit 297 and the storage unit 250 . The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280 , the sensing unit 334 , the storage unit 250 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The output unit 240 is coupled to the control target device 330 .

在一些實施例中,該觸發應用功能FC11是一訊號輸入應用功能。該觸發事件EQ11是一訊號輸入事件。在該輸入單元270接收一觸發訊號ST11的該訊號輸入事件發生的條件下,該感測單元334感測該可變物理參數QU1A以產生該第一感測訊號SN11。例如,該處理單元230響應該輸入單元270接收該觸發訊號ST11的該觸發事件EQ11來處理所接收的該第一感測訊號SN11以獲得該第一測量值VN11。例如,該觸發訊號ST11由一功能開關470和一訊號產生器472的其中之一所提供。例如,該伺服器280包含該記憶體單元25Y1。該輸入單元270耦合於該功能開關470和該訊號產生器472的至少其中之一。 In some embodiments, the trigger application function FC11 is a signal input application function. The trigger event EQ11 is a signal input event. Under the condition that the input unit 270 receives a trigger signal ST11 and the signal input event occurs, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate the first sensing signal SN11 . For example, the processing unit 230 processes the received first sensing signal SN11 to obtain the first measurement value VN11 in response to the trigger event EQ11 of the trigger signal ST11 received by the input unit 270 . For example, the trigger signal ST11 is provided by one of a function switch 470 and a signal generator 472 . For example, the server 280 includes the memory unit 25Y1. The input unit 270 is coupled to at least one of the function switch 470 and the signal generator 472 .

在一些實施例中,該觸發應用功能FC11是一使用者輸入應用功能。在該觸發事件EQ11是一使用者輸入事件。該控制裝置210進一步包含耦合於該處理單元230的一電應用目標WJ11。在該輸入單元270接收一使用者輸入操作JU11的該使用者輸入事件發生的條件下,該感測單元334感測該可變物理參數QU1A以產生該第一感測訊號SN11。該使用者輸入操作JU11用於選擇該電應用目標WJ11。例如,該處理單元230響應該輸入單元270接收該使用者輸入操作JU11的該觸發事件EQ11來處理所接收的該第一感測訊號SN11以獲得該第一測量值VN11。例如,該控制裝置210由一使用者295所使用。該使用者輸入操作JU11由該使用者295所執行。 In some embodiments, the triggering application function FC11 is a user input application function. The trigger event EQ11 is a user input event. The control device 210 further includes an electrical application target WJ11 coupled to the processing unit 230 . Under the condition that the input unit 270 receives a user input operation JU11 and the user input event occurs, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate the first sensing signal SN11 . The user input operation JU11 is used to select the electrical application target WJ11. For example, the processing unit 230 processes the received first sensing signal SN11 to obtain the first measurement value VN11 in response to the input unit 270 receiving the trigger event EQ11 of the user input operation JU11. For example, the control device 210 is used by a user 295 . The user input operation JU11 is performed by the user 295 .

該電應用目標WJ11是一感測目標和一顯示目標的其中之一。在該電應用目標WJ11是該感測目標的條件下,該輸入單元270包含該電應用目標WJ11。在該電應用目標WJ11是該顯示目標的條件下,該輸出單元240包含該電應用目標WJ11。該輸入單元270響應該使用者輸入操作JU11來提供一操作請求訊號SZ11到該處理單元230。該處理單元230響應該操作請求訊號SZ11來確定該觸發事件EQ11。例如,在該處理單元230確定該觸發事件EQ11的條件下,該處理單元230基於該第一感測訊號SN11來獲得該第一測量值VN11。例如,該感測目標是一按鈕目標。該顯示目標是一圖符目標。 The electrical application object WJ11 is one of a sensing object and a display object. On the condition that the electric application object WJ11 is the sensing object, the input unit 270 includes the electric application object WJ11. On the condition that the electric application object WJ11 is the display object, the output unit 240 includes the electric application object WJ11. The input unit 270 provides an operation request signal SZ11 to the processing unit 230 in response to the user input operation JU11. The processing unit 230 determines the trigger event EQ11 in response to the operation request signal SZ11 . For example, under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the trigger event EQ11, the processing unit 230 obtains the first measurement value VN11 based on the first sensing signal SN11. For example, the sensing target is a button target. The display object is an icon object.

請參閱第11圖。第11圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8020的示意圖。如第11 圖所示,該實施結構8020包含該控制裝置210、該控制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制裝置210鏈接於該伺服器280。該控制裝置210用於依靠該觸發事件EQ11而控制存在於該控制目標裝置330中的該可變物理參數QU1A,並包含該感測單元334、該操作單元297和該儲存單元250。該操作單元297包含該處理單元230、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該處理單元230耦合於該伺服器280、該感測單元334、該儲存單元250、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該輸出單元240耦合於該控制目標裝置330。 See Figure 11. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8020 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . as the 11th As shown in the figure, the implementation structure 8020 includes the control device 210 , the control target device 330 and the server 280 . The control device 210 is linked to the server 280 . The control device 210 is used for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 depending on the trigger event EQ11 , and includes the sensing unit 334 , the operating unit 297 and the storage unit 250 . The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280 , the sensing unit 334 , the storage unit 250 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The output unit 240 is coupled to the control target device 330 .

在一些實施例中,該控制目標裝置330包含耦合於該輸出單元240的一物理參數形成區AU11,並被配置以於該物理參數形成區AU11中形成該可變物理參數QU1A。例如,該感測單元334耦合於該物理參數形成區AU11。該物理參數形成區AU11具有該可變物理參數QU1A。例如,該感測單元334被設置於該物理參數形成區AU11中。該控制裝置210設置於一應用環境EX11中,或具有該應用環境EX11。例如,該控制目標裝置330和該應用環境EX11的其中之一具有該可變物理參數QU1A。例如,該物理參數形成區AU11是一負載區、一顯示區、一感測區、一功率供應區和一環境區的其中之一。 In some embodiments, the control target device 330 includes a physical parameter forming area AU11 coupled to the output unit 240 and is configured to form the variable physical parameter QU1A in the physical parameter forming area AU11 . For example, the sensing unit 334 is coupled to the physical parameter forming area AU11. The physical parameter forming area AU11 has the variable physical parameter QU1A. For example, the sensing unit 334 is disposed in the physical parameter forming area AU11. The control device 210 is set in an application environment EX11, or has the application environment EX11. For example, one of the control target device 330 and the application environment EX11 has the variable physical parameter QU1A. For example, the physical parameter formation area AU11 is one of a load area, a display area, a sensing area, a power supply area and an environment area.

例如,該控制目標裝置330包含一操作單元397、和耦合於該操作單元397的一功能目標335。該功能目標335包含該物理參數形成區AU11。該操作單元397接收該第一控制訊號SC11,並響應該第一控制訊號SC11來產生一功能訊號SG11。例如,該功能訊號SG11是一控制 訊號。該功能目標335接收該功能訊號SG11,並響應該功能訊號SG11來導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL以進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。例如,該功能訊號SG11是一脈衝寬度調變訊號、一電位準訊號和一驅動訊號的其中之一。 For example, the control object device 330 includes an operation unit 397 and a function object 335 coupled to the operation unit 397 . The functional object 335 includes the physical parameter forming area AU11. The operation unit 397 receives the first control signal SC11, and generates a function signal SG11 in response to the first control signal SC11. For example, the function signal SG11 is a control signal. The function target 335 receives the function signal SG11 and responds to the function signal SG11 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter application range RD1EL and enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET. For example, the function signal SG11 is one of a pulse width modulation signal, a potential signal and a driving signal.

在一些實施例中,該操作單元397有線地或無線地從該輸出單元240接收該第一控制訊號SC11。該第一控制訊號SC11是一電訊號SP11和一光訊號SQ11的其中之一。在該第一控制訊號SC11是該電訊號SP11的條件下,該操作單元397從該輸出單元240接收該電訊號SP11。在該第一控制訊號SC11是該光訊號SQ11的條件下,該操作單元397從該輸出單元240接收輸送一編碼影像FY11的該光訊號SQ11。例如,該編碼影像FY11代表該控制碼CC1T,並是一條碼影像。 In some embodiments, the operation unit 397 receives the first control signal SC11 from the output unit 240 by wire or wirelessly. The first control signal SC11 is one of an electrical signal SP11 and an optical signal SQ11. Under the condition that the first control signal SC11 is the electrical signal SP11 , the operating unit 397 receives the electrical signal SP11 from the output unit 240 . Under the condition that the first control signal SC11 is the light signal SQ11 , the operation unit 397 receives the light signal SQ11 from the output unit 240 to transmit a coded image FY11 . For example, the encoded image FY11 represents the control code CC1T and is a barcode image.

該功能目標335具有該可變物理參數QU1A,並受該操作單元397控制。在該可變物理參數QU1A要依靠該控制裝置210而被提供的條件下,該操作單元397從該輸出單元240接收一物理參數訊號SB11。該功能目標335從該操作單元397接收該物理參數訊號SB11。該操作單元397導致該功能目標335使用該物理參數訊號SB11以形成取決於該物理參數訊號SB11的該可變物理參數QU1A。例如,該輸出單元240有線地或無線地傳輸該物理參數訊號SB11到該操作單元397。 The functional object 335 has the variable physical parameter QU1A and is controlled by the operating unit 397 . The operating unit 397 receives a physical parameter signal SB11 from the output unit 240 under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is provided depending on the control device 210 . The functional object 335 receives the physical parameter signal SB11 from the operating unit 397 . The operation unit 397 causes the functional object 335 to use the physical parameter signal SB11 to form the variable physical parameter QU1A depending on the physical parameter signal SB11. For example, the output unit 240 transmits the physical parameter signal SB11 to the operation unit 397 by wire or wirelessly.

在一些實施例中,由該控制目標裝置330所引起的該觸發作用事件是一狀態改變事件。該控制裝置 210進一步包含耦合於該處理單元230的一狀態改變偵測器475。例如,該狀態改變偵測器475是一極限偵測器和一邊緣偵測器的其中之一。該極限偵測器是一極限開關。該狀態改變偵測器475被配置以偵測與一預設特徵物理參數UL11相關的一特徵物理參數到達ZL12。該功能目標335包含一物理參數應用區AJ11。該物理參數應用區AJ11具有一可變物理參數QG1A。該可變物理參數QG1A相依於該可變物理參數QU1A,並基於該預設特徵物理參數UL11而被特徵化。例如,該物理參數應用區AJ11是一負載區、一顯示區、一感測區、一功率供應區和一環境區的其中之一。該預設特徵物理參數UL11相關於該可變物理參數QU1A。 In some embodiments, the trigger event caused by the control target device 330 is a state change event. the control device 210 further includes a state change detector 475 coupled to the processing unit 230 . For example, the state change detector 475 is one of a limit detector and an edge detector. The limit detector is a limit switch. The state change detector 475 is configured to detect a characteristic physical parameter related to a predetermined characteristic physical parameter UL11 reaching ZL12. The functional object 335 includes a physical parameter application area AJ11. The physical parameter application area AJ11 has a variable physical parameter QG1A. The variable physical parameter QG1A depends on the variable physical parameter QU1A and is characterized based on the preset characteristic physical parameter UL11 . For example, the physical parameter application area AJ11 is one of a load area, a display area, a sensing area, a power supply area and an environment area. The preset characteristic physical parameter UL11 is related to the variable physical parameter QU1A.

在是該觸發作用事件的該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該操作單元397使該功能目標335執行與該可變物理參數QU1A相關的該指定功能操作ZH11。該指定功能操作ZH11用於控制該可變物理參數QG1A,並藉由改變該可變物理參數QG1A來導致該觸發事件EQ11發生。該可變物理參數QG1A被配置以處於一可變物理狀態XA1A。例如,該操作單元397受該控制裝置210控制以使該功能目標335執行該指定功能操作ZH11。 Before the triggering event EQ11 which is the triggering action event occurs, the operating unit 397 makes the functional object 335 execute the specified functional operation ZH11 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A. The designated function operation ZH11 is used to control the variable physical parameter QG1A, and causes the trigger event EQ11 to occur by changing the variable physical parameter QG1A. The variable physical parameter QG1A is configured to be in a variable physical state XA1A. For example, the operation unit 397 is controlled by the control device 210 to make the function object 335 execute the designated function operation ZH11.

在該可變物理參數QU1A於該特定物理參數範圍RD1E4之內的條件下,該指定功能操作ZH11導致該可變物理參數QG1A到達該預設特徵物理參數UL11以形成該特徵物理參數到達ZL12,並藉由形成該特徵物理參數到達ZL12來將該可變物理狀態XA1A從一非特徵物理參數到達狀態XA11改變成一實際特徵物理參數到達狀態 XA12。該狀態改變偵測器475響應該特徵物理參數到達ZL12來產生一觸發訊號SX11。例如,該實際特徵物理參數到達狀態XA12基於該預設特徵物理參數UL11而被特徵化。該狀態改變偵測器475響應該可變物理參數QG1A被從該非特徵物理參數到達狀態XA11改變成該實際特徵物理參數到達狀態XA12的一狀態改變事件來產生該觸發訊號SX11。 Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is within the specified physical parameter range RD1E4, the designated function operation ZH11 causes the variable physical parameter QG1A to reach the preset characteristic physical parameter UL11 to form the characteristic physical parameter to reach ZL12, and Change the variable physical state XA1A from a non-characteristic physical parameter arrival state XA11 to an actual characteristic physical parameter arrival state by forming the characteristic physical parameter arrival ZL12 XA12. The state change detector 475 generates a trigger signal SX11 in response to the characteristic physical parameter reaching ZL12. For example, the actual characteristic physical parameter arrival state XA12 is characterized based on the preset characteristic physical parameter UL11 . The state change detector 475 generates the trigger signal SX11 in response to a state change event in which the variable physical parameter QG1A is changed from the non-characteristic physical parameter to the state XA11 to the actual characteristic physical parameter to the state XA12 .

例如,該觸發事件EQ11是該可變物理參數QG1A進入該實際特徵物理參數到達狀態XA12的該狀態改變事件。該輸入單元270耦合於該狀態改變偵測器475。該輸入單元270和該處理單元230的其中之一接收該觸發訊號SX11。該處理單元230響應所接收的該觸發訊號SX11來產生該第一控制訊號SC11。例如,在該狀態改變偵測器475是該極限開關的條件下,該特徵物理參數到達ZL12是等於一可變空間位置的該可變物理參數QG1A到達等於一預設極限位置的該預設特徵物理參數UL11的一極限位置到達。例如,該輸入單元270包含耦合於該處理單元230的一觸控螢幕2701。在該電應用目標WJ11是該感測目標的條件下,該觸控螢幕2701包含該電應用目標WJ11。 For example, the trigger event EQ11 is the state change event that the variable physical parameter QG1A enters the actual characteristic physical parameter arrival state XA12. The input unit 270 is coupled to the state change detector 475 . One of the input unit 270 and the processing unit 230 receives the trigger signal SX11 . The processing unit 230 generates the first control signal SC11 in response to the received trigger signal SX11 . For example, under the condition that the state change detector 475 is the limit switch, the characteristic physical parameter reaching ZL12 is equal to the variable physical parameter QG1A of a variable spatial position reaching the preset characteristic equal to a preset limit position A limit position of physical parameter UL11 is reached. For example, the input unit 270 includes a touch screen 2701 coupled to the processing unit 230 . On the condition that the electrical application object WJ11 is the sensing object, the touch screen 2701 includes the electrical application object WJ11.

例如,該處理單元230響應所接收的該觸發訊號SX11來使用該第一感測訊號SN11以獲得該第一測量值VN11。在該處理單元230藉由檢查該第一測量值VN11和該測量值應用範圍RN1L之間的該第一數學關係KV11而確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下,該處理單元230基於所確定的該測 量值應用範圍碼EM1L來獲得該控制資料碼CK1T,並基於所獲得的該控制資料碼CK1T來導致該輸出單元240產生用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的該第一控制訊號SC11。例如,該功能目標335藉由執行基於該可變物理參數QU1A而被引起的該指定功能操作ZH11來在該物理參數應用區AJ11中形成該可變物理參數QG1A。在該物理參數應用區AJ11耦合於該狀態改變偵測器475的條件下,該狀態改變偵測器475偵測該特徵物理參數到達ZL12。 For example, the processing unit 230 uses the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain the first measurement value VN11 in response to the received trigger signal SX11. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RD1EL that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in by checking the first mathematical relationship KV11 between the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L , the processing unit 230 based on the determined measurement Quantity uses the range code EM1L to obtain the control data code CK1T, and based on the obtained control data code CK1T, causes the output unit 240 to generate the first parameter for causing the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET A control signal SC11. For example, the functional object 335 forms the variable physical parameter QG1A in the physical parameter application area AJ11 by executing the specified functional operation ZH11 caused based on the variable physical parameter QU1A. Under the condition that the physical parameter application area AJ11 is coupled to the state change detector 475, the state change detector 475 detects that the characteristic physical parameter reaches ZL12.

在一些實施例中,該可變物理參數QU1A是一第一可變電性參數、一第一可變力學參數、一第一可變光學參數、一第一可變溫度、一第一可變電壓、一第一可變電流、一第一可變電功率、一第一可變電阻、一第一可變電容、一第一可變電感、一第一可變頻率、一第一時鐘時間、一第一可變時間長度、一第一可變亮度、一第一可變光強度、一第一可變音量、一第一可變資料流量、一第一可變振幅、一第一可變空間位置、一第一可變位移、一第一可變順序位置、一第一可變角度、一第一可變空間長度、一第一可變距離、一第一可變平移速度、一第一可變角速度、一第一可變加速度、一第一可變力、一第一可變壓力和一第一可變機械功率的其中之一。 In some embodiments, the variable physical parameter QU1A is a first variable electrical parameter, a first variable mechanical parameter, a first variable optical parameter, a first variable temperature, a first variable Voltage, a first variable current, a first variable electric power, a first variable resistance, a first variable capacitance, a first variable inductance, a first variable frequency, a first clock Time, a first variable time length, a first variable brightness, a first variable light intensity, a first variable volume, a first variable data flow, a first variable amplitude, a first Variable spatial position, a first variable displacement, a first variable sequence position, a first variable angle, a first variable spatial length, a first variable distance, a first variable translation speed, One of a first variable angular velocity, a first variable acceleration, a first variable force, a first variable pressure, and a first variable mechanical power.

該操作單元397被配置以依靠該控制訊號SC11而執行與該可變物理參數QU1A相關的一物理參數控制功能FA11。該控制目標裝置330是複數應用裝置的其中之一。該物理參數控制功能FA11是複數特定控制功能的其 中之一,該複數特定控制功能包含一光控制功能、一力控制功能、一電控制功能、一磁控制功能和其任意組合。該複數應用裝置包含一繼電器、一控制開關裝置、一電動機、一照明裝置、一門、一販賣機、一能量轉換器、一負載裝置、一定時裝置、一玩具、一電器、一列印裝置、一顯示裝置、一移動裝置、一揚聲器和其任意組合。 The operation unit 397 is configured to execute a physical parameter control function FA11 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A depending on the control signal SC11. The control target device 330 is one of the plurality of application devices. The physical parameter control function FA11 is one of the complex specific control functions One of them, the plurality of specific control functions include a light control function, a force control function, an electric control function, a magnetic control function and any combination thereof. The multiple application devices include a relay, a control switch device, a motor, a lighting device, a door, a vending machine, an energy converter, a load device, a timing device, a toy, an electrical appliance, a printing device, a Display device, a mobile device, a speaker and any combination thereof.

該功能目標335是複數應用目標的其中之一,並被配置以執行一特定應用功能。該特定應用功能是複數物理參數應用功能的其中之一,該複數物理參數應用功能包含一光使用功能、一力使用功能、一電使用功能、一磁使用功能和其任意組合。該複數應用目標包含一電子組件、一致動器、一電阻器、一電容器、一電感器、一繼電器、一控制開關、一電晶體、一電動機、一照明單元、一能量轉換單元、一負載單元、一定時單元、一列印單元、一顯示目標、一揚聲器和其任意組合。例如,該功能目標335是一物理可實現功能目標。 The function object 335 is one of a plurality of application objects and is configured to execute a specific application function. The specific application function is one of the complex physical parameter application functions, and the complex physical parameter application function includes a light use function, a force use function, an electricity use function, a magnetic use function and any combination thereof. The multiple application objects include an electronic component, an actuator, a resistor, a capacitor, an inductor, a relay, a control switch, a transistor, a motor, a lighting unit, an energy conversion unit, and a load unit , a timing unit, a printing unit, a display object, a loudspeaker and any combination thereof. For example, the functional object 335 is a physically achievable functional object.

例如,該可變物理參數QU1A和該可變物理參數QG1A分別屬於一物理參數類型TU11和一物理參數類型TU1G。該物理參數類型TU11相同或不同於該物理參數類型TU1G。該預設特徵物理參數UL11屬於該物理參數類型TU1G。該功能目標335包含具有該可變物理參數QU1A的該物理參數形成區AU11。該物理參數應用區AJ11耦合於該物理參數形成區AU11。例如,該指定功能操作ZH11用於驅動該物理參數應用區AJ11以形成該特徵物理參數到達ZL12。例如,該物理參數類型TU11不同於一時間類 型。 For example, the variable physical parameter QU1A and the variable physical parameter QG1A belong to a physical parameter type TU11 and a physical parameter type TU1G respectively. The physical parameter type TU11 is the same as or different from the physical parameter type TU1G. The preset characteristic physical parameter UL11 belongs to the physical parameter type TU1G. The functional object 335 includes the physical parameter forming area AU11 with the variable physical parameter QU1A. The physical parameter application area AJ11 is coupled to the physical parameter formation area AU11. For example, the specified function operation ZH11 is used to drive the physical parameter application area AJ11 to form the characteristic physical parameter to ZL12. For example, the physical parameter type TU11 is different from a time class type.

該可變物理參數QG1A是一可變電性參數、一可變力學參數、一可變光學參數、一可變溫度、一可變電壓、一可變電流、一可變電功率、一可變電阻、一可變電容、一可變電感、一可變頻率、一時鐘時間、一可變時間長度、一可變亮度、一可變光強度、一可變音量、一可變資料流量、一可變振幅、一可變空間位置、一可變位移、一可變順序位置、一可變角度、一可變長度、一可變空間長度、一可變距離、一可變平移速度、一可變角速度、一可變加速度、一可變力、一可變壓力和一可變機械功率的其中之一。例如,該可變物理參數QU1A相同或不同於該可變物理參數QG1A。 The variable physical parameter QG1A is a variable electrical parameter, a variable mechanical parameter, a variable optical parameter, a variable temperature, a variable voltage, a variable current, a variable electric power, a variable Resistor, a variable capacitor, a variable inductance, a variable frequency, a clock time, a variable time length, a variable brightness, a variable light intensity, a variable volume, a variable data flow, A variable amplitude, a variable spatial position, a variable displacement, a variable sequence position, a variable angle, a variable length, a variable spatial length, a variable distance, a variable translation speed, a One of variable angular velocity, a variable acceleration, a variable force, a variable pressure, and a variable mechanical power. For example, the variable physical parameter QU1A is the same as or different from the variable physical parameter QG1A.

請參閱第12圖、第13圖和第14圖。第12圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8021的示意圖。第13圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8022的示意圖。第14圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8023的示意圖。如第12圖、第13圖和第14圖所示,該實施結構8021、該實施結構8022和該實施結構8023的每一結構包含該控制裝置210、該控制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制裝置210鏈接於該伺服器280。該控制裝置210用於依靠該觸發事件EQ11而控制存在於該控制目標裝置330中的該可變物理參數QU1A,並包含該感測單元334、該操作單元297和該儲存單元250。該操作單元297包含該處理單元230、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該處理單元230耦合於該伺服器 280、該感測單元334、該儲存單元250、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該輸出單元240耦合於該控制目標裝置330。 See Figures 12, 13 and 14. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8021 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8022 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8023 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in FIG. 12 , FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 , each structure of the implementation structure 8021 , the implementation structure 8022 and the implementation structure 8023 includes the control device 210 , the control target device 330 and the server 280 . The control device 210 is linked to the server 280 . The control device 210 is used for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 depending on the trigger event EQ11 , and includes the sensing unit 334 , the operating unit 297 and the storage unit 250 . The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280 , the sensing unit 334 , the storage unit 250 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The output unit 240 is coupled to the control target device 330 .

在一些實施例中,該感測單元334感測該可變物理參數QU1A以產生該第一感測訊號SN11。例如,在該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該感測單元334感測該可變物理參數QU1A以產生該第一感測訊號SN11。在該處理單元230藉由執行該訊號產生控制GS11來導致該輸出單元240於該操作時間TD11之內產生該第一控制訊號SC11之後,該感測單元334感測該可變物理參數QU1A以產生該第二感測訊號SN12。例如,該感測單元334是一時間感測單元、一電性參數感測單元、一力學參數感測單元、一光學參數感測單元、一溫度感測單元、一濕度感測單元、一運動感測單元和一磁性參數感測單元的其中之一。 In some embodiments, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate the first sensing signal SN11 . For example, under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate the first sensing signal SN11 . After the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to generate the first control signal SC11 within the operation time TD11 by executing the signal generation control GS11, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate The second sensing signal SN12. For example, the sensing unit 334 is a time sensing unit, an electrical parameter sensing unit, a mechanical parameter sensing unit, an optical parameter sensing unit, a temperature sensing unit, a humidity sensing unit, a motion One of the sensing unit and a magnetic parameter sensing unit.

該感測單元334包含耦合於該處理單元230的一感測組件3341,並使用該感測組件3341以產生該第一感測訊號SN11和該第二感測訊號SN12。該感測組件3341屬於一感測器類型7341,並是第一複數應用感測器的其中之一。該第一複數應用感測器包含一第一電壓感測器、一第一電流感測器、一第一電阻感測器、一第一電容感測器、一第一電感感測器、一第一加速度計、一第一陀螺儀、一第一壓力轉能器、一第一應變規、一第一定時器、一第一光偵測器、一第一溫度感測器和一第一濕度感測器。例如,該感測組件3341產生一感測訊號分量SN111。該第一感測訊號SN11包含該感測訊號分量SN111。 The sensing unit 334 includes a sensing element 3341 coupled to the processing unit 230 , and uses the sensing element 3341 to generate the first sensing signal SN11 and the second sensing signal SN12 . The sensing element 3341 belongs to a sensor type 7341 and is one of the first plurality of application sensors. The first complex application sensor includes a first voltage sensor, a first current sensor, a first resistance sensor, a first capacitance sensor, a first inductance sensor, a A first accelerometer, a first gyroscope, a first pressure transducer, a first strain gauge, a first timer, a first light detector, a first temperature sensor and a first humidity sensor. For example, the sensing component 3341 generates a sensing signal component SN111. The first sensing signal SN11 includes the sensing signal component SN111.

該感測單元334進一步包含耦合於該處理單元230的一感測組件3342,並使用該感測組件3342以產生該第一感測訊號SN11和該第二感測訊號SN12。該感測組件3342屬於一感測器類型7342,並是第二複數應用感測器的其中之一。該感測器類型7342不同於或獨立於該感測器類型7341。該第二複數應用感測器包含一第二電壓感測器、一第二電流感測器、一第二電阻感測器、一第二電容感測器、一第二電感感測器、一第二加速度計、一第二陀螺儀、一第二壓力轉能器、一第二應變規、一第二定時器、一第二光偵測器、一第二溫度感測器和一第二濕度感測器。 The sensing unit 334 further includes a sensing element 3342 coupled to the processing unit 230 , and uses the sensing element 3342 to generate the first sensing signal SN11 and the second sensing signal SN12 . The sensing element 3342 belongs to a sensor type 7342 and is one of the second plurality of application sensors. The sensor type 7342 is different from or independent of the sensor type 7341. The second complex application sensor includes a second voltage sensor, a second current sensor, a second resistance sensor, a second capacitance sensor, a second inductance sensor, a A second accelerometer, a second gyroscope, a second pressure transducer, a second strain gauge, a second timer, a second light detector, a second temperature sensor and a second humidity sensor.

例如,該感測組件3342產生一感測訊號分量SN112。該第一感測訊號SN11進一步包含該感測訊號分量SN112。例如,該感測單元334屬於一感測器類型734。該感測器類型734相關於該感測器類型7341和該感測器類型7342。例如,該感測單元334、該感測組件3341和該感測組件3342分別是一電功率感測單元、一電壓感測器和一電流感測器。例如,該感測單元334、該感測組件3341和該感測組件3342分別是一慣性測量單元、一加速度計和一陀螺儀。 For example, the sensing component 3342 generates a sensing signal component SN112. The first sensing signal SN11 further includes the sensing signal component SN112 . For example, the sensing unit 334 belongs to a sensor type 734 . The sensor type 734 is related to the sensor type 7341 and the sensor type 7342 . For example, the sensing unit 334 , the sensing component 3341 and the sensing component 3342 are respectively an electric power sensing unit, a voltage sensor and a current sensor. For example, the sensing unit 334 , the sensing component 3341 and the sensing component 3342 are an inertial measurement unit, an accelerometer and a gyroscope, respectively.

在一些實施例中,該可變物理參數QU1A相依於一可變物理參數JA1A和不同於該可變物理參數JA1A的一可變物理參數JB1A。例如,該可變物理參數QU1A、該可變物理參數JA1A和該可變物理參數JB1A分別是一可變電功率、一可變電壓和一可變電流,並分別屬於一第一物理參數類型、一第二物理參數類型和一第三物理參數類 型。該第二物理參數類型和該第三物理參數類型是不同的或獨立的。該第一物理參數類型相依於該第二物理參數類型和該第三物理參數類型。該感測組件3341感測該可變物理參數JA1A以產生該感測訊號分量SN111。該感測組件3342感測該可變物理參數JB1A以產生該感測訊號分量SN112。 In some embodiments, the variable physical parameter QU1A depends on a variable physical parameter JA1A and a variable physical parameter JB1A different from the variable physical parameter JA1A. For example, the variable physical parameter QU1A, the variable physical parameter JA1A and the variable physical parameter JB1A are respectively a variable electric power, a variable voltage and a variable current, and belong to a first physical parameter type, A second physical parameter type and a third physical parameter class type. The second physical parameter type and the third physical parameter type are different or independent. The first physical parameter type is dependent on the second physical parameter type and the third physical parameter type. The sensing component 3341 senses the variable physical parameter JA1A to generate the sensing signal component SN111. The sensing component 3342 senses the variable physical parameter JB1A to generate the sensing signal component SN112 .

該處理單元230接收該感測訊號分量SN111和該感測訊號分量SN112。在該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該處理單元230響應該感測訊號分量SN111和該感測訊號分量SN112來獲得該第一測量值VN11。例如,該處理單元230響應該感測訊號分量SN111來獲得一測量值VN111,響應該感測訊號分量SN112來獲得一測量值VN112,並藉由執行使用該測量值VN111和該測量值VN112的一科學計算MY11來獲得該第一測量值VN11。該科學計算MY11基於該第一物理參數類型、該第二物理參數類型和該第三物理參數類型而被預先制定。 The processing unit 230 receives the sensing signal component SN111 and the sensing signal component SN112 . Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 obtains the first measurement value VN11 in response to the sensing signal component SN111 and the sensing signal component SN112 . For example, the processing unit 230 obtains a measurement value VN111 in response to the sensing signal component SN111, obtains a measurement value VN112 in response to the sensing signal component SN112, and executes a process using the measurement value VN111 and the measurement value VN112. Scientifically calculate MY11 to obtain the first measured value VN11. The scientific calculation MY11 is predetermined based on the first physical parameter type, the second physical parameter type and the third physical parameter type.

該可變物理參數JA1A和該可變物理參數JB1A的每一物理參數是一可變電性參數、一可變力學參數、一可變光學參數、一可變溫度、一可變電壓、一可變電流、一可變電功率、一可變電阻、一可變電容、一可變電感、一可變頻率、一時鐘時間、一可變時間長度、一可變亮度、一可變光強度、一可變音量、一可變資料流量、一可變振幅、一可變空間位置、一可變位移、一可變順序位置、一可變角度、一可變空間長度、一可變距離、一可變平移速度、一可變角速度、一可變加速度、一可變力、 一可變壓力和一可變機械功率的其中之一。 Each physical parameter of the variable physical parameter JA1A and the variable physical parameter JB1A is a variable electrical parameter, a variable mechanical parameter, a variable optical parameter, a variable temperature, a variable voltage, a variable Variable current, a variable electric power, a variable resistor, a variable capacitor, a variable inductance, a variable frequency, a clock time, a variable time length, a variable brightness, a variable light intensity , a variable volume, a variable data flow rate, a variable amplitude, a variable spatial position, a variable displacement, a variable sequence position, a variable angle, a variable spatial length, a variable distance, A variable translational velocity, a variable angular velocity, a variable acceleration, a variable force, One of a variable pressure and a variable mechanical power.

在一些實施例中,該感測單元334被配置以符合該感測器規格FU11。該感測單元334藉由執行相依於該感測器靈敏度YW11的該感測訊號產生HF11來產生該第一感測訊號SN11。在該觸發事件EQ11發生且該可變物理參數QU1A存在於該物理參數形成區AU11中的條件下,該感測單元334感測該可變物理參數QU1A以產生該第一感測訊號SN11。例如,該感測單元334耦合於該物理參數形成區AU11,或位於該物理參數形成區AU11中。該處理單元230接收該第一感測訊號SN11,並藉由處理所接收的該第一感測訊號SN11來以該指定測量值格式HH11獲得該第一測量值VN11。 In some embodiments, the sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with the sensor specification FU11. The sensing unit 334 generates the first sensing signal SN11 by performing the sensing signal generation HF11 dependent on the sensor sensitivity YW11. Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs and the variable physical parameter QU1A exists in the physical parameter forming area AU11 , the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate the first sensing signal SN11 . For example, the sensing unit 334 is coupled to the physical parameter forming area AU11, or is located in the physical parameter forming area AU11. The processing unit 230 receives the first sensing signal SN11 , and obtains the first measurement value VN11 in the designated measurement value format HH11 by processing the received first sensing signal SN11 .

該處理單元230藉由比較該第一測量值VN11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L來執行用於檢查該第一測量值VN11和該測量值應用範圍RN1L之間的該第一數學關係KV11的該檢查操作BV11,並基於該檢查操作BV11來做出該第一邏輯決定PB11。在一些實施例中,該處理單元230處理所接收的該第一感測訊號SN11以獲得包含該第一測量值VN11的一測量值序列JN11。該處理單元230藉由比較該測量值序列JN11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L來執行用於檢查該測量值序列JN11和該測量值應用範圍RN1L之間的一數學關係KV15的一檢查操作BV15。該處理單元230基於該檢查操作BV15來做出該第一邏輯決定PB11。例如,該檢查操作BV15包含該檢查操作BV11。 The processing unit 230 performs checking of the first mathematical relationship between the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L by comparing the first measurement value VN11 with the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L The checking operation BV11 of KV11 and based on the checking operation BV11 the first logical decision PB11 is made. In some embodiments, the processing unit 230 processes the received first sensing signal SN11 to obtain a measurement value sequence JN11 including the first measurement value VN11. The processing unit 230 performs a check for checking a mathematical relationship KV15 between the measured value sequence JN11 and the measured value application range RN1L by comparing the measured value sequence JN11 with the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L Operate BV15. The processing unit 230 makes the first logical decision PB11 based on the checking operation BV15. For example, the checking operation BV15 includes the checking operation BV11.

例如,在該處理單元230基於該第一資料比較CD11而辨識該第一測量值VN11為於該測量值應用範圍RN1L之內的一可允許值VG11的條件下,該處理單元230做出該第一邏輯決定PB11以成為肯定的。或者,在該處理單元230辨識該第一數學關係KV11為一數值交集關係KW11的條件下,該處理單元230做出該第一邏輯決定PB11以成為肯定的。 For example, under the condition that the processing unit 230 identifies the first measured value VN11 as an allowable value VG11 within the measured value application range RN1L based on the first data comparison CD11, the processing unit 230 makes the first A logic determines PB11 to be positive. Alternatively, under the condition that the processing unit 230 identifies the first mathematical relationship KV11 as a numerical intersection relationship KW11, the processing unit 230 makes the first logic decision PB11 to be positive.

在一些實施例中,該處理單元230於該操作時間TD11之後的該指定時間TG12之內執行與該可變物理參數QU1A相關的一驗證操作ZU11。在該處理單元230基於該驗證操作ZU11而確定該可變物理參數QU1A進入的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的條件下,該處理單元230使用該儲存單元250以將所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。 In some embodiments, the processing unit 230 executes a verification operation ZU11 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A within the specified time TG12 after the operation time TD11 . Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter target range RD1ET into which the variable physical parameter QU1A enters based on the verification operation ZU11, the processing unit 230 uses the storage unit 250 to code the determined target range of measured values to EM1T is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.

例如,該驗證操作ZU11於該操作時間TD11之後的該指定時間TG12之內響應該第二感測訊號SN12來以該指定測量值格式HH11獲得該第二測量值VN12。在該處理單元230執行該訊號產生控制GS11的條件下,該驗證操作ZU11基於所存取的該控制資料碼CK1T和所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L的其中之一來確定該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T以確定該測量值目標範圍RN1T。 For example, the verification operation ZU11 responds to the second sensing signal SN12 within the specified time TG12 after the operation time TD11 to obtain the second measurement value VN12 in the specified measurement value format HH11. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS11, the verification operation ZU11 determines the measurement value target based on one of the accessed control data code CK1T and the determined measurement value application range code EM1L range code EM1T to determine the measurement target range RN1T.

在一些實施例中,該驗證操作ZU11基於所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T來獲得該目標範圍界限值對DN1T,並基於該第二測量值VN12和所獲得的該目標範圍界限值對DN1T之間的該第三資料比較CD22來檢查該 第二測量值VN12和所確定的該測量值目標範圍RN1T之間的該第三數學關係KV22以做出該第二測量值VN12是否為於所確定的該測量值目標範圍RN1T之內的該第三邏輯決定PB22。在該第三邏輯決定PB22是肯定的條件下,該驗證操作ZU11確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET,或確定該可變物理參數QU1A進入的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。 In some embodiments, the verification operation ZU11 obtains the target range limit value pair DN1T based on the determined measured value target range code EM1T, and obtains the target range limit value pair DN1T based on the second measured value VN12 and the obtained target range limit value pair DN1T Compare CD22 between this third data to examine the The third mathematical relationship KV22 between the second measurement value VN12 and the determined measurement value target range RN1T is used to determine whether the second measurement value VN12 is within the determined measurement value target range RN1T. Three logical decisions for PB22. On the condition that the third logic decision PB22 is affirmative, the verification operation ZU11 determines the physical parameter target range RD1ET that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in, or determines the physical parameter target range RD1ET that the variable physical parameter QU1A enters .

在該特定測量值範圍碼EM14不同於所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T且該處理單元230基於該驗證操作ZU11而確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的條件下,該處理單元230基於等於該特定測量值範圍碼EM14的該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A和所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T之間的該第一碼差異DF11來使用該儲存單元250以將所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。 Under the condition that the specific measured value range code EM14 is different from the determined measured value target range code EM1T and the processing unit 230 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the physical parameter target range RD1ET based on the verification operation ZU11 , the processing unit 230 uses the storage unit 250 based on the first code difference DF11 between the variable physical parameter range code UN1A equal to the specific measured value range code EM14 and the determined measured value target range code EM1T The determined measurement value target range code EM1T is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.

在一些實施例中,在該處理單元230於該指定時間TG12之內基於該驗證操作ZU11而確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的條件下,該處理單元230執行等於該特定測量值範圍碼EM14的該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A和所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T之間的一資料比較CE1T。在該處理單元230基於該資料比較CE1T而確定等於該特定測量值範圍碼EM14的該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A和所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T之間的該第一碼差異DF11的條件下,該處理單元230使用該儲存單元250以將所確定的該測量值 目標範圍碼EM1T指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines within the specified time TG12 based on the verification operation ZU11 that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the physical parameter target range RD1ET, the processing unit 230 executes a method equal to A data comparison CE1T between the variable physical parameter range code UN1A of the specific measured value range code EM14 and the determined measured value target range code EM1T. The first code difference DF11 between the variable physical parameter range code UN1A determined to be equal to the specific measured value range code EM14 and the determined measured value target range code EM1T is determined by the processing unit 230 based on the data comparison CE1T condition, the processing unit 230 uses the storage unit 250 to store the determined measured value The target range code EM1T is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.

例如,在處理單元230基於該資料比較CE1T而確定該第一碼差異DF11的條件下,處理單元230執行該確保操作GU11,該確保操作GU11用於導致代表所確定的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的該物理參數目標範圍碼UN1T被該儲存單元250記錄。例如,該物理參數目標範圍碼UN1T等於所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T。該確保操作GU11使用該儲存單元250以將所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。 For example, under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the first code difference DF11 based on the data comparison CE1T, the processing unit 230 executes the ensuring operation GU11, which is used to result in representing the determined physical parameter target range RD1ET The physical parameter target range code UN1T is recorded by the storage unit 250 . For example, the physical parameter target range code UN1T is equal to the determined measured value target range code EM1T. The ensuring operation GU11 uses the storage unit 250 to assign the determined measurement value target range code EM1T to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.

當該觸發事件EQ11發生時,該輸出單元240顯示該第一狀態指示LB11。例如,該第一狀態指示LB11用於指示該可變物理參數QU1A被配置於該第一特定物理參數範圍RD1E4之內的該第一特定狀態XJ11。在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該輸出單元240被配置以獲得該特定測量值範圍碼EM14,並基於所獲得的該特定測量值範圍碼EM14來導致該輸出單元240顯示該第一狀態指示LB11。 When the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the output unit 240 displays the first status indication LB11. For example, the first state indication LB11 is used to indicate the first specific state XJ11 in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured within the first specific physical parameter range RD1E4. Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the output unit 240 is configured to obtain the specific measurement value range code EM14 , and cause the output unit 240 to display the first status indication LB11 based on the obtained specific measurement value range code EM14 .

在處理單元230基於該資料比較CE1T而確定該第一碼差異DF11的條件下,處理單元230基於所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T來導致該輸出單元240將該第一狀態指示LB11改變成該第二狀態指示LB12。例如,該第二狀態指示LB12用於指示該可變物理參數QU1A目前於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的該第二特定狀態XJ12。 Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the first code difference DF11 based on the data comparison CE1T, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to change the first status indication LB11 to This second state indicates LB12. For example, the second state indicator LB12 is used to indicate the second specific state XJ12 in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently within the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

在一些實施例中,該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET和該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL皆包含於該複數不同 物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…中。該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET不同於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL。該可變物理參數QU1A進一步基於該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2和該第二物理參數候選範圍RD1E3而被特徵化。該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2不同於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL,並相同或不同於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。例如,該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL是一物理參數候選範圍。該第二物理參數候選範圍RD1E3不同於該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2,相同或不同於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET,並相同或不同於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL。 In some embodiments, both the physical parameter target range RD1ET and the physical parameter application range RD1EL are included in the complex different The reference range of physical parameters is RD1E1, RD1E2, .... The physical parameter target range RD1ET is different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL. The variable physical parameter QU1A is further characterized based on the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 and the second physical parameter candidate range RD1E3. The first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 is different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL, and is the same as or different from the physical parameter target range RD1ET. For example, the physical parameter application range RD1EL is a physical parameter candidate range. The second physical parameter candidate range RD1E3 is different from the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2, the same as or different from the physical parameter target range RD1ET, and the same or different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL.

該可變物理參數QU1A進一步基於對應於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的該對應物理參數範圍RY1EL而被特徵化。該額定物理參數範圍RD1E等於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該對應物理參數範圍RY1EL的一範圍組合。該對應物理參數範圍RY1EL包含該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。該對應物理參數範圍RY1EL由一對應測量值範圍RX1L所代表。例如,該額定測量值範圍RD1N等於該測量值應用範圍RN1L和該對應測量值範圍RX1L的一範圍組合。該對應測量值範圍RX1L包含代表該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的該測量值目標範圍RN1T,並基於該測量值應用範圍RN1L和該額定測量值範圍RD1N而被預設。 The variable physical parameter QU1A is further characterized based on the corresponding physical parameter range RY1EL corresponding to the physical parameter application range RD1EL. The rated physical parameter range RD1E is equal to a range combination of the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the corresponding physical parameter range RY1EL. The corresponding physical parameter range RY1EL includes the physical parameter target range RD1ET. The corresponding range of physical parameters RY1EL is represented by a corresponding range of measured values RX1L. For example, the rated measured value range RD1N is equal to a range combination of the measured value application range RN1L and the corresponding measured value range RX1L. The corresponding measured value range RX1L includes the measured value target range RN1T representing the physical parameter target range RD1ET, and is preset based on the measured value application range RN1L and the rated measured value range RD1N.

該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET被配置以對應於一對應物理參數範圍RY1ET。該額定物理參數範圍RD1E等於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET和該對應物理參數範圍RY1ET的一範圍組合,並包含該物理參數應用範圍 RD1EL。該測量值目標範圍RN1T被配置以對應於一對應測量值範圍RX1T。該額定測量值範圍RD1N等於該測量值目標範圍RN1T和該對應測量值範圍RX1T的一範圍組合。該對應物理參數範圍RY1ET由該對應測量值範圍RX1T所代表。 The physical parameter target range RD1ET is configured to correspond to a corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET. The rated physical parameter range RD1E is equal to a range combination of the physical parameter target range RD1ET and the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET, and includes the physical parameter application range RD1EL. The measured value target range RN1T is configured to correspond to a corresponding measured value range RX1T. The rated measured value range RD1N is equal to a range combination of the measured value target range RN1T and the corresponding measured value range RX1T. The corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET is represented by the corresponding measured value range RX1T.

該測量值目標範圍RN1T和該測量值應用範圍RN1L皆包含於該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…中。該測量值目標範圍RN1T不同於該測量值應用範圍RN1L。該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2由該測量值候選範圍RN12所代表。該測量值候選範圍RN12不同於該測量值應用範圍RN1L,並相同或不同於該測量值目標範圍RN1T。該額定測量值範圍RD1N包含該測量值應用範圍RN1L和該測量值候選範圍RN12。 Both the measured value target range RN1T and the measured value application range RN1L are included in the plurality of different measured value reference ranges RN11 , RN12 , . . . The measurement value target range RN1T is different from the measurement value application range RN1L. The first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 is represented by the measurement value candidate range RN12. The measurement value candidate range RN12 is different from the measurement value application range RN1L, and is the same as or different from the measurement value target range RN1T. The rated measured value range RD1N includes the measured value application range RN1L and the measured value candidate range RN12.

例如,該測量值候選範圍RN12基於該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2和該額定測量值範圍RD1N而被預設。該測量值應用範圍RN1L是一測量值候選範圍。該額定測量值範圍RD1N基於該額定物理參數範圍表示GC1E、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和用於轉換該額定物理參數範圍表示GC1E的該第一資料編碼操作ZX11來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。 For example, the measurement value candidate range RN12 is preset based on the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 and the rated measurement value range RD1N. The measurement value application range RN1L is a measurement value candidate range. The nominal measurement value range RD1N is based on the nominal physical parameter range representation GC1E, the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and the first data encoding operation ZX11 for converting the nominal physical parameter range representation GC1E using the specified measurement value format HH11 is preset.

在一些實施例中,該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2是分開的或相鄰的。在該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2是分開的條件下,該測量值應用範圍RN1L和該測量值候選範圍RN12是分開的。在該物理參數應用範圍 RD1EL和該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2是相鄰的條件下,該測量值應用範圍RN1L和該測量值候選範圍RN12是相鄰的。該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…包含該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2,分別由該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…所代表,並分別由複數物理參數參考範圍碼所代表。 In some embodiments, the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 are separate or adjacent. On the condition that the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 are separate, the measurement value application range RN1L and the measurement value candidate range RN12 are separate. In the application range of this physical parameter Under the condition that RD1EL and the candidate physical parameter range RD1E2 are adjacent, the application range RN1L of the measurement value is adjacent to the candidate range RN12 of the measurement value. The complex different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, ... include the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2, respectively represented by the complex different measured value reference ranges RN11, RN12, ..., and are respectively represented by complex physical parameter reference range codes.

該測量值候選範圍RN12由該測量值候選範圍碼EM12所代表,並具有該候選範圍界限值對DN1B,藉此該測量值候選範圍碼EM12被配置以指示該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2。例如,該候選範圍界限值對DN1B包含該測量值候選範圍RN12的一候選範圍界限值DN13和相對於該候選範圍界限值DN13的一候選範圍界限值DN14。該測量值候選範圍碼EM12和該候選範圍界限值對DN1B皆被預設。該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…包含所預設的該測量值候選範圍碼EM12。該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…包含該測量值候選範圍RN12,並分別由該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…所代表。例如,該複數物理參數參考範圍碼被配置以分別等於該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…。 The measured value candidate range RN12 is represented by the measured value candidate range code EM12 and has the candidate range limit value pair DN1B, whereby the measured value candidate range code EM12 is configured to indicate the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2. For example, the candidate range limit pair DN1B includes a candidate range limit value DN13 of the measurement value candidate range RN12 and a candidate range limit value DN14 corresponding to the candidate range limit value DN13 . Both the measurement value candidate range code EM12 and the candidate range limit value pair DN1B are preset. The plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . . include the preset measured value candidate range code EM12. The plurality of reference ranges RN11 , RN12 , . For example, the complex physical parameter reference range codes are configured to be equal to the complex different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . . respectively.

在一些實施例中,該觸發應用功能規格GCL1用於表示該額定物理參數範圍RD1E和該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…。該額定測量值範圍RD1N、該額定範圍界限值對DD1A、該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…、及該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…皆基於該觸發應用功能規格GCL1而被預 設。該觸發應用功能FC11選擇自複數不同觸發作用功能。該儲存單元250儲存該觸發應用功能規格GCL1。 In some embodiments, the trigger application function specification GCL1 is used to represent the nominal physical parameter range RD1E and the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . The rated measured value range RD1N, the rated range limit value pair DD1A, the plurality of different measured value reference ranges RN11, RN12, ..., and the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ... are all based on the trigger application function specification GCL1 and was predicted set up. The trigger application function FC11 is selected from a plurality of different trigger action functions. The storage unit 250 stores the triggered application function specification GCL1.

該處理單元230根據該觸發應用功能規格GCL1來預先設定該額定範圍界限值對DD1A、該應用範圍界限值對DN1L、該目標範圍界限值對DN1T、該候選範圍界限值對DN1B、…。該第一感測訊號SN11包含感測資料。例如,該感測資料屬於該二進制資料類型。該處理單元230基於該感測資料來以該指定測量值格式HH11獲得該第一測量值VN11。 The processing unit 230 presets the nominal range limit pair DD1A, the application range limit pair DN1L, the target range limit pair DN1T, the candidate range limit pair DN1B, . . . according to the trigger application function specification GCL1. The first sensing signal SN11 includes sensing data. For example, the sensing data belongs to the binary data type. The processing unit 230 obtains the first measurement value VN11 in the designated measurement value format HH11 based on the sensing data.

在一些實施例中,該操作單元297被配置以依靠該觸發事件EQ11來執行該觸發應用功能FC11。該處理單元230基於用於該觸發應用功能FC11的該檢查操作BV11來做出該第一測量值VN11是否為於該測量值應用範圍RN1L之內的該第一邏輯決定PB11。在該第一邏輯決定PB11是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL,並執行用於檢查所確定的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該預設物理參數範圍RD1EF之間的該第一範圍關係KC1A的該第一檢查操作ZY11。 In some embodiments, the operating unit 297 is configured to execute the triggering application function FC11 depending on the triggering event EQ11. The processing unit 230 makes the first logical decision PB11 whether the first measurement value VN11 is within the measurement value application range RN1L based on the checking operation BV11 for the trigger application function FC11 . On the condition that the first logical decision PB11 is positive, the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RD1EL that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in, and executes the method for checking the determined physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter application range RD1EL. The first checking operation ZY11 of the first range relationship KC1A between preset physical parameter ranges RD1EF.

該處理單元230基於用於該觸發應用功能FC11的該第一檢查操作ZY11來做出所確定的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL是否相同於該預設物理參數範圍RD1EF的該第一特定決定PD11。在該第一特定決定PD11是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230做出該合理決定PW11以成為肯定的。 The processing unit 230 makes the first specific decision PD11 of whether the determined physical parameter application range RD1EL is the same as the preset physical parameter range RD1EF based on the first checking operation ZY11 for the trigger application function FC11 . On condition that the first specific decision PD11 is positive, the processing unit 230 makes the rational decision PW11 to be positive.

在該合理決定PW11是否定的條件下,該處理單元230直接地到達獨立於該第一觸發訊號WX11的該第一操作時間TD11。在該合理決定PW11是肯定的條件下,該控制裝置210和該操作單元297的其中之一響應與該可變物理參數QU1A相關的該第一指定應用操作ZA11來產生該第一觸發訊號WX11。在該合理決定PW11是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230響應該第一觸發訊號WX11來到達相依於該第一觸發訊號WX11的該第一操作時間TD11。該處理單元230在該第一操作時間TD11之內,基於所獲得的該控制資料碼CK1T來執行該訊號產生控制GS11以導致該輸出單元240產生該第一控制訊號SC11。 On the condition that the reasonable decision PW11 is negative, the processing unit 230 directly reaches the first operating time TD11 independent of the first trigger signal WX11. If the reasonable decision PW11 is positive, one of the control device 210 and the operating unit 297 generates the first trigger signal WX11 in response to the first specified application operation ZA11 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A. Under the condition that the rational decision PW11 is positive, the processing unit 230 responds to the first trigger signal WX11 to reach the first operation time TD11 dependent on the first trigger signal WX11 . The processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS11 based on the obtained control data code CK1T within the first operation time TD11 to cause the output unit 240 to generate the first control signal SC11 .

在一些實施例中,在該可變物理參數QU1A由於該觸發事件EQ11而被配置以於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的條件下,該輸入單元270接收該使用者輸入操作BQ11,並響應該使用者輸入操作BQ11來提供一輸入資料DH11到該處理單元230。該處理單元230對於該輸入資料DH11執行一資料編碼操作EA11以確定該特定輸入碼UW11。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET due to the trigger event EQ11, the input unit 270 receives the user input operation BQ11, and responds to the The user inputs operation BQ11 to provide an input data DH11 to the processing unit 230 . The processing unit 230 performs a data encoding operation EA11 on the input data DH11 to determine the specific input code UW11.

該處理單元230響應於確定該特定輸入碼UW11來執行用於該觸發應用功能FC11的一檢查操作ZP11以決定所確定的該特定輸入碼UW11是否等於該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。例如,在該處理單元230確定該特定輸入碼UW11的條件下,該處理單元230藉由使用該儲存單元250來讀取等於該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A,並執行用於檢查所確定的該特定輸 入碼UW11和所讀取的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T之間的一算術關係KP11的該檢查操作ZP11。 The processing unit 230 executes a checking operation ZP11 for the trigger application function FC11 in response to determining the specific input code UW11 to determine whether the determined specific input code UW11 is equal to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A. For example, under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the specific input code UW11, the processing unit 230 reads the variable physical parameter range code UN1A equal to the measured value target range code EM1T by using the storage unit 250, and Execute the check for that particular input identified The checking operation ZP11 of an arithmetic relation KP11 between the code UW11 and the read code EM1T of the measured value target range.

該檢查操作ZP11被配置以藉由執行用於該觸發應用功能FC11的一資料比較CE11來比較所確定的該特定輸入碼UW11和所讀取的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T以決定所確定的該特定輸入碼UW11和所讀取的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T是否不同。在該處理單元230藉由執行該資料比較CE11來確定所確定的該特定輸入碼UW11和等於所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A之間的該第二碼差異DX11的條件下,該處理單元230導致該輸出單元240執行用於該觸發應用功能FC11的一訊號產生操作BS15以產生一控制訊號SC15。該輸出單元240將該控制訊號SC15傳輸到該操作單元397。 The checking operation ZP11 is configured to compare the determined specific input code UW11 with the read measured value target range code EM1T by performing a data comparison CE11 for the triggering application function FC11 to determine the determined Whether the specific input code UW11 is different from the read target range code EM1T of the measured value. The processing unit 230 determines the second code between the determined specific input code UW11 and the variable physical parameter range code UN1A equal to the determined measured value target range code EM1T by performing the data comparison CE11 Under the condition of difference DX11, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to perform a signal generating operation BS15 for the trigger application function FC11 to generate a control signal SC15. The output unit 240 transmits the control signal SC15 to the operation unit 397 .

在一些實施例中,該操作單元397響應該控制訊號SC15來產生一功能訊號SG15。該功能目標335接收該功能訊號SG15,並響應該功能訊號SG15來導致該可變物理參數QU1A從該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET以進入該對應物理參數範圍RY1ET。例如,該功能訊號SG15是一脈衝寬度調變訊號、一電位準訊號和一驅動訊號的其中之一。例如,該功能目標335響應該功能訊號SG15來導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET以進入包含於該對應物理參數範圍RY1ET中的該第二特定物理參數範圍RD1E5。 In some embodiments, the operation unit 397 generates a function signal SG15 in response to the control signal SC15. The function target 335 receives the function signal SG15 and responds to the function signal SG15 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET from the physical parameter target range RD1ET. For example, the function signal SG15 is one of a pulse width modulation signal, a potential signal and a driving signal. For example, the function target 335 responds to the function signal SG15 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the second specific physical parameter range RD1E5 included in the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET.

例如,該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…包含不同於該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的 一特定測量值範圍碼EM15。該特定測量值範圍碼EM15被配置以指示該第二特定物理參數範圍RD1E5。在所確定的該特定輸入碼UW11等於該特定測量值範圍碼EM15以導致所確定的該特定輸入碼UW11和等於所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A之間具有該第二碼差異DX11的條件下,該處理單元230藉由執行該資料比較CE11來確定該第二碼差異DX11,並響應於確定該第二碼差異DX11來導致該輸出單元240產生該控制訊號SC15。 For example, the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ... contain values different from the measured value target range code EM1T A specific measurement range code EM15. The specific measurement value range code EM15 is configured to indicate the second specific physical parameter range RD1E5. Between the determined specific input code UW11 equal to the specific measured value range code EM15 resulting in the determined specific input code UW11 and the variable physical parameter range code UN1A equal to the determined measured value target range code EM1T With the second code difference DX11, the processing unit 230 determines the second code difference DX11 by performing the data comparison CE11, and causes the output unit 240 to generate the control in response to determining the second code difference DX11 Signal SC15.

該控制目標裝置330響應該控制訊號SC15來導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET以進入包含於該對應物理參數範圍RY1ET中的該第二特定物理參數範圍RD1E5。例如,在該處理單元230導致該輸出單元240產生該控制訊號SC15之後,該處理單元230於一指定時間之內執行與該可變物理參數QU1A相關的一驗證操作。在該處理單元230基於該驗證操作而確定該可變物理參數QU1A進入的該第二特定物理參數範圍RD1E5的條件下,該處理單元230將等於該特定測量值範圍碼EM15的所確定的該特定輸入碼UW11指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。 The control target device 330 responds to the control signal SC15 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the second specific physical parameter range RD1E5 included in the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET. For example, after the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to generate the control signal SC15, the processing unit 230 executes a verification operation related to the variable physical parameter QU1A within a specified time. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A enters the second specific physical parameter range RD1E5 based on the verification operation, the processing unit 230 will be equal to the determined specific range code EM15 of the specific measurement value range code EM15. The input code UW11 is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.

請參閱第15圖和第16圖。第15圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8024的示意圖。第16圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8025的示意圖。如第15圖和第16圖所示,該實施結構8024和該實施結構8025的每一結構包含該控制裝置 210、該控制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制裝置210鏈接於該伺服器280。該控制裝置210用於依靠該觸發事件EQ11而控制存在於該控制目標裝置330中的該可變物理參數QU1A,並包含該感測單元334、該操作單元297和該儲存單元250。該操作單元297包含該處理單元230、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該處理單元230耦合於該伺服器280、該感測單元334、該儲存單元250、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該輸出單元240耦合於該控制目標裝置330。 See Figures 15 and 16. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8024 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8025 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in Figures 15 and 16, each structure of the implementation structure 8024 and the implementation structure 8025 includes the control device 210 . The control target device 330 and the server 280 . The control device 210 is linked to the server 280 . The control device 210 is used for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 depending on the trigger event EQ11 , and includes the sensing unit 334 , the operating unit 297 and the storage unit 250 . The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280 , the sensing unit 334 , the storage unit 250 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The output unit 240 is coupled to the control target device 330 .

在一些實施例中,該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11來使用該儲存單元250以存取等於該特定測量值範圍碼EM14的該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A以獲得該特定測量值範圍碼EM14。該第一資料確定操作AA11藉由執行使用所獲得的該特定測量值範圍碼EM14的一科學計算ME11來確定該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L。例如,所獲得的該特定測量值範圍碼EM14相同或不同於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L。 In some embodiments, the processing unit 230 uses the storage unit 250 to access the variable physical parameter range code UN1A equal to the specific measurement value range code EM14 in response to the trigger event EQ11 to obtain the specific measurement value range code EM14 . The first data determination operation AA11 determines the measurement application range code EM1L by performing a scientific calculation ME11 using the obtained specific measurement range code EM14. For example, the obtained specific measurement value range code EM14 is the same as or different from the determined measurement value application range code EM1L.

在一些實施例中,該觸發應用功能FC11相關於該記憶體單元25Y1。在該觸發事件EQ11被應用到該觸發應用功能FC11的條件下,該處理單元230耦合於該記憶體單元25Y1。例如,該儲存單元250包含該記憶體單元25Y1。在該處理單元230基於該第一測量值VN11和所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L之間的該第一資料比較CD11而辨識該第一數學關係KV11為一數值交集關係的條件下,該處理單元230做出該第一邏輯決定PB11以成為肯 定的。 In some embodiments, the triggering application function FC11 is associated with the memory unit 25Y1. Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 is applied to the trigger application function FC11, the processing unit 230 is coupled to the memory unit 25Y1. For example, the storage unit 250 includes the memory unit 25Y1. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 recognizes that the first mathematical relationship KV11 is a numerical intersection relationship based on the first measured value VN11 and the obtained first data comparison CD11 between the application range limit value pair DN1L, the The processing unit 230 makes this first logical decision PB11 to be affirmative fixed.

在該第一邏輯決定PB11是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL之內的一物理參數情況,並藉此辨識該可變物理參數QU1A和該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL之間的一物理參數關係為該可變物理參數QU1A目前於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL之內的一物理參數交集關係。 Under the condition that the first logical decision PB11 is affirmative, the processing unit 230 determines a physical parameter situation of the variable physical parameter QU1A currently within the physical parameter application range RD1EL, and thereby identifies the variable physical parameter QU1A A physical parameter relationship with the physical parameter application range RD1EL is a physical parameter intersection relationship of the variable physical parameter QU1A currently within the physical parameter application range RD1EL.

在一些實施例中,該應用範圍界限值對DN1L屬於一測量範圍界限資料碼類型TN11。該測量範圍界限資料碼類型TN11由一測量範圍界限資料碼類型識別符HN11所識別。該控制資料碼CK1T屬於一控制資料碼類型TK11。該控制資料碼類型TK11由一控制資料碼類型識別符HK11所識別。該測量範圍界限資料碼類型識別符HN11和該控制資料碼類型識別符HK11皆被預設。該額定測量值範圍RD1N被配置以包含該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…。該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…分別由該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…所代表。 In some embodiments, the application range limit value pair DN1L belongs to a measurement range limit data code type TN11. The measurement range limit data code type TN11 is identified by a measurement range limit data code type identifier HN11. The control data code CK1T belongs to a control data code type TK11. The control data code type TK11 is identified by a control data code type identifier HK11. Both the measurement range boundary data code type identifier HN11 and the control data code type identifier HK11 are preset. The nominal measured value range RD1N is configured to contain the plurality of different measured value reference ranges RN11, RN12, . . . The plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . are respectively represented by the plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, .

該第一記憶體位置PN1L基於該第一記憶體位址FN1L而被識別,或由該第一記憶體位址FN1L所識別。該第二記憶體位置PX1L基於該第二記憶體位址FX1L而被識別,或由該第二記憶體位址FX1L所識別。該第一記憶體位址FN1L基於所預設的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T、所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L和所預設的該測量範圍界限資料碼類型識別符HN11而被預設。該第二 記憶體位址FX1L基於所預設的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T、所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L和所預設的該控制資料碼類型識別符HK11而被預設。例如,被儲存在該第二記憶體位置PX1L的該控制資料碼CK1T包含該控制碼CC1T和該時間長度值CL1T。 The first memory location PN1L is identified based on or identified by the first memory address FN1L. The second memory location PX1L is identified based on or identified by the second memory address FX1L. The first memory address FN1L is preset based on the preset control target device identifier HA1T, the preset measurement value application range code EM1L and the preset measurement range limit data type identifier HN11 . the second The memory address FX1L is preset based on the preset control target device identifier HA1T, the preset measurement value application range code EM1L and the preset control data code type identifier HK11. For example, the control data code CK1T stored in the second memory location PX1L includes the control code CC1T and the time length value CL1T.

該處理單元230被配置以獲得所預設的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T和所預設的該測量範圍界限資料碼類型識別符HN11。該第一資料獲取操作AD11基於所獲得的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T、所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L和所獲得的該測量範圍界限資料碼類型識別符HN11來獲得該第一記憶體位址FN1L,並基於所獲得的該第一記憶體位址FN1L來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該第一記憶體位置PN1L的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L以獲得該應用範圍界限值對DN1L。 The processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the preset control target device identifier HA1T and the preset measurement range limit data code type identifier HN11. The first data acquisition operation AD11 obtains the first memory location based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T, the determined measurement value application range code EM1L and the obtained measurement range limit data type identifier HN11. address FN1L, and use the memory unit 25Y1 to access the application range limit value pair DN1L stored in the first memory location PN1L based on the obtained first memory address FN1L to obtain the application range limit value to DN1L.

在一些實施例中,該總參考範圍數目NT11被預設。該儲存單元250儲存該總參考範圍數目NT11和該額定範圍界限值對DD1A。該處理單元230被配置以執行一科學計算以獲得所預設的該總參考範圍數目NT11和所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A,或響應該觸發事件EQ11來從該儲存單元250獲得該總參考範圍數目NT11和該額定範圍界限值對DD1A。該操作參考資料XU11進一步包含該總參考範圍數目NT11。 In some embodiments, the total number of reference ranges NT11 is preset. The storage unit 250 stores the total reference range number NT11 and the rated range limit value pair DD1A. The processing unit 230 is configured to perform a scientific calculation to obtain the preset total reference range number NT11 and the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A, or obtain the preset value from the storage unit 250 in response to the trigger event EQ11 The total reference range number NT11 and the nominal range limit value pair DD1A. The operation reference XU11 further includes the total reference range number NT11.

在該第二資料確定操作AA12要被執行的條件下,該處理單元230被配置以基於該操作參考資料XU11來獲得所預設的該總參考範圍數目NT11和所預設的該額 定範圍界限值對DD1A。在該處理單元230獲得該第一測量值VN11的條件下,該第二資料確定操作AA12藉由執行使用所獲得的該第一測量值VN11、所獲得的該總參考範圍數目NT11和所獲得的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A的該第一科學計算MR11來從該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…中選擇該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L以確定該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L。 Under the condition that the second data determines that operation AA12 is to be performed, the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the preset total reference range number NT11 and the preset amount based on the operation reference data XU11 Range cutoffs to DD1A. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 obtains the first measurement value VN11, the second data determination operation AA12 is performed by using the obtained first measurement value VN11, the obtained total reference range number NT11 and the obtained The rated range limit value pairs the first scientific calculation MR11 of DD1A to select the measured value application range code EM1L from the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11 , EM12 , . . . to determine the measured value application range code EM1L.

例如,該第一科學計算MR11基於所預設的該總參考範圍數目NT11、所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A和該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…而被預先建構。該第二資料獲取操作AD12藉由執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L、所獲得的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A和所獲得的該總參考範圍數目NT11的該第二科學計算MZ11來獲得該應用範圍界限值對DN1L。 For example, the first scientific calculation MR11 is pre-constructed based on the preset total reference range number NT11, the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A and the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . . The second data acquisition operation AD12 is performed by performing the second scientific calculation MZ11 using the determined measurement value application range code EM1L, the obtained pair of nominal range limit values DD1A and the obtained total reference range number NT11. Obtain the application range limit value pair DN1L.

在一些實施例中,該處理單元230被配置以獲得所預設的該控制資料碼類型識別符HK11。在該處理單元230確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下,該處理單元230基於所獲得的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T、所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L和所獲得的該控制資料碼類型識別符HK11來獲得該第二記憶體位址FX1L,基於所獲得的該第二記憶體位址FX1L來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該第二記憶體位置PX1L的該控制資料碼CK1T,並基於所獲得的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T和所存取的該控制資料碼CK1T來執行用於該觸發應用功能FC11的該訊號產生控制GS11 以控制該輸出單元240。 In some embodiments, the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the preset control data code type identifier HK11. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the processing unit 230 based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T, the determined measurement value application range code EM1L and the obtained control data code type identifier HK11 to obtain the second memory address FX1L, based on the obtained second memory address FX1L to use the memory unit 25Y1 to access stored in the second The control data code CK1T of memory location PX1L, and based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T and the accessed control data code CK1T, execute the signal generation control GS11 for the trigger application function FC11 to control the output unit 240 .

該觸發應用功能規格GCL1包含該物理參數表示GC1T1,該物理參數表示GC1T1用於表示在該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的該指定物理參數QD1T。所存取的該控制資料碼CK1T包含該控制碼CC1T和該時間長度值CL1T。例如,該控制碼CC1T基於該物理參數表示GC1T1和用於轉換該物理參數表示GC1T1的該第三資料編碼操作ZX21而被預設。 The triggering application function specification GCL1 includes the physical parameter representation GC1T1, which is used to represent the specified physical parameter QD1T within the physical parameter target range RD1ET. The accessed control data code CK1T includes the control code CC1T and the time length value CL1T. For example, the control code CC1T is preset based on the physical parameter representation GC1T1 and the third data encoding operation ZX21 for converting the physical parameter representation GC1T1 .

該訊號產生控制GS11起到指示該輸出端240P的作用,並用於導致該處理單元230提供該控制訊號SH11到該輸出單元240。該控制訊號SH11起到指示該輸出端240P的作用。該輸出單元240響應該訊號產生控制GS11和該控制訊號SH11的其中之一來從該處理單元230獲得該控制碼CC1T,並基於該控制訊號SH11來執行使用該輸出端240P的該第一訊號產生操作BS11以產生該第一控制訊號SC11。例如,該第一控制訊號SC11輸送該控制碼CC1T,並用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL以進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。 The signal generation control GS11 is used to indicate the output terminal 240P, and is used to cause the processing unit 230 to provide the control signal SH11 to the output unit 240 . The control signal SH11 serves to indicate the output terminal 240P. The output unit 240 obtains the control code CC1T from the processing unit 230 in response to one of the signal generation control GS11 and the control signal SH11, and performs the first signal generation using the output terminal 240P based on the control signal SH11 The BS11 is operated to generate the first control signal SC11. For example, the first control signal SC11 conveys the control code CC1T and is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter application range RD1EL and enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

在一些實施例中,在該邏輯決定PE11是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230基於該時間長度值CL1T來到達該特定時間TJ1T,並在該特定時間TJ1T之內導致該輸出單元240產生不同於該第一控制訊號SC11的該第三控制訊號SC22。該第三控制訊號SC22用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET以進入包含於該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…中的一物 理參數候選範圍RD2E2。例如,該物理參數候選範圍RD2E2是該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該物理參數候選範圍RD1E2的其中之一,並不同於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the logic decision PE11 is affirmative, the processing unit 230 reaches the specific time TJ1T based on the time length value CL1T, and causes the output unit 240 to generate a value different from The third control signal SC22 of the first control signal SC11. The third control signal SC22 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter one of the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . The candidate range of rational parameters RD2E2. For example, the physical parameter candidate range RD2E2 is one of the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2, and is different from the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

請參閱第17圖、第18圖和第19圖。第17圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8026的示意圖。第18圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8027的示意圖。第19圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8028的示意圖。如第17圖、第18圖和第19圖所示,該實施結構8026、該實施結構8027和該實施結構8028的每一結構包含該控制裝置210、該控制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制裝置210鏈接於該伺服器280。該控制裝置210用於依靠該觸發事件EQ11而控制存在於該控制目標裝置330中的該可變物理參數QU1A,並包含該感測單元334、該操作單元297和該儲存單元250。該操作單元297包含該處理單元230、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該處理單元230耦合於該伺服器280、該感測單元334、該儲存單元250、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該輸出單元240耦合於該控制目標裝置330。例如,該電子標籤350包含該記憶體單元25Y1。 See Figures 17, 18 and 19. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8026 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8027 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8028 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in FIG. 17 , FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 , each structure of the implementation structure 8026 , the implementation structure 8027 and the implementation structure 8028 includes the control device 210 , the control target device 330 and the server 280 . The control device 210 is linked to the server 280 . The control device 210 is used for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 depending on the trigger event EQ11 , and includes the sensing unit 334 , the operating unit 297 and the storage unit 250 . The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280 , the sensing unit 334 , the storage unit 250 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The output unit 240 is coupled to the control target device 330 . For example, the electronic tag 350 includes the memory unit 25Y1.

該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…包含該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL、該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET和一物理參數候選範圍RD1E7。該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…包含該測量值應用範圍RN1L、該測量值目標範圍RN1T和一測量值候選範圍RN17。該觸發應用功能規格GCL1包含用於表示該物理參 數候選範圍RD1E7的一物理參數候選範圍表示GC17。該測量值候選範圍RN17基於該物理參數候選範圍表示GC17、該感測器測量範圍表示GW1R、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和用於轉換該物理參數候選範圍表示GC17的一資料編碼操作ZX17來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設,被配置以代表該物理參數候選範圍RD1E7,並由包含於該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…中的一測量值候選範圍碼EM17所代表。 The plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . include the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the physical parameter target range RD1ET and a physical parameter candidate range RD1E7. The plurality of different measured value reference ranges RN11, RN12, . . . include the measured value application range RN1L, the measured value target range RN1T and a measured value candidate range RN17. The trigger application function specification GCL1 contains the physical parameters used to represent the A physical parameter candidate range of the number candidate range RD1E7 represents GC17. The measured value candidate range RN17 is used based on the physical parameter candidate range representation GC17, the sensor measurement range representation GW1R, the sensor sensitivity representation GW11, and a data encoding operation ZX17 for converting the physical parameter candidate range representation GC17. The specified measured value format HH11 is preset, configured to represent the physical parameter candidate range RD1E7, and is represented by a measured value candidate range code EM17 contained in the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . . .

例如,該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2是該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET和該物理參數候選範圍RD1E7的其中之一。該第二物理參數候選範圍RD1E3是該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL、該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET和該物理參數候選範圍RD1E7的其中之一。該物理參數候選範圍RD2E2是該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該物理參數候選範圍RD1E7的其中之一。該第二特定物理參數範圍RD1E5是該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該物理參數候選範圍RD1E7的其中之一。 For example, the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 is one of the physical parameter target range RD1ET and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E7. The second physical parameter candidate range RD1E3 is one of the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the physical parameter target range RD1ET and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E7. The physical parameter candidate range RD2E2 is one of the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E7. The second specific physical parameter range RD1E5 is one of the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E7.

在一些實施例中,該記憶體單元25Y1進一步具有一記憶體位置PN12和不同於該記憶體位置PN12的一記憶體位置PX12,在該記憶體位置PN12儲存該候選範圍界限值對DN1B,並在該記憶體位置PX12儲存一控制資料碼CK12。例如,該記憶體位置PN12和該記憶體位置PX12皆基於所預設的該測量值候選範圍碼EM12而被識別。該記憶體位置PN12由一記憶體位址FN12所識別,或基於該記憶體位址FN12而被識別。該記憶體位置PX12由一記憶 體位址FX12所識別,或基於該記憶體位址FX12而被識別。該記憶體位址FN12和該記憶體位址FX12皆基於所預設的該測量值候選範圍碼EM12而被預設。 In some embodiments, the memory unit 25Y1 further has a memory location PN12 and a memory location PX12 different from the memory location PN12, the candidate range limit value pair DN1B is stored in the memory location PN12, and is stored in the memory location PN12. The memory location PX12 stores a control data code CK12. For example, both the memory location PN12 and the memory location PX12 are identified based on the preset measurement value candidate range code EM12 . The memory location PN12 is identified by or based on a memory address FN12. The memory location PX12 consists of a memory identified by or based on the memory address FX12. Both the memory address FN12 and the memory address FX12 are preset based on the preset measurement value candidate range code EM12 .

例如,該候選範圍界限值對DN1B和該控制資料碼CK12分別屬於該測量範圍界限資料碼類型TN11和該控制資料碼類型TK11。該記憶體位址FN12基於所預設的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T、所預設的該測量值候選範圍碼EM12和所預設的該測量範圍界限資料碼類型識別符HN11而被預設。該記憶體位址FX12基於所預設的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T、所預設的該測量值候選範圍碼EM12和所預設的該控制資料碼類型識別符HK11而被預設。 For example, the candidate range limit value pair DN1B and the control data code CK12 belong to the measurement range limit data type TN11 and the control data code type TK11 respectively. The memory address FN12 is preset based on the preset control target device identifier HA1T, the preset measurement value candidate range code EM12 and the preset measurement range limit data type identifier HN11. The memory address FX12 is preset based on the preset control target device identifier HA1T, the preset measured value candidate range code EM12 and the preset control data code type identifier HK11.

該處理單元230基於所獲得的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T、所確定的該測量值候選範圍碼EM12和所獲得的該測量範圍界限資料碼類型識別符HN11來獲得該記憶體位址FN12,並基於所獲得的該記憶體位址FN12來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該記憶體位置PN12的該候選範圍界限值對DN1B以獲得該候選範圍界限值對DN1B。該處理單元230基於該第一測量值VN11和所獲得的該候選範圍界限值對DN1B之間的該第二資料比較CD21來執行用於檢查該第一測量值VN11和所選擇的該測量值候選範圍RN12之間的該第二數學關係KV21的一檢查操作BV21。 The processing unit 230 obtains the memory address FN12 based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T, the determined measurement value candidate range code EM12 and the obtained measurement range limit data type identifier HN11, and based on The obtained memory address FN12 is used to use the memory unit 25Y1 to access the candidate range limit pair DN1B stored in the memory location PN12 to obtain the candidate range limit pair DN1B. The processing unit 230 performs a method for checking the first measured value VN11 and the selected measured value candidate based on the second profile comparison CD21 between the first measured value VN11 and the obtained pair of candidate range limit values DN1B. A checking operation BV21 of this second mathematical relationship KV21 between ranges RN12.

該處理單元230基於該檢查操作BV21來做出該第一測量值VN11是否為於所選擇的該測量值候選範 圍RN12之內的該第二邏輯決定PB21,並在該第二邏輯決定PB21是肯定的條件下確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2。例如,該處理單元230基於該檢查操作BV21來確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前於該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2之內的一物理參數情況,並藉此辨識該可變物理參數QU1A和該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2之間的一物理參數關係為該可變物理參數QU1A目前於該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2之內的一物理參數交集關係。 The processing unit 230 makes a decision based on the checking operation BV21 whether the first measured value VN11 is within the selected measured value candidate range. The second logical decision PB21 within the range RN12, and under the condition that the second logical decision PB21 is positive, determine the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in. For example, the processing unit 230 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently within the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 based on the checking operation BV21, and thereby identifies the variable physical parameter QU1A and the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2. A physical parameter relationship between a physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 is a physical parameter intersection relationship of the variable physical parameter QU1A currently within the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2.

在一些實施例中,在該處理單元230藉由做出該第二邏輯決定PB21而確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2的條件下,該處理單元230基於所獲得的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T、所確定的該測量值候選範圍碼EM12和所獲得的該控制資料碼類型識別符HK11來獲得該記憶體位址FX12,並基於所獲得的該記憶體位址FX12來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該記憶體位置PX12的該控制資料碼CK12。該控制資料碼CK12包含一控制碼CC13。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in by making the second logical decision PB21, the processing unit 230 based on the The obtained control target device identifier HA1T, the determined measured value candidate range code EM12 and the obtained control data code type identifier HK11 are used to obtain the memory address FX12, and based on the obtained memory address FX12 to use the memory unit 25Y1 to access the control data code CK12 stored in the memory location PX12. The control data code CK12 includes a control code CC13.

該觸發應用功能規格GCL1包含一物理參數表示GC131,該物理參數表示GC131用於表示包含於該第二物理參數候選範圍RD1E3中的一指定物理參數QD13。該控制碼CC13基於該物理參數表示GC131和用於轉換該物理參數表示GC131的一資料編碼操作ZX23而被預設。 The triggering application function specification GCL1 includes a physical parameter representation GC131, which is used to represent a specified physical parameter QD13 included in the second physical parameter candidate range RD1E3. The control code CC13 is preset based on the physical parameter representation GC131 and a data encoding operation ZX23 for converting the physical parameter representation GC131 .

230基於所存取的該控制資料碼CK12來導 致該輸出單元240執行用於該觸發應用功能FC11的該第二訊號產生操作BS21以產生不同於該第一控制訊號SC11的該第二控制訊號SC12。該第二控制訊號SC12輸送該控制碼CC13,並用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET以進入包含於該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…中的該第二物理參數候選範圍RD1E3。例如,在該第二物理參數候選範圍RD1E3相同於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下,輸送該控制碼CC13的該第二控制訊號SC12用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET以進入相同於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的該第二物理參數候選範圍RD1E3。 230 derives based on the accessed control data code CK12 The output unit 240 executes the second signal generating operation BS21 for the trigger application function FC11 to generate the second control signal SC12 different from the first control signal SC11 . The second control signal SC12 conveys the control code CC13 and is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the second physical parameter contained in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, ... Parameter candidate range RD1E3. For example, under the condition that the second physical parameter candidate range RD1E3 is the same as the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the second control signal SC12 conveying the control code CC13 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the second physical parameter candidate range RD1E3 which is the same as the physical parameter application range RD1EL.

在一些實施例中,在該可變物理參數QU1A由於該觸發事件EQ11而被配置以於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的條件下,該輸入單元270接收該使用者輸入操作BQ11,並響應該使用者輸入操作BQ11來導致該處理單元230確定該特定輸入碼UW11。例如,該特定輸入碼UW11選擇自該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…,並等於包含於該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…中的該特定測量值範圍碼EM15。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET due to the trigger event EQ11, the input unit 270 receives the user input operation BQ11, and responds to the User input operation BQ11 causes the processing unit 230 to determine the specific input code UW11. For example, the specific input code UW11 is selected from the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, .

該處理單元該儲存單元250儲存基於該特定測量值範圍碼EM15而被儲存的一控制資料碼CJ15。在該處理單元230確定該特定輸入碼UW11的條件下,該處理單元230執行該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A和所確定的該特定輸入碼UW11之間的該資料比較CE11。在該處理單元230基於該資料比較CE11而確定等於所確定的該測量值 目標範圍碼EM1T的該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A和所確定的該特定輸入碼UW11之間的該第二碼差異DX11的條件下,該處理單元230基於所確定的該特定輸入碼UW11來存取該控制資料碼CJ15。例如,該控制資料碼CJ15包含一控制碼CC15。 The processing unit and the storage unit 250 store a control data code CJ15 stored based on the specific measurement value range code EM15. On the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the specific input code UW11, the processing unit 230 executes the data comparison CE11 between the variable physical parameter range code UN1A and the determined specific input code UW11. In the processing unit 230, based on the data comparison CE11, it is determined to be equal to the determined measured value Under the condition of the second code difference DX11 between the variable physical parameter range code UN1A of the target range code EM1T and the determined specific input code UW11, the processing unit 230 stores based on the determined specific input code UW11 Take the control data code CJ15. For example, the control data code CJ15 includes a control code CC15.

該觸發應用功能規格GCL1包含一物理參數表示GC151,該物理參數表示GC151用於表示包含於該第二特定物理參數範圍RD1E5中的一指定物理參數QD15。該控制碼CC15基於該物理參數表示GC151和用於轉換該物理參數表示GC151的一資料編碼操作ZX25而被預設。 The triggering application function specification GCL1 includes a physical parameter representation GC151, which is used to represent a specified physical parameter QD15 included in the second specific physical parameter range RD1E5. The control code CC15 is preset based on the physical parameter representation GC151 and a data encoding operation ZX25 for converting the physical parameter representation GC151 .

該處理單元230基於所存取的該控制資料碼CJ15來導致該輸出單元240執行用於用於該觸發應用功能FC11的該訊號產生操作BS15以產生不同於該第一控制訊號SC11的該控制訊號SC15。該控制訊號SC15包含該控制碼CC15,並用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET以進入包含於該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…中的該第二特定物理參數範圍RD1E5。例如,該可變物理參數QU1A相關於一控制碼CC1L。該控制碼CC1L基於包含於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL中的一指定物理參數QD1L而被預設。在該控制碼CC15相同於該控制碼CC1L的條件下,該第二特定物理參數範圍RD1E5相同於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL。 The processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to perform the signal generating operation BS15 for the trigger application function FC11 based on the accessed control data code CJ15 to generate the control signal different from the first control signal SC11 SC15. The control signal SC15 includes the control code CC15 and is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the second specific physical parameter contained in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . Range RD1E5. For example, the variable physical parameter QU1A is related to a control code CC1L. The control code CC1L is preset based on a specified physical parameter QD1L included in the physical parameter application range RD1EL. Under the condition that the control code CC15 is the same as the control code CC1L, the second specific physical parameter range RD1E5 is the same as the physical parameter application range RD1EL.

在一些實施例中,該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240的其中之一包含耦合於該處理單元230的一使用 者介面區AP11。在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230依靠該使用者介面區AP11來獲得一輸入資料DG11和一輸入資料DG12。在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230基於該輸入資料DG11來取得所預設的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L,並基於該輸入資料DG12來取得所預設的該控制資料碼CK1T。例如,該處理單元230藉由對於該輸入資料DG11執行一資料編碼操作ZX2A來取得所預設的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L,並藉由對於該輸入資料DG12執行一資料編碼操作ZX2B來取得所預設的該控制資料碼CK1T。 In some embodiments, one of the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 includes a user coupled to the processing unit 230 The user interface area AP11. Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 obtains an input data DG11 and an input data DG12 by means of the user interface area AP11. Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 obtains the preset application range limit value pair DN1L based on the input data DG11 , and obtains the preset control data code CK1T based on the input data DG12 . For example, the processing unit 230 obtains the preset application range limit value pair DN1L by performing a data encoding operation ZX2A on the input data DG11, and obtains the preset application range limit value pair DN1L by performing a data encoding operation ZX2B on the input data DG12. The preset control data code CK1T.

該輸入單元270接收用於操作該使用者介面區AP11的一使用者輸入操作BU15,並響應該使用者輸入操作BU15來導致該處理單元230從該輸入單元270獲得該輸入資料DG11。該輸入單元270接收用於操作該使用者介面區AP11的一使用者輸入操作BU16,並響應該使用者輸入操作BU16來導致該處理單元230從該輸入單元270獲得該輸入資料DG12。 The input unit 270 receives a user input operation BU15 for operating the user interface area AP11 , and causes the processing unit 230 to obtain the input data DG11 from the input unit 270 in response to the user input operation BU15 . The input unit 270 receives a user input operation BU16 for operating the user interface area AP11 , and responds to the user input operation BU16 to cause the processing unit 230 to obtain the input data DG12 from the input unit 270 .

在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230被配置以取得所預設的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T、所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L、所預設的該測量範圍界限資料碼類型識別符HN11和所預設的該控制資料碼類型識別符HK11,基於所取得的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T、所取得的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L和所取得的該測量範圍界限資料碼類型識別符HN11來獲得該第一記憶體位址FN1L,並基於所取得的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L 和所獲得的該第一記憶體位址FN1L來導致該操作單元297提供輸送所取得的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L和所獲得的該第一記憶體位址FN1L的該第一寫入請求訊息WD1L。例如,該第一寫入請求訊息WD1L用於導致該記憶體單元25Y1在該第一記憶體位置PN1L儲存所輸送的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L。 Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the preset control target device identifier HA1T, the preset measurement value application range code EM1L, and the preset measurement range limit data code The type identifier HN11 and the preset control data code type identifier HK11 are based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T, the obtained measurement value application range code EM1L and the obtained measurement range limit data code Type identifier HN11 to obtain the first memory address FN1L, and based on the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L and the obtained first memory address FN1L to cause the operation unit 297 to provide the first write request message WD1L conveying the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L and the obtained first memory address FN1L. For example, the first write request message WD1L is used to cause the memory unit 25Y1 to store the transmitted application range limit value pair DN1L in the first memory location PN1L.

在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230基於所取得的該控制目標裝置識別符HA1T、所取得的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L和所取得的該控制資料碼類型識別符HK11來獲得該第二記憶體位址FX1L,並基於所取得的該控制資料碼CK1T和所獲得的該第二記憶體位址FX1L來導致該操作單元297提供輸送所取得的該控制資料碼CK1T和所獲得的該第二記憶體位址FX1L的該第二寫入請求訊息WC1L。例如,該第二寫入請求訊息WC1L用於導致該記憶體單元25Y1在該第二記憶體位置PX1L儲存所輸送的該控制資料碼CK1T。 Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 obtains the first control data code type identifier HK11 based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T, the obtained measurement value application range code EM1L and the obtained control data code type identifier HK11. Two memory addresses FX1L, and based on the obtained control data code CK1T and the obtained second memory address FX1L to cause the operation unit 297 to provide and transmit the obtained control data code CK1T and the obtained second The second write request message WC1L of the memory address FX1L. For example, the second write request message WC1L is used to cause the memory unit 25Y1 to store the transmitted control data code CK1T in the second memory location PX1L.

例如,該電子標籤350、該儲存單元250和該伺服器280的其中之一中包含該記憶體單元25Y1。在該電子標籤350包含該記憶體單元25Y1的條件下,該處理單元230導致該讀取器220提供該第一寫入請求訊息WD1L和該第二寫入請求訊息WC1L到該電子標籤350。在該伺服器280包含該記憶體單元25Y1的條件下,該處理單元230導致該輸出單元240提供該第一寫入請求訊息WD1L和該第二寫入請求訊息WC1L到該伺服器280。在該儲存單元250包含該記憶體單元25Y1的條件下,該處理單元230提 供該第一寫入請求訊息WD1L和該第二寫入請求訊息WC1L到該儲存單元250。 For example, one of the electronic tag 350 , the storage unit 250 and the server 280 includes the memory unit 25Y1 . Under the condition that the electronic tag 350 includes the memory unit 25Y1 , the processing unit 230 causes the reader 220 to provide the first write request message WD1L and the second write request message WC1L to the electronic tag 350 . Under the condition that the server 280 includes the memory unit 25Y1 , the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to provide the first write request message WD1L and the second write request message WC1L to the server 280 . Under the condition that the storage unit 250 includes the memory unit 25Y1, the processing unit 230 provides Provide the first write request message WD1L and the second write request message WC1L to the storage unit 250 .

在一些實施例中,該控制裝置210是一計算裝置、一通訊裝置、一使用者裝置、一移動裝置、一遙控器、一電子裝置、一可攜式裝置、一桌上型裝置、一相對固定裝置、一固定裝置、一智慧電話和其任意組合的其中之一。該電子標籤350是一被動式電子標籤、一主動式電子標籤、一半主動式電子標籤、一無線電子標籤和一有線電子標籤的其中之一。例如,該控制裝置210通過在該輸出單元240和該操作單元397之間的一實際鏈接而向該控制目標裝置330傳輸該第一控制訊號SC11。該實際鏈接是一有線鏈接和一無線鏈接的其中之一。 In some embodiments, the control device 210 is a computing device, a communication device, a user device, a mobile device, a remote control, an electronic device, a portable device, a desktop device, a relative One of a fixed device, a fixed device, a smart phone, and any combination thereof. The electronic tag 350 is one of a passive electronic tag, an active electronic tag, a semi-active electronic tag, a wireless electronic tag and a wired electronic tag. For example, the control device 210 transmits the first control signal SC11 to the control target device 330 through an actual link between the output unit 240 and the operation unit 397 . The actual link is one of a wired link and a wireless link.

該第一控制訊號SC11是一電訊號SP11和一光訊號SQ11的其中之一。該輸出單元240包含一輸出組件450、一顯示組件460和一輸出組件455。該輸出組件450耦合於該處理單元230,並在該第一控制訊號SC11是該電訊號SP11的條件下用於輸出該電訊號SP11。例如,該輸出組件450是一傳輸組件。當該觸發事件EQ11發生時,該顯示組件460顯示該第一狀態指示LB11。在處理單元230基於該資料比較CE1T而確定該第一碼差異DF11的條件下,處理單元230基於所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T來導致該顯示組件460將該第一狀態指示LB11改變成該第二狀態指示LB12。 The first control signal SC11 is one of an electrical signal SP11 and an optical signal SQ11. The output unit 240 includes an output component 450 , a display component 460 and an output component 455 . The output component 450 is coupled to the processing unit 230 and used for outputting the electrical signal SP11 under the condition that the first control signal SC11 is the electrical signal SP11. For example, the output component 450 is a transmission component. When the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the display component 460 displays the first status indication LB11. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the first code difference DF11 based on the data comparison CE1T, the processing unit 230 causes the display component 460 to change the first status indication LB11 to This second state indicates LB12.

該顯示組件460耦合於該處理單元230,用於顯示與該第一測量值VN11相關的一測量資訊LY11,並 在該控制訊號SC11是該光訊號SQ11的條件下用於輸出輸送一編碼影像FY11的該光訊號SQ11。該輸出組件455耦合於該處理單元230。例如,該處理單元230被配置以導致該輸出組件455向該控制目標裝置330傳輸一物理參數訊號SB11。該可變物理參數QU1A基於該物理參數訊號SB11而被形成。例如,該輸出組件455是一傳輸組件。例如,該編碼影像FY11代表該控制碼CC1T。例如,該編碼影像FY11是一條碼影像。 The display component 460 is coupled to the processing unit 230 for displaying a measurement information LY11 related to the first measurement value VN11, and Under the condition that the control signal SC11 is the optical signal SQ11, it is used to output the optical signal SQ11 for conveying an encoded image FY11. The output component 455 is coupled to the processing unit 230 . For example, the processing unit 230 is configured to cause the output component 455 to transmit a physical parameter signal SB11 to the control target device 330 . The variable physical parameter QU1A is formed based on the physical parameter signal SB11. For example, the output component 455 is a transmission component. For example, the coded image FY11 represents the control code CC1T. For example, the encoded image FY11 is a barcode image.

在一些實施例中,該操作單元297通過一網路410而耦合於該伺服器280。該輸入單元270包含一輸入組件440和一輸入組件442。該輸入組件440耦合於該處理單元230。例如,該輸入組件440和該顯示組件460的其中之一包含該使用者介面區AP11。該輸入組件442耦合於該處理單元230,並接收該使用者輸入操作BQ11。該感測單元334、該儲存單元250、該輸出組件450、該顯示組件460、該輸出組件455、該輸入組件440、該輸入組件442和該讀取器220皆受該處理單元230控制。例如,該操作單元297耦合於該網路410;且該網路410耦合於該伺服器280。 In some embodiments, the operating unit 297 is coupled to the server 280 through a network 410 . The input unit 270 includes an input component 440 and an input component 442 . The input component 440 is coupled to the processing unit 230 . For example, one of the input component 440 and the display component 460 includes the user interface area AP11. The input component 442 is coupled to the processing unit 230 and receives the user input operation BQ11. The sensing unit 334 , the storage unit 250 , the output component 450 , the display component 460 , the output component 455 , the input component 440 , the input component 442 and the reader 220 are all controlled by the processing unit 230 . For example, the operation unit 297 is coupled to the network 410 ; and the network 410 is coupled to the server 280 .

例如,在該可變物理參數QU1A由於該觸發事件EQ11而被配置以於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的條件下,該輸入組件442接收該使用者輸入操作BQ11,並響應該使用者輸入操作BQ11來提供該輸入資料DH11到該處理單元230。該處理單元230對於該輸入資料DH11執行該資料編碼操作EA11以確定該特定輸入碼UW11。 For example, under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET due to the trigger event EQ11, the input component 442 receives the user input operation BQ11 and responds to the user input operation BQ11 provides the input data DH11 to the processing unit 230 . The processing unit 230 performs the data encoding operation EA11 on the input data DH11 to determine the specific input code UW11.

請參閱第20圖和第21圖。第20圖為繪示 於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8029的示意圖。第21圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8030的示意圖。如第20圖和第21圖所示,該實施結構8029和該實施結構8030的每一結構包含該控制裝置210、該控制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制裝置210鏈接於該伺服器280。該控制裝置210用於依靠該觸發事件EQ11而控制存在於該控制目標裝置330中的該可變物理參數QU1A,並包含該感測單元334、該操作單元297和該儲存單元250。該操作單元297包含該處理單元230、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該處理單元230耦合於該伺服器280、該感測單元334、該儲存單元250、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該輸出單元240耦合於該控制目標裝置330。 See Figures 20 and 21. Figure 20 shows A schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8029 of the control system 801 is shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8030 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21 , each structure of the implementation structure 8029 and the implementation structure 8030 includes the control device 210 , the control target device 330 and the server 280 . The control device 210 is linked to the server 280 . The control device 210 is used for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 depending on the trigger event EQ11 , and includes the sensing unit 334 , the operating unit 297 and the storage unit 250 . The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280 , the sensing unit 334 , the storage unit 250 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The output unit 240 is coupled to the control target device 330 .

在一些實施例中,該控制目標裝置330包含該操作單元397和耦合於該操作單元397的該功能目標335。該功能目標335包含該物理參數形成區AU11,並受該操作單元397控制。該物理參數形成區AU11具有該可變物理參數QU1A。該操作單元397接收該第一控制訊號SC11、該第二控制訊號SC12、該第三控制訊號SC22和該控制訊號SC15,並響應該第一控制訊號SC11、該第二控制訊號SC12、該第三控制訊號SC22和該控制訊號SC15的任一訊號來使用該功能目標335以控制該可變物理參數QU1A。 In some embodiments, the control object device 330 includes the operation unit 397 and the function object 335 coupled to the operation unit 397 . The functional object 335 includes the physical parameter forming area AU11 and is controlled by the operating unit 397 . The physical parameter forming area AU11 has the variable physical parameter QU1A. The operation unit 397 receives the first control signal SC11, the second control signal SC12, the third control signal SC22 and the control signal SC15, and responds to the first control signal SC11, the second control signal SC12, the third Either one of the control signal SC22 and the control signal SC15 is used to use the functional object 335 to control the variable physical parameter QU1A.

例如,該第一控制訊號SC11輸送該控制碼CC1T。該操作單元397從所接收的該第一控制訊號SC11 獲得該控制碼CC1T,並基於所獲得的該控制碼CC1T來產生該功能訊號SG11。該功能目標335接收該功能訊號SG11,並響應該功能訊號SG11來導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL以進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。例如,該功能訊號SG11是一控制訊號、一脈衝寬度調變訊號、一電位準訊號和一驅動訊號的其中之一。 For example, the first control signal SC11 conveys the control code CC1T. The operating unit 397 receives the first control signal SC11 The control code CC1T is obtained, and the function signal SG11 is generated based on the obtained control code CC1T. The function target 335 receives the function signal SG11 and responds to the function signal SG11 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter application range RD1EL and enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET. For example, the function signal SG11 is one of a control signal, a pulse width modulation signal, a potential signal and a driving signal.

在一些實施例中,該操作單元297進一步包含耦合於該處理單元230的一定時器539。該定時器539受該處理單元230控制,並被配置以符合一定時器規格FW11。所預設的該控制資料碼CK1T包含該控制碼CC1T、該時間長度值CL1T、和不同於該控制碼CC1T的一控制碼CC22。例如,該可變時間長度LF1A進一步基於一參考時間長度LJ1T而被特徵化。該時間長度值CL1T代表該參考時間長度LJ1T,並基於該參考時間長度LJ1T和該定時器規格FW11來以一指定計數值格式HQ21而被預設。例如,該指定計數值格式HQ21基於一指定位元數目UX21而被特徵化。 In some embodiments, the operating unit 297 further includes a timer 539 coupled to the processing unit 230 . The timer 539 is controlled by the processing unit 230 and configured to comply with a timer specification FW11. The preset control data code CK1T includes the control code CC1T, the time length value CL1T, and a control code CC22 different from the control code CC1T. For example, the variable time length LF1A is further characterized based on a reference time length LJ1T. The time length value CL1T represents the reference time length LJ1T, and is preset in a specified count value format HQ21 based on the reference time length LJ1T and the timer specification FW11. For example, the specified count value format HQ21 is characterized based on a specified bit number UX21.

該觸發應用功能規格GCL1包含一物理參數表示GC221和一時間長度表示GC1KJ。該物理參數表示GC221用於表示包含於該物理參數候選範圍RD2E2中的一指定物理參數QD22。該時間長度表示GC1KJ用於表示該參考時間長度LJ1T。該控制碼CC22基於該物理參數表示GC221和用於轉換該物理參數表示GC221的一資料編碼操作ZX2B而被預設。該物理參數候選範圍RD2E2不同於該 物理參數目標範圍RD1ET,並包含於該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…中。例如,該時間長度值CL1T基於該時間長度表示GC1KJ、該定時器規格FW11和用於轉換該時間長度表示GC1KJ的一資料編碼操作ZX1KJ來以該指定計數值格式HQ21而被預設。 The trigger application function specification GCL1 includes a physical parameter indicating GC221 and a time length indicating GC1KJ. The physical parameter representation GC221 is used to represent a specified physical parameter QD22 included in the physical parameter candidate range RD2E2. The time length representation GC1KJ is used to represent the reference time length LJ1T. The control code CC22 is preset based on the physical parameter representation GC221 and a data encoding operation ZX2B for converting the physical parameter representation GC221 . The physical parameter candidate range RD2E2 is different from the The physical parameter target range RD1ET is included in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . For example, the time length value CL1T is preset in the specified count value format HQ21 based on the time length representation GC1KJ, the timer specification FW11 and a data encoding operation ZX1KJ for converting the time length representation GC1KJ.

在該處理單元230藉由做出該第一邏輯決定PB11而確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下,該處理單元230基於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L來獲得該控制資料碼CK1T,並基於包含於所獲得的該控制資料碼CK1T中的該控制碼CC1T來執行用於該觸發應用功能FC11的該訊號產生控制GS11以控制該輸出單元240。例如,該訊號產生控制GS11提供所獲得的該控制碼CC1T到該輸出單元240。該輸出單元240響應該訊號產生控制GS11來使用所提供的該控制碼CC1T以產生該第一控制訊號SC11。 On the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RD1EL in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located by making the first logical decision PB11, the processing unit 230 applies a range code based on the determined measured value EM1L to obtain the control data code CK1T, and execute the signal generation control GS11 for the trigger application function FC11 to control the output unit 240 based on the control code CC1T included in the obtained control data code CK1T. For example, the signal generation control GS11 provides the obtained control code CC1T to the output unit 240 . The output unit 240 responds to the signal generating control GS11 to use the provided control code CC1T to generate the first control signal SC11.

該定時器539用於測量該可變時間長度LF1A。該處理單元230響應該訊號產生控制GS11來檢查包含於所獲得的該控制資料碼CK1T中的該時間長度值CL1T和該時間長度值參考範圍GJ11之間的該數值關係KJ11以做出用於控制該特定時間TJ1T的該計數操作BC1T是否要被執行的該邏輯決定PE11。在該邏輯決定PE11是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230基於該時間長度值CL1T來導致該定時器539執行該計數操作BC1T。 The timer 539 is used to measure the variable time length LF1A. The processing unit 230 generates control GS11 in response to the signal to check the numerical relationship KJ11 between the time length value CL1T contained in the obtained control data code CK1T and the time length value reference range GJ11 to make a control The logic determines PE11 whether the counting operation BC1T of the specific time TJ1T is to be performed. On the condition that the logical decision PE11 is positive, the processing unit 230 causes the timer 539 to perform the counting operation BC1T based on the time length value CL1T.

在一些實施例中,用於做出該邏輯決定PE11的該時間長度值參考範圍GJ11具有一時間長度範圍 界限值對LN1A,並代表該時間長度參考範圍HJ11。該時間長度值參考範圍GJ11基於該時間長度參考範圍HJ11和該定時器規格FW11來用該指定計數值格式HQ21而被預設。例如,該觸發應用功能規格GCL1包含一時間長度參考範圍表示GC1HJ,該時間長度參考範圍表示GC1HJ用於表示該時間長度參考範圍HJ11。該時間長度參考範圍HJ11和該時間長度範圍界限值對LN1A皆基於該時間長度參考範圍表示GC1HJ、該定時器規格FW11和用於轉換該時間長度參考範圍表示GC1HJ的一資料編碼操作ZX1HJ來用該指定計數值格式HQ21而被預設。 In some embodiments, the time length value reference range GJ11 for making the logical decision PE11 has a time length range The limit value is on LN1A, and represents the reference range HJ11 for this length of time. The time length value reference range GJ11 is preset with the specified count value format HQ21 based on the time length reference range HJ11 and the timer specification FW11. For example, the trigger application function specification GCL1 includes a time length reference range representation GClHJ, and the time length reference range representation GClHJ is used to represent the time length reference range HJ11. The time length reference range HJ11 and the time length range limit value pair LN1A are based on the time length reference range representation GC1HJ, the timer specification FW11 and a data encoding operation ZX1HJ for converting the time length reference range representation GC1HJ to use the It is preset by specifying the count value format HQ21.

該儲存單元250儲存該時間長度範圍界限值對LN1A。該處理單元230響應該訊號產生控制GS11來從該儲存單元250獲得該時間長度範圍界限值對LN1A,並藉由比較包含於所獲得的該控制資料碼CK1T中的該時間長度值CL1T和所獲得的該時間長度範圍界限值對LN1A來檢查該數值關係KJ11以做出該邏輯決定PE11。 The storage unit 250 stores the time length range limit value pair LN1A. The processing unit 230 generates a control GS11 in response to the signal to obtain the time length range limit value pair LN1A from the storage unit 250, and compares the time length value CL1T contained in the obtained control data code CK1T with the obtained The time length range limit value pair LN1A checks the numerical relationship KJ11 to make the logical decision PE11.

例如,在該處理單元230藉由檢查該數值關係KJ11而辨識該數值關係KJ11為一數值交集關係的條件下,該處理單元230做出該邏輯決定PE11以成為肯定的。例如,該時間長度範圍界限值對LN1A被預設,並包含該時間長度值參考範圍GJ11的一時間長度範圍界限值LN11和相對於該時間長度範圍界限值LN11的一時間長度範圍界限值LN12。在該處理單元230藉由比較包含於所獲得的該控制資料碼CK1T中的該時間長度值CL1T和所獲得的該時間長度範圍界限值對LN1A而確定該參考時間長度LJ1T 包含於的該時間長度參考範圍HJ11的條件下,該處理單元230做出該邏輯決定PE11以成為肯定的。 For example, on the condition that the processing unit 230 identifies the numerical relation KJ11 as a numerical intersection relation by examining the numerical relation KJ11, the processing unit 230 makes the logical decision PE11 to be positive. For example, the time length range limit value pair LN1A is preset, and includes a time length range limit value LN11 of the time length value reference range GJ11 and a time length range limit value LN12 corresponding to the time length range limit value LN11. In the processing unit 230, the reference time length LJ1T is determined by comparing the time length value CL1T contained in the obtained control data code CK1T with the obtained time length range limit value pair LN1A Conditional on the time length reference range HJ11 contained in, the processing unit 230 makes the logic decision PE11 to be positive.

在一些實施例中,在該可變物理參數QU1A由於該觸發事件EQ11而被配置以於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的條件下,該處理單元230基於該計數操作BC1T來經歷具有一結束時間TZ1T的一應用時間長度LT1T以到達該特定時間TJ1T。該處理單元230於該特定時間TJ1T之內基於包含於所獲得的該控制資料碼CK1T中的該控制碼CC22來執行用於該觸發應用功能FC11的一訊號產生控制GS22以控制該輸出單元240。例如,該訊號產生控制GS22提供所獲得的該控制碼CC22到該輸出單元240。該第一控制訊號SC11用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內足有與該參考時間長度LJ1T匹配的該應用時間長度LT1T。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET due to the trigger event EQ11, the processing unit 230 experiences an end time based on the counting operation BC1T An application time length LT1T of TZ1T is used to reach the specific time TJ1T. The processing unit 230 executes a signal generation control GS22 for the trigger application function FC11 to control the output unit 240 within the specific time TJ1T based on the control code CC22 included in the obtained control data code CK1T. For example, the signal generation control GS22 provides the obtained control code CC22 to the output unit 240 . The first control signal SC11 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to have the application time length LT1T matching the reference time length LJ1T within the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

該輸出單元240響應該訊號產生控制GS22來從該處理單元230獲得該控制碼CC22,並基於所獲得的該控制碼CC22來執行用於該觸發應用功能FC11的一訊號產生操作BS22以產生不同於該第一控制訊號SC11的該第三控制訊號SC22。該第三控制訊號SC22用於控制該功能目標335以導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET以進入該物理參數候選範圍RD2E2。該特定時間TJ1T相鄰於該結束時間TZ1T。 The output unit 240 responds to the signal generation control GS22 to obtain the control code CC22 from the processing unit 230, and executes a signal generation operation BS22 for the trigger application function FC11 based on the obtained control code CC22 to generate a signal different from The third control signal SC22 of the first control signal SC11. The third control signal SC22 is used to control the functional object 335 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET and enter the physical parameter candidate range RD2E2. The specific time TJ1T is adjacent to the end time TZ1T.

例如,當該定時器539藉由執行該計數操作BC1T而到達該結束時間TZ1T時,該定時器539向該處理單元230傳輸一中斷請求訊號UH1T以導致該處理單元230 到達該特定時間TJ1T。該處理單元230響應該中斷請求訊號UH1T來使用該控制碼CC22以執行該訊號產生控制GS22。例如,該物理參數候選範圍RD2E2相同於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL。 For example, when the timer 539 reaches the end time TZ1T by executing the counting operation BC1T, the timer 539 transmits an interrupt request signal UH1T to the processing unit 230 to cause the processing unit 230 to This specific time TJ1T is reached. The processing unit 230 uses the control code CC22 to execute the signal generation control GS22 in response to the interrupt request signal UH1T. For example, the physical parameter candidate range RD2E2 is the same as the physical parameter application range RD1EL.

在一些實施例中,該可變物理參數QU1A的該額定物理參數範圍RD1E包含該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…。該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…包含該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL、該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET和該物理參數候選範圍RD1E7。該可變物理參數QU1A基於該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…而處於複數參考狀態的其中之一。該複數參考狀態是不同的,並包含一第一參考狀態、一第二參考狀態和一第三參考狀態,藉此該可變物理參數QU1A由一可變目前狀態所特徵化。該可變目前狀態是該複數參考狀態的其中之一。 In some embodiments, the rated physical parameter range RD1E of the variable physical parameter QU1A includes the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . The plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . include the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the physical parameter target range RD1ET and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E7. The variable physical parameter QU1A is in one of a plurality of reference states based on the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1 , RD1E2 , . . . . The plurality of reference states are different and include a first reference state, a second reference state and a third reference state, whereby the variable physical parameter QU1A is characterized by a variable current state. The mutable current state is one of the plurality of reference states.

例如,該第一參考狀態和該第二參考狀態是互補的。在該可變物理參數QU1A是於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL之內的條件下,該可變物理參數QU1A處於該第一參考狀態。在該可變物理參數QU1A是於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的條件下,該可變物理參數QU1A處於該第二參考狀態。在該可變物理參數QU1A是於該物理參數候選範圍RD1E7之內的條件下,該可變物理參數QU1A處於該第三參考狀態。 For example, the first reference state and the second reference state are complementary. On the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is within the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the variable physical parameter QU1A is in the first reference state. On the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is within the physical parameter target range RD1ET, the variable physical parameter QU1A is in the second reference state. On the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is within the physical parameter candidate range RD1E7, the variable physical parameter QU1A is in the third reference state.

該控制目標裝置330響應該第一控制訊號SC11來導致該可變物理參數QU1A從一目前狀態改變成該 第二參考狀態,或響應該第一控制訊號SC11來導致該可變物理參數QU1A從該第一特定物理參數QU13改變成該第二特定物理參數QU14。例如,該目前狀態是該第一參考狀態。該第一特定物理參數QU13是於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL之內,且該第二特定物理參數QU14是於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內。 The control target device 330 responds to the first control signal SC11 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to change from a current state to the The second reference state, or responding to the first control signal SC11 causes the variable physical parameter QU1A to change from the first specific physical parameter QU13 to the second specific physical parameter QU14. For example, the current state is the first reference state. The first specific physical parameter QU13 is within the physical parameter application range RD1EL, and the second specific physical parameter QU14 is within the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

在一些實施例中,該對應物理參數範圍RY1ET由該對應測量值範圍RX1T所代表,並包含該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該物理參數候選範圍RD1E7。該對應測量值範圍RX1T包含該測量值應用範圍RN1L和該測量值候選範圍RN17。該第二控制訊號SC12、該第三控制訊號SC22和該控制訊號SC15的任一訊號用於控制該功能目標335以導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET以進入該對應物理參數範圍RY1ET。 In some embodiments, the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET is represented by the corresponding measured value range RX1T, and includes the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E7. The corresponding measurement value range RX1T includes the measurement value application range RN1L and the measurement value candidate range RN17. Any one of the second control signal SC12, the third control signal SC22 and the control signal SC15 is used to control the functional object 335 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the corresponding physical parameter Range RY1ET.

該複數參考狀態分別導致該功能目標335處於複數功能狀態。該複數功能狀態是不同的,並包含一第一功能狀態、一第二功能狀態和一第三功能狀態。例如,該第一功能狀態和該第二功能狀態是互補的。在該可變物理參數QU1A是於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL之內的條件下,該功能目標335處於該第一功能狀態。在該可變物理參數QU1A是於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的條件下,該功能目標335處於該第二功能狀態。在該可變物理參數QU1A是於該物理參數候選範圍RD1E7之內的條件下,該功能目標335處於該第三功能狀態。 The plurality of reference states cause the functional object 335 to be in a plurality of functional states, respectively. The plurality of functional states are different and include a first functional state, a second functional state and a third functional state. For example, the first functional state and the second functional state are complementary. On the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is within the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the functional object 335 is in the first functional state. On the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is within the physical parameter target range RD1ET, the functional object 335 is in the second functional state. On the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is within the physical parameter candidate range RD1E7, the functional object 335 is in the third functional state.

例如,該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L是一測量 值參考範圍號碼。該測量值應用範圍RN1L基於該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L而被安排於該額定測量值範圍RD1N中。該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T是一測量值參考範圍號碼。該測量值目標範圍RN1T基於該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T而被安排於該額定測量值範圍RD1N中。該測量值候選範圍碼EM12是一測量值參考範圍號碼。該測量值候選範圍RN12基於該測量值候選範圍碼EM12而被安排於該額定測量值範圍RD1N中。 For example, the measurement value application range code EM1L is a measurement Values refer to range numbers. The measured value application range RN1L is arranged in the nominal measured value range RD1N based on the measured value application range code EM1L. The measured value target range code EM1T is a measured value reference range number. The measured value target range RN1T is arranged in the nominal measured value range RD1N based on the measured value target range code EM1T. The measured value candidate range code EM12 is a measured value reference range number. The measured value candidate range RN12 is arranged in the nominal measured value range RD1N based on the measured value candidate range code EM12.

在一些實施例中,該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL是一相對高物理參數範圍和一相對低物理參數範圍的其中之一;且該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL是該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍的其中另一。在該可變物理參數QU1A是該第一可變電壓的條件下,該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍分別是一相對高電壓範圍和一相對低電壓範圍。在該可變物理參數QU1A是該第一可變電流的條件下,該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍分別是一相對高電流範圍和一相對低電流範圍。在該可變物理參數QU1A是該第一可變電阻的條件下,該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍分別是一相對高電阻範圍和一相對低電阻範圍。 In some embodiments, the physical parameter application range RD1EL is one of a relatively high physical parameter range and a relatively low physical parameter range; and the physical parameter application range RD1EL is the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range. Another one of the parameter ranges. Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is the first variable voltage, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high voltage range and a relatively low voltage range, respectively. Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is the first variable current, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high current range and a relatively low current range, respectively. Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is the first variable resistor, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high resistance range and a relatively low resistance range, respectively.

在該可變物理參數QU1A是該第一可變亮度的條件下,該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍分別是一相對高亮度範圍和一相對低亮度範圍。在該可變物理參數QU1A是該第一可變光強度的條件下,該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍分別是一相對 高光強度範圍和一相對低光強度範圍。在該可變物理參數QU1A是該第一可變音量的條件下,該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍分別是一相對高音量範圍和一相對低音量範圍。在該可變物理參數QU1A是該第一可變角速度的條件下,該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍分別是一相對高角速度範圍和一相對低角速度範圍。 Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is the first variable brightness, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high brightness range and a relatively low brightness range, respectively. Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is the first variable light intensity, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relative A high light intensity range and a relatively low light intensity range. Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is the first variable volume, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high volume range and a relatively low volume range, respectively. Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is the first variable angular velocity, the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high angular velocity range and a relatively low angular velocity range, respectively.

例如,該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL是一相對高物理參數範圍和一相對低物理參數範圍的其中之一;且該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET是該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍的其中另一。該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL是一相對高物理參數範圍和一相對低物理參數範圍的其中之一;且該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2是該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍的其中另一。例如,該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2是一相對高物理參數範圍和一相對低物理參數範圍的其中之一;且該第二物理參數候選範圍RD1E3是該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍的其中另一。 For example, the physical parameter application range RD1EL is one of a relatively high physical parameter range and a relatively low physical parameter range; and the physical parameter target range RD1ET is one of the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range another. The physical parameter application range RD1EL is one of a relatively high physical parameter range and a relatively low physical parameter range; and the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 is one of the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range another. For example, the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 is one of a relatively high physical parameter range and a relatively low physical parameter range; and the second physical parameter candidate range RD1E3 is the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range. Another one of the parameter ranges.

例如,該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL是一相對高物理參數範圍和一相對低物理參數範圍的其中之一;且該第一特定物理參數範圍RD1E4是該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍的其中另一。例如,該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET是一相對高物理參數範圍和一相對低物理參數範圍的其中之一;且該第二特定物理參數範圍RD1E5是該相對高物理參數範圍和該相對低物理參數範圍 的其中另一。 For example, the physical parameter application range RD1EL is one of a relatively high physical parameter range and a relatively low physical parameter range; and the first specific physical parameter range RD1E4 is the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range another of the . For example, the physical parameter target range RD1ET is one of a relatively high physical parameter range and a relatively low physical parameter range; and the second specific physical parameter range RD1E5 is the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range another of the .

該操作單元297被配置以依靠該觸發事件EQ11而執行與該可變物理參數QU1A相關的該觸發應用功能FC11。該控制目標裝置330是複數應用裝置的其中之一。該觸發應用功能FC11是複數特定實際功能的其中之一,該複數特定實際功能包含一光應用功能、一力應用功能、一電應用功能、一磁應用功能和其任意組合。該複數應用裝置包含一繼電器、一控制開關裝置、一電動機、一照明裝置、一門、一販賣機、一能量轉換器、一負載裝置、一定時裝置、一玩具、一電器、一列印裝置、一顯示裝置、一移動裝置、一揚聲器和其任意組合。 The operating unit 297 is configured to execute the triggering application function FC11 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A by virtue of the triggering event EQ11. The control target device 330 is one of the plurality of application devices. The trigger application function FC11 is one of a plurality of specific actual functions, and the plurality of specific actual functions include a light application function, a force application function, an electric application function, a magnetic application function and any combination thereof. The multiple application devices include a relay, a control switch device, a motor, a lighting device, a door, a vending machine, an energy converter, a load device, a timing device, a toy, an electrical appliance, a printing device, a Display device, a mobile device, a speaker and any combination thereof.

該功能目標335是複數應用目標的其中之一,並被配置以執行一特定應用功能。該特定應用功能是複數物理參數應用功能的其中之一,該複數物理參數應用功能包含一光使用功能、一力使用功能、一電使用功能、一磁使用功能和其任意組合。該複數應用目標包含一電子組件、一致動器、一電阻器、一電容器、一電感器、一繼電器、一控制開關、一電晶體、一電動機、一照明單元、一能量轉換單元、一負載單元、一定時單元、一列印單元、一顯示目標、一揚聲器和其任意組合。 The function object 335 is one of a plurality of application objects and is configured to execute a specific application function. The specific application function is one of the complex physical parameter application functions, and the complex physical parameter application function includes a light use function, a force use function, an electricity use function, a magnetic use function and any combination thereof. The multiple application objects include an electronic component, an actuator, a resistor, a capacitor, an inductor, a relay, a control switch, a transistor, a motor, a lighting unit, an energy conversion unit, and a load unit , a timing unit, a printing unit, a display object, a loudspeaker and any combination thereof.

在一些實施例中,在該控制目標裝置330是一繼電器的條件下,該功能目標335是一控制開關。在該功能目標335是該控制開關的條件下,該控制開關具有一可變開關狀態,並基於該可變物理參數QU1A而處於一接通狀態和一關斷狀態的其中之一。例如,該可變開關狀 態等於該接通狀態和該關斷狀態的其中之一,且該接通狀態和該關斷狀態是互補的。該接通狀態是該第一功能狀態和該第二功能狀態的其中之一,且該關斷狀態是該第一功能狀態和該第二功能狀態的其中另一。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the control target device 330 is a relay, the functional target 335 is a control switch. Under the condition that the functional object 335 is the control switch, the control switch has a variable switch state, and is in one of an on state and an off state based on the variable physical parameter QU1A. For example, the variable switch like The state is equal to one of the on state and the off state, and the on state and the off state are complementary. The on state is one of the first functional state and the second functional state, and the off state is the other of the first functional state and the second functional state.

在該處理單元230藉由做出該第一邏輯決定PB11而確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下,該處理單元230辨識該可變目前狀態為該第一參考狀態,並藉此導致該輸出單元240產生用於改變該可變目前狀態的該第一控制訊號SC11。該控制目標裝置330響應該第一控制訊號SC11來導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL以進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET,因此該可變目前狀態被改變成該第二參考狀態。 Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the physical parameter application range RD1EL by making the first logical decision PB11, the processing unit 230 recognizes that the variable current state is the first Reference state, thereby causing the output unit 240 to generate the first control signal SC11 for changing the variable current state. The control target device 330 responds to the first control signal SC11 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter application range RD1EL to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET, so that the variable current state is changed to the second reference state .

在該處理單元230確定該第二碼差異DX11的條件下,該處理單元230導致該輸出單元240產生該控制訊號SC15。該功能目標335響應該控制訊號SC15來導致該可變物理參數QU1A從該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET進入包含於該對應物理參數範圍RY1ET中的該第二特定物理參數範圍RD1E5。在該第二特定物理參數範圍RD1E5相同於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下,該可變目前狀態被改變成該第一參考狀態。 Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the second code difference DX11, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to generate the control signal SC15. The functional object 335 responds to the control signal SC15 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to move from the physical parameter target range RD1ET into the second specific physical parameter range RD1E5 included in the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET. Under the condition that the second specific physical parameter range RD1E5 is the same as the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the variable current state is changed to the first reference state.

在一些實施例中,該可變物理參數QU1A是該第一可變電流。該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET分別是一第一電流參考範圍和一第二電流參考範圍。該控制碼CC1L基於在該第一電流參考範圍 之內的一第一指定電流而被預設。該控制碼CC1T基於在該第二電流參考範圍之內的一第二指定電流而被預設。 In some embodiments, the variable physical parameter QU1A is the first variable current. The physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter target range RD1ET are respectively a first current reference range and a second current reference range. The control code CC1L is based on the first current reference range in the A first specified current within is preset. The control code CC1T is preset based on a second specified current within the second current reference range.

該時間長度值CL1T基於該時間長度表示GC1KJ、該定時器規格FW11和該資料編碼操作ZX1KJ來以該指定計數值格式HQ21而被預設。在該邏輯決定PE11是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230基於所獲得的該時間長度值CL1T來導致該定時器539執行該計數操作BC1T。在該第一可變電流由於觸發事件EQ11而被配置以於該第二電流參考範圍之內的條件下,該處理單元230基於該計數操作BC1T來經歷該應用時間長度LT1T以到達該特定時間TJ1T,藉此該第一可變電流在相關於該計數操作BC1T的該應用時間長度LT1T之內維持成為於該第二電流參考範圍之內。 The time length value CL1T is preset in the specified count value format HQ21 based on the time length representation GC1KJ, the timer specification FW11 and the data encoding operation ZX1KJ. On the condition that the logical decision PE11 is positive, the processing unit 230 causes the timer 539 to perform the counting operation BC1T based on the obtained time length value CL1T. Under the condition that the first variable current is configured to be within the second current reference range due to the trigger event EQ11, the processing unit 230 experiences the application time length LT1T based on the counting operation BC1T to reach the specific time TJ1T , whereby the first variable current remains within the second current reference range within the application time length LT1T associated with the counting operation BC1T.

例如,在該可變物理參數QU1A是一可變轉速的條件下,該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET分別是一第一轉速參考範圍和一第二轉速參考範圍。在該可變物理參數QU1A是一可變溫度的條件下,該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET分別是一第一溫度參考範圍和一第二溫度參考範圍。 For example, under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is a variable rotational speed, the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter target range RD1ET are respectively a first rotational speed reference range and a second rotational speed reference range. Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is a variable temperature, the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter target range RD1ET are respectively a first temperature reference range and a second temperature reference range.

請參閱第22圖和第23圖。第22圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8031的示意圖。第23圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8032的示意圖。如第22圖和第23圖所示,該實施結構8031和該實施結構8032的每一結構包含該控制裝置 210、該控制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制裝置210鏈接於該伺服器280。該控制裝置210用於依靠該觸發事件EQ11而控制存在於該控制目標裝置330中的該可變物理參數QU1A,並包含該感測單元334、該操作單元297和該儲存單元250。該操作單元297包含該處理單元230、該輸入單元270、該輸出單元240和該定時器539。該處理單元230耦合於該伺服器280、該感測單元334、該儲存單元250、該輸入單元270、該輸出單元240和該定時器539。該輸出單元240耦合於該控制目標裝置330。 See Figures 22 and 23. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8031 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8032 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in Figure 22 and Figure 23, each structure of the implementation structure 8031 and the implementation structure 8032 includes the control device 210 . The control target device 330 and the server 280 . The control device 210 is linked to the server 280 . The control device 210 is used for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 depending on the trigger event EQ11 , and includes the sensing unit 334 , the operating unit 297 and the storage unit 250 . The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230 , the input unit 270 , the output unit 240 and the timer 539 . The processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280 , the sensing unit 334 , the storage unit 250 , the input unit 270 , the output unit 240 and the timer 539 . The output unit 240 is coupled to the control target device 330 .

在一些實施例中,該處理單元230用於導致該輸出單元240在該第一操作時間TD11之內產生該第一控制訊號SC11。例如,在該處理單元230獲得該第一測量值VN11的條件下,該處理單元230執行用於檢查該第一測量值VN11和該測量值應用範圍RN1L之間的該第一數學關係KV11的該檢查操作BV11。在該處理單元230基於該檢查操作BV11而確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下,該處理單元230做出用於到達該第一操作時間TD11的該第一觸發訊號WX11是否要被額外產生的該合理決定PW11。該第一控制訊號SC11用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL以進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。 In some embodiments, the processing unit 230 is used to cause the output unit 240 to generate the first control signal SC11 within the first operation time TD11. For example, under the condition that the processing unit 230 obtains the first measurement value VN11, the processing unit 230 executes the method for checking the first mathematical relationship KV11 between the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L. Check operation BV11. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RD1EL that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in based on the checking operation BV11, the processing unit 230 makes the first operation time TD11 for reaching the first operation time TD11. It is reasonable to determine whether the trigger signal WX11 is additionally generated PW11. The first control signal SC11 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter application range RD1EL and enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

用於做出該合理決定PW11的該預設物理參數範圍RD1EF包含於該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…中,並由包含於該複數不同測量值參考範圍RN11、RN12、…中的一預設測量值範圍RN1F所代表。 該預設測量值範圍RN1F具有一預設範圍界限值對DN1F,並由包含於該複數不同測量值參考範圍碼EM11、EM12、…中的一預設測量值範圍碼EM1F所代表。 The preset physical parameter range RD1EF for making the rational decision PW11 is contained in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, ..., and is contained in the plurality of different measured value reference ranges RN11, RN12, ... A preset measurement value range RN1F is represented. The preset measured value range RN1F has a preset range limit value pair DN1F, and is represented by a preset measured value range code EM1F contained in the plurality of different measured value reference range codes EM11, EM12, . . . .

該觸發應用功能規格GCL1包含用於表示該預設物理參數範圍RD1EF的一物理參數候選範圍表示GC1F。該預設測量值範圍RN1F基於該物理參數候選範圍表示GC1F、該感測器測量範圍表示GW1R、該感測器靈敏度表示GW11和用於轉換該物理參數候選範圍表示GC1F的一資料編碼操作ZX1F來用該指定測量值格式HH11而被預設。該儲存單元250儲存一操作參考資料XU21。例如,該操作參考資料XU21包含該預設範圍界限值對DN1F和該預設測量值範圍碼EM1F,並基於該觸發應用功能規格GCL1而被預設。 The triggered application function specification GCL1 includes a physical parameter candidate range representation GC1F for representing the preset physical parameter range RD1EF. The preset measurement value range RN1F is based on the physical parameter candidate range representation GC1F, the sensor measurement range representation GW1R, the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 and a data encoding operation ZX1F for converting the physical parameter candidate range representation GC1F. Preset with the specified measurement value format HH11. The storage unit 250 stores an operation reference data XU21. For example, the operation reference XU21 includes the preset range limit value pair DN1F and the preset measurement value range code EM1F, and is preset based on the trigger application function specification GCL1.

例如,在該功能目標335等於一開關的條件下,該物理參數參考範圍RD1EF被配置以特徵化與該開關相關的一接通狀態。在該控制目標裝置330等於一繼電器的條件下,該物理參數參考範圍RD1EF被配置以特徵化與該繼電器相關的一接通狀態。在該控制目標裝置330等於一電動機的條件下,該物理參數參考範圍RD1EF被配置以特徵化與該電動機相關的一運轉狀態。例如,該物理參數參考範圍RD1EF被配置以特徵化一關斷狀態和一停止狀態的其中之一,或被配置以特徵化一關斷狀態和一接通狀態的其中之一。 For example, under the condition that the functional target 335 is equal to a switch, the physical parameter reference range RD1EF is configured to characterize an on-state associated with the switch. Under the condition that the control target device 330 is equal to a relay, the physical parameter reference range RD1EF is configured to characterize an on state related to the relay. Under the condition that the control target device 330 is equal to an electric motor, the physical parameter reference range RD1EF is configured to characterize an operating state related to the electric motor. For example, the physical parameter reference range RD1EF is configured to characterize one of an off state and a stop state, or configured to characterize one of an off state and an on state.

在一些實施例中,該第一觸發訊號WX11是一中斷請求訊號和一狀態改變控制訊號的其中之一。在 該定時器539被導致以形成一整數溢位的條件下,該定時器539提供該中斷請求訊號到該處理單元230。該定時器539用於控制該可變物理參數QU1A。該控制裝置210進一步包含耦合於該處理單元230的一狀態改變偵測器477。例如,該狀態改變偵測器477是一極限偵測器和一邊緣偵測器的其中之一。在該狀態改變偵測器477偵測到與一預設特徵物理參數UL21相關的一特徵物理參數到達ZL22的條件下,該狀態改變偵測器477提供該狀態改變控制訊號到該處理單元230。該狀態改變偵測器477用於控制該可變物理參數QU1A。例如,該預設特徵物理參數UL21相關於該可變物理參數QU1A。該特徵物理參數到達ZL22基於該可變物理參數QU1A而被引起。 In some embodiments, the first trigger signal WX11 is one of an interrupt request signal and a state change control signal. exist On the condition that the timer 539 is caused to cause an integer overflow, the timer 539 provides the interrupt request signal to the processing unit 230 . The timer 539 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU1A. The control device 210 further includes a state change detector 477 coupled to the processing unit 230 . For example, the state change detector 477 is one of a limit detector and an edge detector. Under the condition that the state change detector 477 detects that a characteristic physical parameter related to a predetermined characteristic physical parameter UL21 reaches ZL22 , the state change detector 477 provides the state change control signal to the processing unit 230 . The state change detector 477 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU1A. For example, the preset characteristic physical parameter UL21 is related to the variable physical parameter QU1A. The characteristic physical parameter arrival ZL22 is caused based on the variable physical parameter QU1A.

在該處理單元230確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下,該處理單元230基於該操作參考資料XU21來執行用於檢查所確定的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該預設物理參數範圍RD1EF之間的該第一範圍關係KC1A的該第一檢查操作ZY11。該處理單元230基於該第一檢查操作ZY11來做出所確定的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL是否相同於該預設物理參數範圍RD1EF的該第一特定決定PD11。在該第一特定決定PD11是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230做出該合理決定PW11以成為肯定的。 Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the processing unit 230 executes the method for checking the determined physical parameter application range RD1EL and The first checking operation ZY11 of the first range relationship KC1A between the preset physical parameter ranges RD1EF. The processing unit 230 makes the first specific decision PD11 of whether the determined physical parameter application range RD1EL is the same as the preset physical parameter range RD1EF based on the first checking operation ZY11 . On condition that the first specific decision PD11 is positive, the processing unit 230 makes the rational decision PW11 to be positive.

在一些實施例中,在該處理單元230確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下,該處理單元230被配置以獲得所預設的 該控制資料碼CK1T,被配置以從被儲存在該儲存單元250中的該操作參考資料XU21獲得所儲存的該預設範圍界限值對DN1F,並藉由比較所獲得的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L和所獲得的該預設範圍界限值對DN1F來執行用於檢查所確定的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該預設物理參數範圍RD1EF之間的該第一範圍關係KC1A的該第一檢查操作ZY11。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the preset The control data code CK1T is configured to obtain the stored default range limit value pair DN1F from the operation reference data XU21 stored in the storage unit 250, and by comparing the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L and the obtained preset range limit value are paired with DN1F to perform the first check operation for checking the first range relationship KC1A between the determined application range RD1EL of the physical parameter and the preset physical parameter range RD1EF ZY11.

例如,在該處理單元230確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下,該處理單元230被配置以從被儲存在該儲存單元250中的該操作參考資料XU21獲得所儲存的該預設測量值範圍碼EM1F,並藉由比較所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L和所獲得的該預設測量值範圍碼EM1F來執行用於檢查所確定的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該預設物理參數範圍RD1EF之間的該第一範圍關係KC1A的該第一檢查操作ZY11。 For example, under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain from the operation reference data XU21 stored in the storage unit 250 The stored preset measured value range code EM1F is used to check the determined physical parameter by comparing the determined measured value applied range code EM1L with the obtained preset measured value range code EM1F The first checking operation ZY11 of the first range relation KC1A between the range RD1EL and the preset physical parameter range RD1EF.

例如,在該第一特定決定PD11是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230確定所確定的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL相同於該預設物理參數範圍RD1EF的一物理參數情況,並藉此辨識所確定的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該預設物理參數範圍RD1EF之間的該第一範圍關係KC1A為一第一範圍相等關係。 For example, under the condition that the first specific decision PD11 is affirmative, the processing unit 230 determines that the determined application range RD1EL of the physical parameter is the same as a physical parameter of the preset physical parameter range RD1EF, and thereby identifies the determined The first range relationship KC1A between the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the preset physical parameter range RD1EF is a first range equality relationship.

在一些實施例中,在該合理決定PW11是肯定的條件下,該控制裝置210和該操作單元297的其中之一響應與該可變物理參數QU1A相關的該第一指定應用操 作ZA11來產生該第一觸發訊號WX11。在該合理決定PW11是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230響應該第一觸發訊號WX11來到達相依於該第一觸發訊號WX11的該第一操作時間TD11。例如,該第一指定應用操作ZA11是與該定時器539相關的一時間控制GF11。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the reasonable decision PW11 is affirmative, one of the control device 210 and the operation unit 297 responds to the first specified application operation related to the variable physical parameter QU1A ZA11 is used to generate the first trigger signal WX11. Under the condition that the rational decision PW11 is positive, the processing unit 230 responds to the first trigger signal WX11 to reach the first operation time TD11 dependent on the first trigger signal WX11 . For example, the first designated application operation ZA11 is a time control GF11 related to the timer 539 .

例如,該功能目標335進一步包含耦合於該物理參數形成區AU11的一物理參數應用區AZ11。該物理參數應用區AZ11具有一可變物理參數QG2A。該第一指定應用操作ZA11是基於該可變物理參數QU1A而被該功能目標335執行的一物理參數應用操作ZF11。該物理參數應用操作ZF11用於導致該可變物理參數QG2A到達該預設特徵物理參數UL21以形成該特徵物理參數到達ZL22。該狀態改變偵測器477耦合於該物理參數應用區AZ11,並用於偵測該特徵物理參數到達ZL22。該狀態改變偵測器477響應該特徵物理參數到達ZL22來產生該第一觸發訊號WX11。例如,該物理參數應用區AZ11是一負載區、一顯示區、一感測區、一功率供應區和一環境區的其中之一。 For example, the functional object 335 further includes a physical parameter application area AZ11 coupled to the physical parameter formation area AU11. The physical parameter application zone AZ11 has a variable physical parameter QG2A. The first designated application operation ZA11 is a physical parameter application operation ZF11 executed by the functional object 335 based on the variable physical parameter QU1A. The physical parameter application operation ZF11 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QG2A to reach the preset characteristic physical parameter UL21 to form the characteristic physical parameter to reach ZL22. The state change detector 477 is coupled to the physical parameter application zone AZ11 and used for detecting that the characteristic physical parameter reaches ZL22. The state change detector 477 generates the first trigger signal WX11 in response to the characteristic physical parameter reaching ZL22. For example, the physical parameter application zone AZ11 is one of a load zone, a display zone, a sensing zone, a power supply zone and an environment zone.

該可變物理參數QU1A進一步相關於一可變時間長度LF2A。例如,該定時器539用於測量該可變時間長度LF2A。該可變時間長度LF2A基於一參考時間長度LX11而被特徵化。該儲存單元250儲存相關於該可變時間長度LF2A的一時間長度值CX11。該時間長度值CX11基於該參考時間長度LX11和該定時器規格FW11來以一指定計數值格式HQ23而被預設。在該合理決定PW11是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230從該儲存單元250獲得該時間長 度值CX11,並基於所獲得的該時間長度值CX11來執行該時間控制GF11以控制該定時器539。該定時器539響應該時間控制GF11來執行一計數操作BC21。例如,該指定計數值格式HQ23基於一指定位元數目UX23而被特徵化。 The variable physical parameter QU1A is further related to a variable time length LF2A. For example, the timer 539 is used to measure the variable time length LF2A. The variable time length LF2A is characterized based on a reference time length LX11. The storage unit 250 stores a time length value CX11 related to the variable time length LF2A. The time length value CX11 is preset in a specified count value format HQ23 based on the reference time length LX11 and the timer specification FW11 . Under the condition that the rational decision PW11 is affirmative, the processing unit 230 obtains the time length from the storage unit 250 and execute the time control GF11 to control the timer 539 based on the obtained time length value CX11. The timer 539 performs a count operation BC21 in response to the time control GF11. For example, the specified count value format HQ23 is characterized based on a specified bit number UX23.

例如,該觸發應用功能規格GCL1包含一時間長度表示GC1KX,該時間長度表示GC1KX用於表示該參考時間長度LX11。該時間長度值CX11基於該時間長度表示GC1KX、該定時器規格FW11和用於轉換該時間長度表示GC1KX的一資料編碼操作ZX1KX來以該指定計數值格式HQ23而被預設。例如,該指定計數值格式HQ23相同於該指定計數值格式HQ21,藉此該指定位元數目UX23相同於該指定位元數目UX21。 For example, the trigger application function specification GCL1 includes a time length representation GC1KX, and the time length representation GC1KX is used to represent the reference time length LX11. The duration value CX11 is preset in the specified count value format HQ23 based on the duration representation GC1KX, the timer specification FW11 and a data encoding operation ZX1KX for converting the duration representation GC1KX. For example, the specified count value format HQ23 is the same as the specified count value format HQ21, whereby the specified bit number UX23 is the same as the specified bit number UX21.

在該合理決定PW11是肯定的條件下,該定時器539藉由執行該計數操作BC21來經歷具有一結束時間TZ21的一應用時間長度LT21,藉由形成與該計數操作BC21相關的該整數溢位來到達該結束時間TZ21,並響應該整數溢位來產生該第一觸發訊號WX11。該處理單元230響應該第一觸發訊號WX11來到達相依於該時間控制GF11的該第一操作時間TD11,藉此該第一操作時間TD11相鄰於該結束時間TZ21。 On the condition that the reasonable decision PW11 is positive, the timer 539 experiences an applied time length LT21 with an end time TZ21 by performing the counting operation BC21, by forming the integer overflow associated with the counting operation BC21 The end time TZ21 is reached, and the first trigger signal WX11 is generated in response to the integer overflow. The processing unit 230 responds to the first trigger signal WX11 to reach the first operation time TD11 dependent on the time control GF11, whereby the first operation time TD11 is adjacent to the end time TZ21.

在一些實施例中,該狀態改變偵測器477耦合於該物理參數應用區AZ11。在該合理決定PW11是肯定的條件下,該狀態改變偵測器477響應該物理參數應用操作用ZB11來偵測該特徵物理參數到達ZL22以產生該第一觸發訊號WX11。例如,該功能目標335受該操作單元 397控制以在該物理參數應用區AZ11中形成該物理參數應用操作ZF11。在該合理決定PW11是否定的條件下,該處理單元230直接地到達獨立於該第一觸發訊號WX11的該第一操作時間TD11,藉此該第一操作時間TD11相鄰於做出該合理決定PW11的一有效時間。 In some embodiments, the state change detector 477 is coupled to the physical parameter application zone AZ11. Under the condition that the reasonable decision PW11 is affirmative, the state change detector 477 responds to the physical parameter application operation using ZB11 to detect that the characteristic physical parameter reaches ZL22 to generate the first trigger signal WX11. For example, the functional object 335 is controlled by the operating unit 397 Control to form the physical parameter application operation ZF11 in the physical parameter application zone AZ11. On the condition that the plausible decision PW11 is negative, the processing unit 230 directly reaches the first operating time TD11 independent of the first trigger signal WX11, whereby the first operating time TD11 is adjacent to making the plausible decision An effective time for PW11.

該處理單元230在該第一操作時間TD11之內基於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該第二記憶體位置PX1L的該控制資料碼CK1T,並基於所存取的該控制資料碼CK1T來執行用於該觸發應用功能FC11的該訊號產生控制GS11以控制該輸出單元240。例如,該訊號產生控制GS11提供所獲得的該控制碼CC1T到該輸出單元240。該輸出單元240響應該訊號產生控制GS11來從該處理單元230獲得該控制碼CC1T,並基於所獲得的該控制碼CC1T來執行用於該觸發應用功能FC11的該第一訊號產生操作BS11以在該第一操作時間TD11之內產生該第一控制訊號SC11。例如,該第一控制訊號SC11輸送所獲得的該控制碼CC1T。 The processing unit 230 uses the memory unit 25Y1 to access the control data code CK1T stored in the second memory location PX1L based on the determined measurement value application range code EM1L within the first operating time TD11 , and execute the signal generation control GS11 for the trigger application function FC11 to control the output unit 240 based on the accessed control data code CK1T. For example, the signal generation control GS11 provides the obtained control code CC1T to the output unit 240 . The output unit 240 responds to the signal generation control GS11 to obtain the control code CC1T from the processing unit 230, and based on the obtained control code CC1T, executes the first signal generation operation BS11 for the trigger application function FC11 to The first control signal SC11 is generated within the first operation time TD11. For example, the first control signal SC11 conveys the obtained control code CC1T.

在一些實施例中,在該處理單元230基於該資料比較CD21而確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2的條件下,該處理單元230基於該操作參考資料XU21來執行用於檢查所確定的該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2和該預設物理參數範圍RD1EF之間的該第二範圍關係KC2A的該第二檢查操作ZY21。該處理單元230基於該第二檢查操作ZY21來做出用於到達該第二操作時間TD21的該第二觸發訊號WX21是否要被額外 產生的該第二特定決定PW21。例如,與該第一控制訊號SC11不同的該第二控制訊號SC12要於該第二操作時間TD21之內被產生。該第二觸發訊號WX21是一中斷請求訊號和一狀態改變控制訊號的其中之一。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in based on the data comparison CD21, the processing unit 230 determines based on the operation reference data XU21 The second checking operation ZY21 for checking the second range relationship KC2A between the determined first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 and the preset physical parameter range RD1EF is performed. The processing unit 230 determines whether the second trigger signal WX21 for reaching the second operation time TD21 should be additionally activated based on the second checking operation ZY21 This second specific decision PW21 is generated. For example, the second control signal SC12 different from the first control signal SC11 is to be generated within the second operation time TD21. The second trigger signal WX21 is one of an interrupt request signal and a state change control signal.

在該第二特定決定PW21是否定的條件下,該處理單元230直接地到達獨立於該第二觸發訊號WX21的該第二操作時間TD21。在該第二特定決定PW21是肯定的條件下,該控制裝置210和該操作單元297的其中之一響應與該可變物理參數QU1A相關的該第二指定應用操作ZA21來產生該第二觸發訊號WX21。在該第二特定決定PW21是肯定的條件下,該處理單元230響應該第二觸發訊號WX21來到達相依於該第二觸發訊號WX21的該第二操作時間TD21。 On the condition that the second specific decision PW21 is negative, the processing unit 230 directly reaches the second operating time TD21 independent of the second trigger signal WX21. On the condition that the second specific decision PW21 is affirmative, one of the control device 210 and the operating unit 297 generates the second trigger signal in response to the second designated application operation ZA21 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A WX21. Under the condition that the second specific decision PW21 is positive, the processing unit 230 responds to the second trigger signal WX21 to reach the second operation time TD21 dependent on the second trigger signal WX21 .

在一些實施例中,該處理單元230在該第二操作時間TD21之內基於所確定的該測量值候選範圍碼EM12來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該第二記憶體位置PX12的該控制資料碼CK12,並基於所存取的該控制資料碼CK12來執行用於該觸發應用功能FC11的一訊號產生控制GS21以控制該輸出單元240。例如,該訊號產生控制GS21提供包含於所存取的該控制資料碼CK12中的該控制碼CC13到該輸出單元240。 In some embodiments, the processing unit 230 uses the memory unit 25Y1 to access the memory location PX12 based on the determined measurement value candidate range code EM12 within the second operation time TD21 and execute a signal generation control GS21 for the trigger application function FC11 to control the output unit 240 based on the accessed control data code CK12. For example, the signal generation control GS21 provides the control code CC13 included in the accessed control data code CK12 to the output unit 240 .

該輸出單元240響應該訊號產生控制GS21來從該處理單元230獲得該控制碼CC13,並基於所獲得的該控制碼CC1T來執行用於該觸發應用功能FC11的該訊號產生操作BS21以在該第二操作時間TD21之內產生該第二 控制訊號SC12。例如,該第二控制訊號SC12輸送所獲得的該控制碼CC13。該第二控制訊號SC12用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2以進入包含於該複數不同物理參數參考範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…中的該第二物理參數候選範圍RD1E3。 The output unit 240 responds to the signal generation control GS21 to obtain the control code CC13 from the processing unit 230, and executes the signal generation operation BS21 for the trigger application function FC11 based on the obtained control code CC1T to perform the signal generation operation BS21 on the second The second operating time TD21 is generated within the second Control signal SC12. For example, the second control signal SC12 conveys the obtained control code CC13. The second control signal SC12 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 to enter the second physical parameter candidate range RD1E3 included in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . .

請參閱第24圖、第25圖、第26圖和第27圖。第24圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8033的示意圖。第25圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8034的示意圖。第26圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8035的示意圖。第27圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8036的示意圖。如第24圖、第25圖、第26圖和第27圖所示,該實施結構8032、該實施結構8033、該實施結構8034和該實施結構8035的每一結構包含該控制裝置210、該控制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制裝置210鏈接於該伺服器280。該控制裝置210用於依靠該觸發事件EQ11而控制存在於該控制目標裝置330中的該可變物理參數QU1A,並包含該感測單元334、該操作單元297和該儲存單元250。該操作單元297包含該處理單元230、該輸入單元270、該輸出單元240和一定時器542。該處理單元230耦合於該伺服器280、該感測單元334、該儲存單元250、該輸入單元270、該輸出單元240和該定時器542。該輸出單元240耦合於該控制目標裝置330。 See Figures 24, 25, 26 and 27. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8033 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8034 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8035 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8036 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in Figure 24, Figure 25, Figure 26 and Figure 27, each structure of the implementation structure 8032, the implementation structure 8033, the implementation structure 8034 and the implementation structure 8035 includes the control device 210, the control The target device 330 and the server 280 . The control device 210 is linked to the server 280 . The control device 210 is used for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 depending on the trigger event EQ11 , and includes the sensing unit 334 , the operating unit 297 and the storage unit 250 . The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230 , the input unit 270 , the output unit 240 and a timer 542 . The processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280 , the sensing unit 334 , the storage unit 250 , the input unit 270 , the output unit 240 and the timer 542 . The output unit 240 is coupled to the control target device 330 .

在一些實施例中,該定時器542受該處理單元230控制,並用於測量一時鐘時間TH1A。該定時器542 被配置以符合一定時器規格FW21。該可變物理參數QU1A相關於該時鐘時間TH1A。該時鐘時間TH1A基於複數不同時間參考區間HP1E1、HP1E2、…而被特徵化。該複數不同時間參考區間HP1E1、HP1E2、…分別由複數時間值參考範圍GP11、GP12、…所代表,並基於一預設時間參考區間順序QB11而被排列。該複數時間值參考範圍GP11、GP12、…基於該預設時間參考區間順序QB11而被排列。 In some embodiments, the timer 542 is controlled by the processing unit 230 and used to measure a clock time TH1A. The timer 542 are configured to comply with a timer specification FW21. The variable physical parameter QU1A is related to the clock time TH1A. The clock time TH1A is characterized based on a plurality of different time reference intervals HP1E1 , HP1E2 , . . . . The plurality of different time reference intervals HP1E1 , HP1E2 , . . . are represented by plural time value reference ranges GP11 , GP12 , . The complex time value reference ranges GP11, GP12, . . . are arranged based on the preset time reference interval sequence QB11.

該複數時間值參考範圍GP11、GP12、…皆基於該定時器規格FW21來用一指定計數值格式HQ25而被預設,並分別由複數時間值參考範圍碼EF11、EF12、…所代表。該儲存單元250進一步具有複數不同記憶體位置PS11、PS12、…,並在該複數不同記憶體位置PS11、PS12、…分別儲存複數物理參數指定範圍碼UD11、UD12、…。該複數不同時間參考區間HP1E1、HP1E2、…分別由複數時間參考區間碼所代表。例如,該複數時間參考區間碼被配置以分別等於該複數時間值參考範圍碼EF11、EF12、…。因此,該複數時間值參考範圍碼EF11、EF12、…被配置以分別指示該複數不同時間參考區間HP1E1、HP1E2、…。例如,該指定計數值格式HQ25基於一指定位元數目UX25而被特徵化。 The complex time value reference ranges GP11, GP12, . The storage unit 250 further has a plurality of different memory locations PS11, PS12, . The plural different time reference intervals HP1E1, HP1E2, . . . are respectively represented by plural time reference interval codes. For example, the complex time reference interval codes are configured to be equal to the complex time value reference range codes EF11, EF12, . . . respectively. Therefore, the complex time value reference range codes EF11 , EF12 , . . . are configured to respectively indicate the plurality of different time reference intervals HP1E1 , HP1E2 , . . . For example, the specified count value format HQ25 is characterized based on a specified bit number UX25.

該複數時間值參考範圍碼EF11、EF12、…包含一時間值目標範圍碼EF1T和一時間值候選範圍碼EF12。該複數不同時間參考區間HP1E1、HP1E2、…包含一時間目標區間HP1ET和一時間候選區間HP1E2。該時間值目標範圍碼EF1T和該時間值候選範圍碼EF12被配置以分 別指示該時間目標區間HP1ET和該時間候選區間HP1E2。該複數時間值參考範圍GP11、GP12、…包含一時間值目標範圍GP1T和一時間值候選範圍GP12。該時間目標區間HP1ET和該時間候選區間HP1E2分別由該時間值目標範圍GP1T和該時間值候選範圍GP12所代表。 The complex time value reference range codes EF11, EF12, . . . include a time value target range code EF1T and a time value candidate range code EF12. The plurality of different time reference intervals HP1E1, HP1E2, . . . include a time target interval HP1ET and a time candidate interval HP1E2. The time value target range code EF1T and the time value candidate range code EF12 are configured to respectively indicate the time target interval HP1ET and the time candidate interval HP1E2. The complex time value reference ranges GP11, GP12, . . . include a time value target range GP1T and a time value candidate range GP12. The time target interval HP1ET and the time candidate interval HP1E2 are respectively represented by the time value target range GP1T and the time value candidate range GP12 .

在一些實施例中,該複數不同記憶體位置PS11、PS12、…分別基於該複數時間值參考範圍碼EF11、EF12、…而被識別。例如,該複數不同記憶體位置PS11、PS12、…分別基於複數記憶體位址FS11、FS12、…而被識別,或分別由該複數記憶體位址FS11、FS12、…所識別。該複數記憶體位址FS11、FS12、…分別基於該複數時間值參考範圍碼EF11、EF12、…而被預設。例如,該時鐘時間TH1A進一步基於一額定時間區間HP1E而被特徵化。該額定時間區間HP1E包含該複數不同時間參考區間HP1E1、HP1E2、…,並由一額定時間值範圍HP1N所代表。該額定時間值範圍HP1N包含該複數時間值參考範圍GP11、GP12、…,並基於該額定時間區間HP1E和該定時器規格FW21來用該指定計數值格式HQ25而被預設。 In some embodiments, the plurality of different memory locations PS11, PS12, . . . are identified based on the plurality of time value reference range codes EF11, EF12, . . . respectively. For example, the plurality of different memory locations PS11, PS12, . . . are identified based on or identified by the plurality of memory addresses FS11, FS12, . The complex memory addresses FS11, FS12, . . . are preset based on the complex time value reference range codes EF11, EF12, . . . respectively. For example, the clock time TH1A is further characterized based on a nominal time interval HP1E. The nominal time interval HP1E includes the plurality of different time reference intervals HP1E1 , HP1E2 , . . . and is represented by a nominal time value range HP1N. The nominal time value range HP1N includes the complex time value reference ranges GP11 , GP12 , .

例如,該觸發應用功能規格GCL1包含一額定時間區間表示GC1HE和一時間參考區間表示GC1HP。該額定時間區間表示GC1HE用於表示該額定時間區間HP1E。該時間參考區間表示GC1HP用於表示該複數不同時間參考區間HP1E1、HP1E2、…。該額定時間值範圍HP1N基於該額定時間區間表示GC1HE、該定時器規格FW21和用於轉換該額定時間區間表示GC1HE的一資料編碼操作 ZX1HE來用該指定計數值格式HQ25而被預設。該複數時間值參考範圍GP11、GP12、…基於該時間參考區間表示GC1HP、該定時器規格FW21和用於轉換該時間參考區間表示GC1HP的一資料編碼操作ZX1HP來用該指定計數值格式HQ25而被預設。 For example, the trigger application function specification GCL1 includes a rated time interval indicating GClHE and a time reference interval indicating GClHP. The nominal time interval designation GC1HE is used to represent the nominal time interval HP1E. The time reference interval representation GClHP is used to represent the plurality of different time reference intervals HP1E1, HP1E2, . . . The nominal time value range HP1N is based on the nominal time interval representation GC1HE, the timer specification FW21 and a data encoding operation for converting the nominal time interval representation GC1HE ZX1HE is preset with the specified count value format HQ25. The complex time value reference ranges GP11, GP12, . default.

該複數物理參數指定範圍碼UD11、UD12、…被配置以分別基於該複數時間值參考範圍碼EF11、EF12、…而被儲存,並包含一物理參數目標範圍碼UD1T和一物理參數候選範圍碼UD12。該複數物理參數指定範圍碼UD11、UD12、…皆選擇自該複數不同測量值範圍碼EM11、EM12、…。該物理參數目標範圍碼UD1T代表該可變物理參數QU1A被期望在該時間目標區間HP1ET內處於的一物理參數目標範圍GD1ET,並被配置以基於該時間值目標範圍碼EF1T而被儲存在一記憶體位置PS1T。該記憶體位置PS1T基於一記憶體位址FS1T而被識別。該複數時間值參考範圍碼EL11、EL12、…皆基於該觸發應用功能規格GCL1而被預設。 The complex physical parameter designated range codes UD11, UD12, ... are configured to be stored based on the complex time value reference range codes EF11, EF12, ... respectively, and include a physical parameter target range code UD1T and a physical parameter candidate range code UD12 . The complex physical parameter specified range codes UD11, UD12, . . . are selected from the plurality of different measured value range codes EM11, EM12, . The physical parameter target range code UD1T represents a physical parameter target range GD1ET where the variable physical parameter QU1A is expected to be within the time target interval HP1ET, and is configured to be stored in a memory based on the time value target range code EF1T body position PS1T. The memory location PS1T is identified based on a memory address FS1T. The complex time value reference range codes EL11, EL12, . . . are all preset based on the trigger application function specification GCL1.

該物理參數候選範圍碼UD12代表該可變物理參數QU1A被期望在該時間候選區間HP1E2內處於的一物理參數候選範圍GD1E2,並被配置以基於該時間值候選範圍碼EF12而被儲存在一記憶體位置PS12。該記憶體位置PS12基於一記憶體位址FS12而被識別。該物理參數目標範圍GD1ET和該物理參數候選範圍GD1E2皆選擇自該複數不同物理參數範圍RD1E1、RD1E2、…。例如,該時間候選區間HP1E2相鄰於該時間目標區間HP1ET。 The physical parameter candidate range code UD12 represents a physical parameter candidate range GD1E2 that the variable physical parameter QU1A is expected to be within the time candidate interval HP1E2, and is configured to be stored in a memory based on the time value candidate range code EF12 body position PS12. The memory location PS12 is identified based on a memory address FS12. Both the physical parameter target range GD1ET and the physical parameter candidate range GD1E2 are selected from the plurality of different physical parameter ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, . . . For example, the time candidate interval HP1E2 is adjacent to the time target interval HP1ET.

例如,在該物理參數目標範圍碼UD1T等於所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的條件下,該物理參數目標範圍GD1ET相同於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。在該物理參數目標範圍碼UD12等於所預設的該測量值候選範圍碼EM12的條件下,該物理參數候選範圍GD1E2相同於該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2。例如,該時間目標區間HP1ET和該時間候選區間HP1E2之間具有一預設時間間隔。 For example, under the condition that the physical parameter target range code UD1T is equal to the preset measured value target range code EM1T, the physical parameter target range GD1ET is the same as the physical parameter target range RD1ET. Under the condition that the physical parameter target range code UD12 is equal to the preset measured value candidate range code EM12 , the physical parameter candidate range GD1E2 is the same as the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 . For example, there is a preset time interval between the time target interval HP1ET and the time candidate interval HP1E2.

在一些實施例中,該時間值目標範圍GP1T具有一目標範圍界限值對DP1T。該目標範圍界限值對DP1T包含該時間值目標範圍GP1T的一目標範圍界限值DP17和相對於該目標範圍界限值DP17的一目標範圍界限值DP18。該時間值目標範圍GP1T和該目標範圍界限值對DP1T皆基於該時間目標區間HP1ET和該定時器規格FW21來用該指定計數值格式HQ25而被預設。該時間值候選範圍GP12具有一候選範圍界限值對DP1B。該候選範圍界限值對DP1B包含該時間值候選範圍GP12的一候選範圍界限值DP13和相對於該候選範圍界限值DP13的一候選範圍界限值DP14。該時間值候選範圍GP12和該候選範圍界限值對DP1B皆基於該時間候選區間HP1E2和該定時器規格FW21來用該指定計數值格式HQ25而被預設。 In some embodiments, the time value target range GP1T has a target range limit value pair DP1T. The target range limit pair DP1T includes a target range limit DP17 of the time value target range GP1T and a target range limit DP18 corresponding to the target range limit DP17. Both the time target range GP1T and the target range limit pair DP1T are preset with the specified count value format HQ25 based on the time target range HP1ET and the timer specification FW21 . The time value candidate range GP12 has a candidate range limit value pair DP1B. The candidate range limit value pair DP1B includes a candidate range limit value DP13 of the time value candidate range GP12 and a candidate range limit value DP14 corresponding to the candidate range limit value DP13. Both the time value candidate range GP12 and the candidate range limit value pair DP1B are preset based on the time candidate range HP1E2 and the timer specification FW21 using the specified count value format HQ25 .

例如,該觸發應用功能規格GCL1包含一時間候選區間表示GC1HT和一時間候選區間表示GC1H2。該時間候選區間表示GC1HT用於表示該時間目標區間HP1ET。該時間候選區間表示GC1H2用於表示該時間候選 區間HP1E2。該時間值目標範圍GP1T和該目標範圍界限值對DP1T皆基於該時間候選區間表示GC1HT、該定時器規格FW21和用於轉換該時間候選區間表示GC1HT的一資料編碼操作ZX1HT來用該指定計數值格式HQ25而被預設。該時間值候選範圍GP12和該候選範圍界限值對DP1B皆基於該時間候選區間表示GC1H2、該定時器規格FW21和用於轉換該時間候選區間表示GC1H2的一資料編碼操作ZX1H2來用該指定計數值格式HQ25而被預設。 For example, the triggering application function specification GCL1 includes a time candidate interval representation GClHT and a time candidate interval representation GClH2. The time candidate interval representation GC1HT is used to represent the time target interval HP1ET. The time candidate interval indicates that GC1H2 is used to represent the time candidate Interval HP1E2. The time value target range GP1T and the target range limit value pair DP1T are based on the time candidate interval representation GC1HT, the timer specification FW21 and a data encoding operation ZX1HT for converting the time candidate interval representation GC1HT to use the specified count value The format HQ25 is preset. The time value candidate range GP12 and the candidate range limit value pair DP1B are based on the time candidate range representation GC1H2, the timer specification FW21 and a data encoding operation ZX1H2 for converting the time candidate range representation GC1H2 to use the specified count value The format HQ25 is preset.

例如,當該觸發事件EQ11發生時,該物理參數目標範圍碼UD1T等於所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T。該儲存單元250儲存該目標範圍界限值對DP1T和該候選範圍界限值對DP1B。該目標範圍界限值對DP1T和該候選範圍界限值對DP1B分別基於該時間值目標範圍碼EF1T和該時間值候選範圍碼EF12而被預設。該目標範圍界限值對DP1T和該候選範圍界限值對DP1B分別基於該時間值目標範圍碼EF1T和該時間值候選範圍碼EF12而被儲存在該儲存單元250中。 For example, when the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the physical parameter target range code UD1T is equal to the preset measured value target range code EM1T. The storage unit 250 stores the target range limit pair DP1T and the candidate range limit pair DP1B. The target range limit pair DP1T and the candidate range limit pair DP1B are preset based on the time value target range code EF1T and the time value candidate range code EF12 respectively. The target range limit pair DP1T and the candidate range limit pair DP1B are stored in the storage unit 250 based on the time value target range code EF1T and the time value candidate range code EF12 respectively.

在一些實施例中,該定時器542感測該時鐘時間TH1A以產生輸送一特定計數值NP11的一時鐘時間訊號SK11。在該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該處理單元230響應該時鐘時間訊號SK11來以該指定計數值格式HQ25獲得該特定計數值NP11。該處理單元230被配置以獲得該時間值目標範圍碼EF1T,基於所獲得的該時間值目標範圍碼EF1T來從該儲存單元250獲得該目標範圍界限值對DP1T,並藉由比較該特定計數值NP11和所獲得的該目 標範圍界限值對DP1T來執行用於檢查該特定計數值NP11和該時間值目標範圍GP1T之間的一數學關係WP11的一檢查操作ZP11。 In some embodiments, the timer 542 senses the clock time TH1A to generate a clock time signal SK11 delivering a specific count value NP11. Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 responds to the clock time signal SK11 to obtain the specific count value NP11 in the specified count value format HQ25. The processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the time value target range code EF1T, obtain the target range limit value pair DP1T from the storage unit 250 based on the obtained time value target range code EF1T, and compare the specific count value NP11 and the obtained A checking operation ZP11 for checking a mathematical relationship WP11 between the specific count value NP11 and the time value target range GP1T is performed for the target range limit value pair DP1T.

在該處理單元230基於該檢查操作ZP11而確定該時鐘時間TH1A目前處於的該時間目標區間HP1ET的條件下,該處理單元230基於所獲得的該時間值目標範圍碼EF1T來獲得該記憶體位址FS1T,並基於所獲得的該記憶體位址FS1T來存取被儲存在該記憶體位置PS1T的該物理參數目標範圍碼UD1T以獲得該物理參數目標範圍碼UD1T。 Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines that the clock time TH1A is currently in the time target interval HP1ET based on the checking operation ZP11, the processing unit 230 obtains the memory address FS1T based on the obtained time value target range code EF1T , and access the physical parameter target range code UD1T stored in the memory location PS1T based on the obtained memory address FS1T to obtain the physical parameter target range code UD1T.

例如,該處理單元230基於該檢查操作ZP11來確定該時鐘時間TH1A目前於該時間目標區間HP1ET之內的一特定情況,並藉此辨識該時鐘時間TH1A和該時間目標區間HP1ET之間的一範圍關係為該時鐘時間TH1A目前於該時間目標區間HP1ET之內的一特定關係。例如,在該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該處理單元230從該時鐘時間訊號SK11以該指定計數值格式HQ25獲得該特定計數值NP11。 For example, the processing unit 230 determines a specific situation that the clock time TH1A is currently within the time target interval HP1ET based on the checking operation ZP11, thereby identifying a range between the clock time TH1A and the time target interval HP1ET Relationship is a specific relationship that the clock time TH1A is currently within the time target interval HP1ET. For example, under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 obtains the specific count value NP11 from the clock time signal SK11 in the specified count value format HQ25.

在一些實施例中,在該處理單元230從該記憶體位置PS1T獲得該物理參數目標範圍碼UD1T並確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下,該處理單元230藉由執行用於比較所獲得的該物理參數目標範圍碼UD1T和所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L的一資料比較CP11來做出所獲得的該物理參數目標範圍碼UD1T是否等於所確定的該測量值應用範 圍碼EM1L的一邏輯決定PP11。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the processing unit 230 obtains the physical parameter target range code UD1T from the memory location PS1T and determines the physical parameter application range RD1EL that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in, the processing unit 230 Whether the obtained physical parameter target range code UD1T is equal to the determined value is made by performing a data comparison CP11 for comparing the obtained physical parameter target range code UD1T with the determined measurement value application range code EM1L. The application range of this measurement A logic of the code EM1L determines PP11.

該記憶體單元25Y1具有一記憶體位置PJ1T,並在該記憶體位置PJ1T儲存一控制資料碼CJ1T。該記憶體位置PJ1T基於所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T而被識別。該控制資料碼CJ1T等於該控制資料碼CK1T,並包含該控制碼CC1T和該時間長度值CL1T。在該邏輯決定PP11是否定的條件下,該處理單元230基於等於所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的所獲得的該物理參數目標範圍碼UD1T來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該記憶體位置PJ1T的該控制資料碼CJ1T以獲得該控制碼CC1T,並基於所獲得的該控制碼CC1T來於該操作時間TD11之內執行用於該觸發應用功能FC11的該訊號產生控制GS11以控制該輸出單元240。 The memory unit 25Y1 has a memory location PJ1T, and stores a control data code CJ1T in the memory location PJ1T. The memory location PJ1T is identified based on the preset measurement target range code EM1T. The control data code CJ1T is equal to the control data code CK1T, and includes the control code CC1T and the time length value CL1T. Under the condition that the logic decision PP11 is negative, the processing unit 230 uses the memory unit 25Y1 to access the obtained physical parameter target range code UD1T based on the preset measurement value target range code EM1T. storing the control data code CJ1T in the memory location PJ1T to obtain the control code CC1T, and executing the signal generation control for the trigger application function FC11 within the operation time TD11 based on the obtained control code CC1T GS11 to control the output unit 240 .

該輸出單元240響應該訊號產生控制GS11來從該處理單元230獲得該控制碼CC1T,並基於所獲得的該控制碼CC1T來於該操作時間TD11之內執行用於該觸發應用功能FC11的該第一訊號產生操作BS11以產生該第一控制訊號SC11。例如,該第一控制訊號SC11輸送該控制碼CC1T,並用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL以進入相同於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的該物理參數目標範圍GD1ET。 The output unit 240 responds to the signal to generate control GS11 to obtain the control code CC1T from the processing unit 230, and based on the obtained control code CC1T to execute the second trigger application function FC11 within the operation time TD11 A signal generating operation BS11 to generate the first control signal SC11. For example, the first control signal SC11 conveys the control code CC1T and is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter application range RD1EL to enter the physical parameter target range GD1ET which is the same as the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

該處理單元230於該操作時間TD11之後的該指定時間TG12之內執行與該可變物理參數QU1A相關的該驗證操作ZU11。在該處理單元230執行該訊號產生控制GS11的條件下,該驗證操作ZU11基於所獲得的該物理參 數目標範圍碼UD1T、所存取的該控制資料碼CJ1T和所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L的其中之一來確定該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T以確定該測量值目標範圍RN1T。在該處理單元230基於該驗證操作ZU11而確定該可變物理參數QU1A進入的該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的條件下,該處理單元230使用該儲存單元250以將所確定的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T指定到該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A。 The processing unit 230 executes the verification operation ZU11 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A within the specified time TG12 after the operation time TD11 . Under the condition that the processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS11, the verification operation ZU11 is based on the obtained physical parameter One of the number target range code UD1T, the accessed control data code CJ1T and the determined measurement value application range code EM1L is used to determine the measurement value target range code EM1T to determine the measurement value target range RN1T. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter target range RD1ET into which the variable physical parameter QU1A enters based on the verification operation ZU11, the processing unit 230 uses the storage unit 250 to code the determined target range of measured values to EM1T is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.

在一些實施例中,該時間候選區間HP1E2相鄰於該時間目標區間HP1ET。在該處理單元230於該操作時間TD11之內執行該訊號產生控制GS11之後,該定時器542感測該時鐘時間TH1A以產生輸送一特定計數值NP12的一時鐘時間訊號SK12。該處理單元230於該操作時間TD11之後的一指定時間TX12之內響應該時鐘時間訊號SK12來以該指定計數值格式HQ25獲得該特定計數值NP12。在該處理單元230執行該訊號產生控制GS11的條件下,該處理單元230藉由執行使用所獲得的該時間值目標範圍碼EF1T的一科學計算MK12來獲得該時間值候選範圍碼EF12以便檢查所獲得的該特定計數值NP12和該時間值候選範圍GP12之間的一數學關係WP12。例如,該指定時間TX12在該指定時間TG12之後。 In some embodiments, the time candidate interval HP1E2 is adjacent to the time target interval HP1ET. After the processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS11 within the operation time TD11, the timer 542 senses the clock time TH1A to generate a clock time signal SK12 delivering a specific count value NP12. The processing unit 230 responds to the clock time signal SK12 within a specified time TX12 after the operation time TD11 to obtain the specific count value NP12 in the specified count value format HQ25. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS11, the processing unit 230 obtains the time value candidate range code EF12 by performing a scientific calculation MK12 using the obtained time value target range code EF1T so as to check all A mathematical relationship WP12 between the specific count value NP12 and the time value candidate range GP12 is obtained. For example, the specified time TX12 is after the specified time TG12.

該處理單元230基於所獲得的該時間值候選範圍碼EF12來從該儲存單元250獲得該候選範圍界限值對DP1B,並藉由比較該特定計數值NP12和所獲得的該候選範圍界限值對DP1B來執行用於檢查該特定計數值NP12和該時間值候選範圍GP12之間的該數學關係WP12的一檢 查操作ZP12。例如,該處理單元230於該指定時間TX12之內從該時鐘時間訊號SK12以該指定計數值格式HQ25獲得該特定計數值NP12。 The processing unit 230 obtains the candidate range limit value pair DP1B from the storage unit 250 based on the obtained time value candidate range code EF12, and compares the specific count value NP12 with the obtained candidate range limit value pair DP1B To perform a check for checking the mathematical relationship WP12 between the specific count value NP12 and the time value candidate range GP12 Check operation ZP12. For example, the processing unit 230 obtains the specific count value NP12 from the clock time signal SK12 in the specified count value format HQ25 within the specified time TX12.

在該處理單元230於該指定時間TX12之內基於該檢查操作ZP12而確定該時鐘時間TH1A處於的該時間候選區間HP1E2的條件下,該處理單元230基於所獲得的該時間值候選範圍碼EF12來獲得該記憶體位址FS12,並於該指定時間TX12之內基於所獲得的該記憶體位址FS12來存取被儲存在該記憶體位置PS12的該物理參數候選範圍碼UD12以獲得該物理參數候選範圍碼UD12。 Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines that the clock time TH1A is in the time candidate interval HP1E2 based on the checking operation ZP12 within the specified time TX12, the processing unit 230 determines based on the obtained time value candidate range code EF12 Obtain the memory address FS12, and access the physical parameter candidate range code UD12 stored in the memory position PS12 based on the obtained memory address FS12 within the specified time TX12 to obtain the physical parameter candidate range Code UD12.

在一些實施例中,在該處理單元230從該記憶體位置PS12獲得該物理參數候選範圍碼UD12且該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的條件下,該處理單元230於該指定時間TX12之內藉由執行用於比較所獲得的該物理參數候選範圍碼UD12和等於該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A的一資料比較CP12來做出所獲得的該物理參數目標範圍碼UD1T是否等於該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A的一邏輯決定PP12。在該邏輯決定PP12是否定的條件下,該處理單元230通過該輸出單元240來導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET以進入相同於該第一物理參數候選範圍RD1E2的該物理參數候選範圍GD1E2,並使用該儲存單元250以導致該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A改變。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the processing unit 230 obtains the physical parameter candidate range code UD12 from the memory location PS12 and the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the physical parameter target range RD1ET, the processing unit 230 in the The obtained value is made by performing a data comparison CP12 for comparing the obtained physical parameter candidate range code UD12 and the variable physical parameter range code UN1A equal to the measured value target range code EM1T within the specified time TX12. A logical decision PP12 is whether the physical parameter target range code UD1T is equal to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A. Under the condition that the logical decision PP12 is negative, the processing unit 230 causes the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET through the output unit 240 to enter the physical parameter range RD1E2 same as the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2. parameter candidate range GD1E2, and use the storage unit 250 to cause the variable physical parameter range code UN1A to change.

在一些實施例中,該複數物理參數指定範圍碼UD11、UD12、…屬於一物理參數指定範圍碼類型TS11。 該物理參數指定範圍碼類型TS11由一物理參數指定範圍碼類型識別符HS11所識別。該物理參數指定範圍碼類型識別符HS11被預設。該記憶體位址FS1T基於所預設的該物理參數指定範圍碼類型識別符HS11和所預設的該時間值目標範圍碼EF1T而被預設。該記憶體位址FS12基於所預設的該物理參數指定範圍碼類型識別符HS11和所預設的該時間值候選範圍碼EF12而被預設。 In some embodiments, the complex physical parameter specified range codes UD11, UD12, . . . belong to a physical parameter specified range code type TS11. The physical parameter specified range code type TS11 is identified by a physical parameter specified range code type identifier HS11. The physical parameter specifies that the range code type identifier HS11 is preset. The memory address FS1T is preset based on the preset physical parameter specifying range code type identifier HS11 and the preset time value target range code EF1T. The memory address FS12 is preset based on the preset physical parameter specified range code type identifier HS11 and the preset time value candidate range code EF12 .

在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230被配置以取得該物理參數目標範圍碼UD1T、所預設的該物理參數指定範圍碼類型識別符HS11和所預設的該時間值目標範圍碼EF1T,並基於所取得的該物理參數指定範圍碼類型識別符HS11和所取得的該時間值目標範圍碼EF1T來取得該記憶體位址FS1T。在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230基於所取得的該物理參數目標範圍碼UD1T和所取得的該記憶體位址FS1T來提供一寫入請求訊息WS1T到該儲存單元250。該寫入請求訊息WS1T輸送所取得的該物理參數目標範圍碼UD1T和所取得的該記憶體位址FS1T。該儲存單元250接收該寫入請求訊息WS1T,並響應該寫入請求訊息WS1T來在該記憶體位置PS1T儲存所接收的該物理參數目標範圍碼UD1T。 Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the physical parameter target range code UD1T, the preset physical parameter specified range code type identifier HS11 and the preset time value target range code EF1T , and obtain the memory address FS1T based on the obtained physical parameter specified range code type identifier HS11 and the obtained time value target range code EF1T. Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 provides a write request message WS1T to the storage unit 250 based on the obtained physical parameter target range code UD1T and the obtained memory address FS1T. The write request message WS1T conveys the obtained physical parameter target range code UD1T and the obtained memory address FS1T. The storage unit 250 receives the write request message WS1T, and stores the received physical parameter target range code UD1T in the memory location PS1T in response to the write request message WS1T.

在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230被配置以預先取得該物理參數候選範圍碼UD12和所預設的該時間值候選範圍碼EF12,並基於所取得的該物理參數指定範圍碼類型識別符HS11和所取得的該時間值候選範圍碼EF12來取得該記憶體位址FS12。在該觸發事件EQ11 發生之前,該處理單元230基於所取得的該物理參數候選範圍碼UD12和所取得的該記憶體位址FS12來提供一寫入請求訊息WS12到該儲存單元250。該寫入請求訊息WS12輸送所取得的該物理參數候選範圍碼UD12和所取得的該記憶體位址FS12。該儲存單元250接收該寫入請求訊息WS12,並響應該寫入請求訊息WS12來在該記憶體位置PS12儲存所接收的該物理參數候選範圍碼UD12。 Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the physical parameter candidate range code UD12 and the preset time value candidate range code EF12 in advance, and specify the range code type identification based on the obtained physical parameter The symbol HS11 and the obtained time value candidate range code EF12 are used to obtain the memory address FS12. In the trigger event EQ11 Before it happens, the processing unit 230 provides a write request message WS12 to the storage unit 250 based on the acquired physical parameter candidate range code UD12 and the acquired memory address FS12. The write request message WS12 conveys the acquired physical parameter candidate range code UD12 and the acquired memory address FS12. The storage unit 250 receives the write request message WS12, and stores the received physical parameter candidate range code UD12 in the memory location PS12 in response to the write request message WS12.

請參閱第28圖,其為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8037的示意圖。如第28圖所示,該實施結構8037包含該控制裝置210、該控制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制裝置210鏈接於該伺服器280。該控制裝置210用於依靠該觸發事件EQ11而控制存在於該控制目標裝置330中的該可變物理參數QU1A,並包含該感測單元334、該操作單元297和該儲存單元250。該控制目標裝置330包含該操作單元397和該功能目標335。該操作單元397包含一處理單元331、耦合於該處理單元331的一輸入單元337、和耦合於該處理單元331的一輸出單元338。該輸入單元337和該輸出單元338皆受該處理單元331控制。該輸出單元338耦合於該功能目標335。 Please refer to FIG. 28 , which is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8037 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in FIG. 28 , the implementation structure 8037 includes the control device 210 , the control target device 330 and the server 280 . The control device 210 is linked to the server 280 . The control device 210 is used for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 depending on the trigger event EQ11 , and includes the sensing unit 334 , the operating unit 297 and the storage unit 250 . The control object device 330 includes the operation unit 397 and the function object 335 . The operation unit 397 includes a processing unit 331 , an input unit 337 coupled to the processing unit 331 , and an output unit 338 coupled to the processing unit 331 . Both the input unit 337 and the output unit 338 are controlled by the processing unit 331 . The output unit 338 is coupled to the functional object 335 .

在一些實施例中,該輸入單元337有線地或無線地從該控制裝置210接收該第一控制訊號SC11,並包含一輸入組件3371、一輸入組件3372和一輸入組件3374。該輸入組件3371、該輸入組件3372和該輸入組件3374皆耦合於該處理單元331。該第一控制訊號SC11是該電訊號SP11和該光訊號SQ11的其中之一。該輸入組件3371是一 接收器,並在該第一控制訊號SC11是該電訊號SP11的條件下從該控制裝置210接收該電訊號SP11。該輸入組件3372是一讀取器,並在該第一控制訊號SC11是該光訊號SQ11的條件下從該控制裝置210接收輸送該編碼影像FY11的該光訊號SQ11。例如,該編碼影像FY11是一條碼影像。在該第一控制訊號SC11是該光訊號SQ11的條件下,該輸入組件3372感測該編碼影像FY11以產生一編碼資料DY11,並解碼該編碼資料DY11以提供該控制碼CC1T到該處理單元331。 In some embodiments, the input unit 337 receives the first control signal SC11 from the control device 210 via wire or wirelessly, and includes an input component 3371 , an input component 3372 and an input component 3374 . The input component 3371 , the input component 3372 and the input component 3374 are all coupled to the processing unit 331 . The first control signal SC11 is one of the electrical signal SP11 and the optical signal SQ11. The input component 3371 is a The receiver receives the electrical signal SP11 from the control device 210 under the condition that the first control signal SC11 is the electrical signal SP11. The input component 3372 is a reader, and receives the light signal SQ11 conveying the coded image FY11 from the control device 210 under the condition that the first control signal SC11 is the light signal SQ11. For example, the encoded image FY11 is a barcode image. Under the condition that the first control signal SC11 is the optical signal SQ11, the input component 3372 senses the coded image FY11 to generate a coded data DY11, and decodes the coded data DY11 to provide the control code CC1T to the processing unit 331 .

該功能目標335具有該可變物理參數QU1A。該輸入組件3371、該輸入組件3372和該輸入組件3374皆耦合於該處理單元331。在該可變物理參數QU1A要依靠該控制裝置210而被提供的條件下,該輸入組件3374從該控制裝置210接收該物理參數訊號SB11。該功能目標335從該輸入組件3374接收該物理參數訊號SB11。該處理單元331通過該輸出單元338來導致該功能目標335使用該物理參數訊號SB11以形成取決於該物理參數訊號SB11的該可變物理參數QU1A。例如,該輸入組件3374是一接收組件。包含於該控制裝置210中的該輸出組件455有線地或無線地傳輸該物理參數訊號SB11到該輸入組件3374。 The functional object 335 has the variable physical parameter QU1A. The input component 3371 , the input component 3372 and the input component 3374 are all coupled to the processing unit 331 . Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is provided depending on the control device 210 , the input component 3374 receives the physical parameter signal SB11 from the control device 210 . The functional object 335 receives the physical parameter signal SB11 from the input component 3374 . The processing unit 331 causes the functional object 335 to use the physical parameter signal SB11 to form the variable physical parameter QU1A depending on the physical parameter signal SB11 through the output unit 338 . For example, the input component 3374 is a receiving component. The output component 455 included in the control device 210 transmits the physical parameter signal SB11 to the input component 3374 by wire or wirelessly.

在一些實施例中,該控制裝置210執行一讀取操作BR11和一感測操作BZ11的其中之一以輸出該物理參數訊號SB11。該處理單元230執行該讀取操作BR11以讀取被儲存於該儲存單元250和該伺服器280的其中之一中的一物理參數資料記錄DU11。該控制裝置210包含耦合 於該處理單元230的一感測單元560。該感測單元560藉由執行該感測操作BZ11來感測一可變物理參數QL1A以導致該輸出組件455輸出該物理參數訊號SB11。例如,該控制裝置210通過在該輸出單元240和該輸入單元337之間的該實際鏈接而向該控制目標裝置330傳輸該第一控制訊號SC11。該實際鏈接是一有線鏈接和一無線鏈接的其中之一。例如,該感測單元560耦合於該操作單元297,並受該處理單元230控制以感測該可變物理參數QL1A。 In some embodiments, the control device 210 performs one of a reading operation BR11 and a sensing operation BZ11 to output the physical parameter signal SB11. The processing unit 230 executes the read operation BR11 to read a physical parameter data record DU11 stored in one of the storage unit 250 and the server 280 . The control unit 210 includes a coupled A sensing unit 560 in the processing unit 230 . The sensing unit 560 senses a variable physical parameter QL1A by performing the sensing operation BZ11 to cause the output component 455 to output the physical parameter signal SB11 . For example, the control device 210 transmits the first control signal SC11 to the control target device 330 through the actual link between the output unit 240 and the input unit 337 . The actual link is one of a wired link and a wireless link. For example, the sensing unit 560 is coupled to the operating unit 297 and controlled by the processing unit 230 to sense the variable physical parameter QL1A.

例如,該可變物理參數QU1A屬於該物理參數類型TU11。該可變物理參數QL1A屬於一物理參數類型TL11。該物理參數類型TU11相同或不同於該物理參數類型TL11。該控制裝置210處於該應用環境EX11中。該控制裝置210和該應用環境EX11的其中之一具有該可變物理參數QL1A。該物理參數資料記錄DU11預先基於一可變物理參數QY1A而被提供。該可變物理參數QY1A屬於該物理參數類型TL11。例如,該物理參數類型TU11不同於一時間類型。 For example, the variable physical parameter QU1A belongs to the physical parameter type TU11. The variable physical parameter QL1A belongs to a physical parameter type TL11. The physical parameter type TU11 is the same as or different from the physical parameter type TL11. The control device 210 is in the application environment EX11. One of the control device 210 and the application environment EX11 has the variable physical parameter QL1A. The physical parameter data record DU11 is provided in advance based on a variable physical parameter QY1A. The variable physical parameter QY1A belongs to the physical parameter type TL11. For example, the physical parameter type TU11 is different from a time type.

在一些實施例中,該處理單元331響應該第一控制訊號SC11來從該第一控制訊號SC11獲得該控制碼CC1T,並基於所獲得的該控制碼CC1T來執行用於該物理參數控制功能FA11的一訊號產生控制GY11以控制該輸出單元338。該輸出單元338響應該訊號產生控制GY11來產生該功能訊號SG11。例如,該功能訊號SG11是一控制訊號、一脈衝寬度調變訊號、一電位準訊號和一驅動訊號的其中之一。 In some embodiments, the processing unit 331 obtains the control code CC1T from the first control signal SC11 in response to the first control signal SC11, and executes the physical parameter control function FA11 based on the obtained control code CC1T. A signal of is generated to control GY11 to control the output unit 338 . The output unit 338 generates the function signal SG11 in response to the signal generation control GY11. For example, the function signal SG11 is one of a control signal, a pulse width modulation signal, a potential signal and a driving signal.

該功能目標335包含一驅動電路3355、和耦合於該驅動電路3355的一物理參數形成部分3351。該物理參數形成部分3351用於形成該可變物理參數QU1A,並包含該物理參數形成區AU11。該驅動電路3355耦合於該輸入組件3374和該輸出單元338,並通過該輸出單元338而受該處理單元331控制。該驅動電路3355從該輸入組件3374接收該物理參數訊號SB11,從該輸出單元338接收該功能訊號SG11,並響應該功能訊號SG11來處理該物理參數訊號SB11以輸出一驅動訊號SL11。例如,該功能目標335進一步包含一支撐部分335K。該驅動電路3355、該物理參數形成部分3351和該感測單元334皆耦合於該支撐部分335K。 The functional object 335 includes a driving circuit 3355 and a physical parameter forming part 3351 coupled to the driving circuit 3355 . The physical parameter forming section 3351 is used to form the variable physical parameter QU1A, and includes the physical parameter forming area AU11. The driving circuit 3355 is coupled to the input component 3374 and the output unit 338 , and is controlled by the processing unit 331 through the output unit 338 . The driving circuit 3355 receives the physical parameter signal SB11 from the input component 3374 , receives the functional signal SG11 from the output unit 338 , and processes the physical parameter signal SB11 in response to the functional signal SG11 to output a driving signal SL11 . For example, the functional object 335 further includes a support portion 335K. The driving circuit 3355, the physical parameter forming part 3351 and the sensing unit 334 are all coupled to the supporting part 335K.

該物理參數形成部分3351接收該驅動訊號SL11,並響應該驅動訊號SL11來使該可變物理參數QU1A於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內。例如,在該輸入單元337從該控制裝置210接收該第一控制訊號SC11的條件下,該處理單元331響應所接收的該第一控制訊號SC11來執行該訊號產生控制GY11以控制該輸出單元338。該輸出單元338響應該訊號產生控制GY11來執行用於該物理參數控制功能FA11的一訊號產生操作BY11以提供該功能訊號SG11到該驅動電路3355。該驅動電路3355響應該功能訊號SG11來驅動該物理參數形成部分3351以使該可變物理參數QU1A進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。 The physical parameter forming part 3351 receives the driving signal SL11 and responds to the driving signal SL11 to make the variable physical parameter QU1A within the physical parameter target range RD1ET. For example, under the condition that the input unit 337 receives the first control signal SC11 from the control device 210, the processing unit 331 executes the signal generation control GY11 in response to the received first control signal SC11 to control the output unit 338 . The output unit 338 responds to the signal generation control GY11 to execute a signal generation operation BY11 for the physical parameter control function FA11 to provide the function signal SG11 to the driving circuit 3355 . The driving circuit 3355 drives the physical parameter forming part 3351 in response to the function signal SG11 so that the variable physical parameter QU1A enters the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

該可變物理參數QL1A是一第二可變電性參數、一第二可變力學參數、一第二可變光學參數、一第 二可變溫度、一第二可變電壓、一第二可變電流、一第二可變電功率、一第二可變電阻、一第二可變電容、一第二可變電感、一第二可變頻率、一第二時鐘時間、一第二可變時間長度、一第二可變亮度、一第二可變光強度、一第二可變音量、一第二可變資料流量、一第二可變振幅、一第二可變空間位置、一第二可變位移、一第二可變順序位置、一第二可變角度、一第二可變空間長度、一第二可變距離、一第二可變平移速度、一第二可變角速度、一第二可變加速度、一第二可變力、一第二可變壓力和一第二可變機械功率的其中之一。 The variable physical parameter QL1A is a second variable electrical parameter, a second variable mechanical parameter, a second variable optical parameter, a first Two variable temperature, one second variable voltage, one second variable current, one second variable electric power, one second variable resistance, one second variable capacitance, one second variable inductance, one A second variable frequency, a second clock time, a second variable time length, a second variable brightness, a second variable light intensity, a second variable volume, a second variable data flow, A second variable amplitude, a second variable spatial position, a second variable displacement, a second variable sequence position, a second variable angle, a second variable spatial length, a second variable One of distance, a second variable translational velocity, a second variable angular velocity, a second variable acceleration, a second variable force, a second variable pressure, and a second variable mechanical power.

該可變物理參數QY1A是一第三可變電性參數、一第三可變力學參數、一第三可變光學參數、一第三可變溫度、一第三可變電壓、一第三可變電流、一第三可變電功率、一第三可變電阻、一第三可變電容、一第三可變電感、一第三可變頻率、一第三時鐘時間、一第三可變時間長度、一第三可變亮度、一第三可變光強度、一第三可變音量、一第三可變資料流量、一第三可變振幅、一第三可變空間位置、一第三可變位移、一第三可變順序位置、一第三可變角度、一第三可變空間長度、一第三可變距離、一第三可變平移速度、一第三可變角速度、一第三可變加速度、一第三可變力、一第三可變壓力和一第三可變機械功率的其中之一。 The variable physical parameter QY1A is a third variable electrical parameter, a third variable mechanical parameter, a third variable optical parameter, a third variable temperature, a third variable voltage, a third variable Variable current, a third variable electric power, a third variable resistance, a third variable capacitance, a third variable inductance, a third variable frequency, a third clock time, a third variable Variable time length, a third variable brightness, a third variable light intensity, a third variable volume, a third variable data flow rate, a third variable amplitude, a third variable spatial position, a A third variable displacement, a third variable sequence position, a third variable angle, a third variable space length, a third variable distance, a third variable translation speed, a third variable angular velocity , a third variable acceleration, a third variable force, a third variable pressure and a third variable mechanical power.

請參閱第29圖。第29圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8038的示意圖。如第29圖所示,該實施結構8038包含該控制裝置210、該控制目 標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制裝置210鏈接於該伺服器280。該控制裝置210用於依靠該觸發事件EQ11而控制存在於該控制目標裝置330中的該可變物理參數QU1A,並包含該感測單元334、該操作單元297和該儲存單元250。該操作單元297包含該處理單元230、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該處理單元230耦合於該伺服器280、該感測單元334、該儲存單元250、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該輸出單元240耦合於該控制目標裝置330。 See Figure 29. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8038 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in Figure 29, the implementation structure 8038 includes the control device 210, the control object Target device 330 and the server 280. The control device 210 is linked to the server 280 . The control device 210 is used for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 depending on the trigger event EQ11 , and includes the sensing unit 334 , the operating unit 297 and the storage unit 250 . The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280 , the sensing unit 334 , the storage unit 250 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The output unit 240 is coupled to the control target device 330 .

在一些實施例中,該記憶體單元25Y1具有該第一記憶體位置PN1L和不同於該第一記憶體位置PN1L的一記憶體位置PJ1L,在該第一記憶體位置PN1L儲存該應用範圍界限值對DN1L,並在該記憶體位置PJ1L儲存一控制資料碼CJ1L。該記憶體單元25Y1進一步具有一記憶體位置PN1T和不同於該記憶體位置PN1T的該記憶體位置PJ1T,在該記憶體位置PN1T儲存該目標範圍界限值對DN1T,並在該記憶體位置PJ1T儲存該控制資料碼CJ1T。該第一記憶體位置PN1L和該記憶體位置PJ1L皆基於所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L而被識別。該記憶體位置PN1T和該記憶體位置PJ1T皆基於所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T而被識別。 In some embodiments, the memory unit 25Y1 has the first memory location PN1L and a memory location PJ1L different from the first memory location PN1L, the application range limit value is stored in the first memory location PN1L For DN1L, store a control data code CJ1L in the memory location PJ1L. The memory unit 25Y1 further has a memory location PN1T and a memory location PJ1T different from the memory location PN1T, the target range limit value pair DN1T is stored in the memory location PN1T, and the memory location PJ1T is stored The control data code is CJ1T. Both the first memory location PN1L and the memory location PJ1L are identified based on the preset measurement value application range code EM1L. Both the memory location PN1T and the memory location PJ1T are identified based on the preset measurement value target range code EM1T.

該控制資料碼CJ1L包含該控制碼CC1L和一時間長度值CL1L。該時間長度值CL1L基於一參考時間長度LJ1L和該定時器規格FW11來以該指定計數值格式HQ21而被預設。該控制資料碼CJ1T包含該控制碼CC1T和該時間長度值CL1T。該控制資料碼CJ1L和該控制資料 碼CJ1T皆屬於一控制資料碼類型TK21。該控制資料碼類型TK21由一控制資料碼類型識別符HK21所識別。例如,該控制資料碼類型識別符HK21被預設。該記憶體位置PJ1L基於一記憶體位址FJ1L而被識別,或由該記憶體位址FJ1L所識別。該記憶體位置PJ1T基於一記憶體位址FJ1T而被識別,或由該記憶體位址FJ1T所識別。該記憶體位址FJ1L基於所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L和所預設的該控制資料碼類型識別符HK21而被預設。該記憶體位址FJ1T基於所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T和所預設的該控制資料碼類型識別符HK21而被預設。 The control data code CJ1L includes the control code CC1L and a time length value CL1L. The time length value CL1L is preset in the specified count value format HQ21 based on a reference time length LJ1L and the timer specification FW11. The control data code CJ1T includes the control code CC1T and the time length value CL1T. The control data code CJ1L and the control data The codes CJ1T all belong to a control data code type TK21. The control data code type TK21 is identified by a control data code type identifier HK21. For example, the control data code type identifier HK21 is preset. The memory location PJ1L is identified based on or identified by a memory address FJ1L. The memory location PJ1T is identified based on or identified by a memory address FJ1T. The memory address FJ1L is preset based on the preset measurement value application range code EM1L and the preset control data code type identifier HK21. The memory address FJ1T is preset based on the preset measurement value target range code EM1T and the preset control data code type identifier HK21.

例如,該觸發應用功能規格GCL1包含一時間長度表示GC1KL,該時間長度表示GC1KL用於表示該參考時間長度LJ1L。該時間長度值CL1L基於該時間長度表示GC1KL、該定時器規格FW11和用於轉換該時間長度表示GC1KL的一資料編碼操作ZX1KL來以該指定計數值格式HQ21而被預設。例如,該觸發應用功能規格GCL1包含該感測器規格FU11、該定時器規格FW11和該定時器規格FW21。 For example, the trigger application function specification GCL1 includes a time length representation GClKL, and the time length representation GClKL is used to represent the reference time length LJ1L. The duration value CL1L is preset in the specified count value format HQ21 based on the duration representation GC1KL, the timer specification FW11 and a data encoding operation ZX1KL for converting the duration representation GC1KL. For example, the trigger application function specification GCL1 includes the sensor specification FU11 , the timer specification FW11 and the timer specification FW21 .

在一些實施例中,該控制資料碼CJ1L基於該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL和該觸發應用功能規格GCL1的其中之一而被預設。該控制資料碼CJ1T基於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET和該觸發應用功能規格GCL1的其中之一而被預設。該處理單元230被配置以獲得該控制資料碼類型識別符HK21。在該處理單元230確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下, 該處理單元230執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L的一科學計算MN11來獲得所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T,並基於所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T和所獲得的該控制資料碼類型識別符HK21來獲得該記憶體位址FJ1T。 In some embodiments, the control data code CJ1L is preset based on one of the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the trigger application function specification GCL1. The control data code CJ1T is preset based on one of the physical parameter target range RD1ET and the trigger application function specification GCL1. The processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the control data code type identifier HK21. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the physical parameter application range RD1EL, The processing unit 230 executes a scientific calculation MN11 using the determined measurement value application range code EM1L to obtain the preset measurement value target range code EM1T, and based on the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T and the obtained The control data code type identifier HK21 is used to obtain the memory address FJ1T.

該處理單元230基於所獲得的該記憶體位址FJ1T來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該記憶體位置PJ1T的該控制資料碼CJ1T,並基於所存取的該控制資料碼CJ1T來執行用於該觸發應用功能FC11的該訊號產生控制GS11以控制該輸出單元240。例如,該訊號產生控制GS11提供所存取的該控制資料碼CJ1T中的該控制碼CC1T到該輸出單元240。該輸出單元240響應該訊號產生控制GS11來從該處理單元230獲得該控制碼CC1T,並基於所獲得的該控制碼CC1T來產生該第一控制訊號SC11。例如,該控制資料碼CJ1T相同於該控制資料碼CK1T。 The processing unit 230 uses the memory unit 25Y1 to access the control data code CJ1T stored in the memory location PJ1T based on the obtained memory address FJ1T, and based on the accessed control data code CJ1T Execute the signal generation control GS11 for the trigger application function FC11 to control the output unit 240 . For example, the signal generation control GS11 provides the control code CC1T in the accessed control data code CJ1T to the output unit 240 . The output unit 240 generates the control GS11 in response to the signal to obtain the control code CC1T from the processing unit 230, and generates the first control signal SC11 based on the obtained control code CC1T. For example, the control data code CJ1T is the same as the control data code CK1T.

該目標範圍界限值對DN1T屬於該測量範圍界限資料碼類型TN11。該記憶體位置PN1T基於一記憶體位址FN1T而被識別,或由該記憶體位址FN1T所識別。該記憶體位址FN1T基於所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T和所預設的該測量範圍界限資料碼類型識別符HN11而被預設。該驗證操作ZU11基於所獲得的該測量範圍界限資料碼類型識別符HN11和所確定的或所獲得的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T來獲得該記憶體位址FN1T,並基於所獲得的該記憶體位址FN1T來存取被儲存在該記憶體位置PN1T的該目標範圍界限值對DN1T以獲得該目標範圍界限 值對DN1T。 The target range limit value pair DN1T belongs to the measurement range limit data code type TN11. The memory location PN1T is identified based on or identified by a memory address FN1T. The memory address FN1T is preset based on the preset measurement value target range code EM1T and the preset measurement range limit data type identifier HN11. The verification operation ZU11 obtains the memory address FN1T based on the obtained measurement range limit data type identifier HN11 and the determined or obtained measurement value target range code EM1T, and based on the obtained memory address FN1T to access the target range limit value pair DN1T stored in the memory location PN1T to obtain the target range limit Value pair DN1T.

在一些實施例中,在該可變物理參數QU1A由於該觸發事件EQ11而被配置以於該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的條件下,該處理單元230基於該計數操作BC1T來經歷具有該結束時間TZ1T的該應用時間長度LT1T以到達該特定時間TJ1T。該處理單元230於該特定時間TJ1T之內執行使用該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的一科學計算MN12來獲得所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L,並基於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L和所獲得的該控制資料碼類型識別符HK21來獲得該記憶體位址FJ1L。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET due to the trigger event EQ11, the processing unit 230 experiences a time with the end time based on the counting operation BC1T The application time length of TZ1T is LT1T to reach the specific time TJ1T. The processing unit 230 executes a scientific calculation MN12 using the measured value target range code EM1T within the specific time TJ1T to obtain the preset measured value application range code EM1L, and based on the determined measured value application range code EM1L and the obtained control data code type identifier HK21 to obtain the memory address FJ1L.

該處理單元230基於所獲得的該記憶體位址FJ1L來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該記憶體位置PJ1L的該控制資料碼CJ1L。在該控制碼CC22相同該控制碼CC1L的條件下,該處理單元230基於所存取的該控制資料碼CJ1L來執行用於該觸發應用功能FC11的該訊號產生控制GS22以控制該輸出單元240。例如,該訊號產生控制GS22提供所存取的該控制資料碼CJ1L中的該控制碼CC1L到該輸出單元240。 The processing unit 230 uses the memory unit 25Y1 to access the control data code CJ1L stored in the memory location PJ1L based on the obtained memory address FJ1L. Under the condition that the control code CC22 is the same as the control code CC1L, the processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS22 for the trigger application function FC11 to control the output unit 240 based on the accessed control data code CJ1L. For example, the signal generation control GS22 provides the control code CC1L in the accessed control data code CJ1L to the output unit 240 .

在該控制碼CC22相同該控制碼CC1L的條件下,該輸出單元240響應該訊號產生控制GS21來從該處理單元230獲得相同該控制碼CC1L的該控制碼CC22,並基於所獲得的該控制碼CC22來產生該第三控制訊號SC22。例如,該控制資料碼CJ1L相同於該控制資料碼CK12。在該控制碼CC22相同該控制碼CC1L的條件下,該第三控制訊號SC22用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該 物理參數目標範圍RD1ET以進入該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL。 Under the condition that the control code CC22 is the same as the control code CC1L, the output unit 240 responds to the signal to generate a control GS21 to obtain the control code CC22 that is the same as the control code CC1L from the processing unit 230, and based on the obtained control code CC22 to generate the third control signal SC22. For example, the control data code CJ1L is the same as the control data code CK12. Under the condition that the control code CC22 is the same as the control code CC1L, the third control signal SC22 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the The physical parameter target range RD1ET is used to enter the physical parameter application range RD1EL.

請參閱第30圖。第30圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8039的示意圖。如第30圖所示,該實施結構8039包含該控制裝置210、該控制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制裝置210鏈接於該伺服器280。該控制裝置210用於依靠該觸發事件EQ11而控制存在於該控制目標裝置330中的該可變物理參數QU1A,並包含該感測單元334、該操作單元297和該儲存單元250。該操作單元297包含該處理單元230、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該處理單元230耦合於該伺服器280、該感測單元334、該儲存單元250、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該輸出單元240耦合於該控制目標裝置330。 See Figure 30. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8039 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in FIG. 30 , the implementation structure 8039 includes the control device 210 , the control target device 330 and the server 280 . The control device 210 is linked to the server 280 . The control device 210 is used for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 depending on the trigger event EQ11 , and includes the sensing unit 334 , the operating unit 297 and the storage unit 250 . The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280 , the sensing unit 334 , the storage unit 250 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The output unit 240 is coupled to the control target device 330 .

在一些實施例中,在是該觸發作用事件的該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元331使該功能目標335執行與該可變物理參數QU1A相關的該指定功能操作ZH11。在該可變物理參數QU1A於該特定物理參數範圍RD1E4之內的條件下,該指定功能操作ZH11導致該可變物理參數QG1A到達該預設特徵物理參數UL11以形成該特徵物理參數到達ZL12。該狀態改變偵測器475響應該特徵物理參數到達ZL12來產生該觸發訊號SX11。 In some embodiments, before the triggering event EQ11 which is the triggering action event occurs, the processing unit 331 causes the functional object 335 to execute the specified functional operation ZH11 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A. Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is within the specified physical parameter range RD1E4, the designated function operation ZH11 causes the variable physical parameter QG1A to reach the preset characteristic physical parameter UL11 to form the characteristic physical parameter to reach ZL12. The state change detector 475 generates the trigger signal SX11 in response to the characteristic physical parameter reaching ZL12.

該輸入單元270耦合於該狀態改變偵測器475,並接收該觸發訊號SX11。該處理單元230響應該觸發訊號SX11來使用該第一感測訊號SN11以獲得該第一測量值VN11。在該處理單元230藉由檢查該第一測量值VN11 和該測量值應用範圍RN1L之間的該第一數學關係KV11而確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下,該處理單元230導致該輸出單元240產生用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET的該第一控制訊號SC11。 The input unit 270 is coupled to the state change detector 475 and receives the trigger signal SX11. The processing unit 230 uses the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain the first measurement value VN11 in response to the trigger signal SX11 . In the processing unit 230 by checking the first measured value VN11 and the first mathematical relationship KV11 between the measurement value application range RN1L to determine that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently under the condition of the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to generate The first control signal SC11 indicates that the variable physical parameter QU1A enters the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

在一些實施例中,該控制目標裝置330進一步包含一支撐部分330K。該操作單元397、該功能目標335和該感測單元334皆耦合於該支撐部分330K。在該處理單元230確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下,該處理單元230基於所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該第二記憶體位置PX1L的該控制資料碼CK1T,並基於所存取的該控制資料碼CK1T來產生該第一控制訊號SC11。該控制資料碼CK1T包含該控制碼CC1T。例如,該控制碼CC1T基於該物理參數表示GC1T1和用於轉換該物理參數表示GC1T1的該第三資料編碼操作ZX21而被預設。 In some embodiments, the control target device 330 further includes a support portion 330K. The operating unit 397 , the functional object 335 and the sensing unit 334 are all coupled to the supporting part 330K. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the processing unit 230 uses the memory unit 25Y1 to access based on the determined measurement value application range code EM1L The control data code CK1T is stored in the second memory location PX1L, and the first control signal SC11 is generated based on the accessed control data code CK1T. The control data code CK1T includes the control code CC1T. For example, the control code CC1T is preset based on the physical parameter representation GC1T1 and the third data encoding operation ZX21 for converting the physical parameter representation GC1T1 .

該物理參數表示GC1T1用於表示在該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET之內的該指定物理參數QD1T。例如,該指定物理參數QD1T基於該預設特徵物理參數UL11而被指定。該觸發應用功能規格GCL1包含用於表示該預設特徵物理參數UL11的一物理參數表示GC1UL。該物理參數表示GC1T1基於該物理參數表示GC1UL而被提供。 The physical parameter representation GC1T1 is used to represent the specified physical parameter QD1T within the physical parameter target range RD1ET. For example, the specified physical parameter QD1T is specified based on the preset characteristic physical parameter UL11. The triggering application function specification GCL1 includes a physical parameter representation GCL1UL for representing the preset characteristic physical parameter UL11 . The physical parameter representation GC1T1 is provided based on the physical parameter representation GC1UL.

在一些實施例中,該操作單元297進一步包含耦合於該處理單元230和該輸出單元240的至少其中之 一的一連接終端294。該控制目標裝置330進一步包含耦合於該感測單元334和該輸入單元337的一連接終端394。該連接終端294和該連接終端394之間具有一訊號電纜247。該訊號電纜247耦合於該連接終端294和該連接終端394,並用於傳輸該第一控制訊號SC11和該第一感測訊號SN11。該訊號電纜247包含一傳輸線2471和一傳輸線2472。 In some embodiments, the operation unit 297 further includes at least one of the processing unit 230 and the output unit 240 coupled to A connection terminal 294 for one. The control target device 330 further includes a connection terminal 394 coupled to the sensing unit 334 and the input unit 337 . There is a signal cable 247 between the connection terminal 294 and the connection terminal 394 . The signal cable 247 is coupled to the connection terminal 294 and the connection terminal 394 for transmitting the first control signal SC11 and the first sensing signal SN11 . The signal cable 247 includes a transmission line 2471 and a transmission line 2472 .

例如,該傳輸線2471用於傳輸該第一控制訊號SC11、該第二控制訊號SC12、該第三控制訊號SC22和該控制訊號SC31的至少其中之一,並具有一第一端和一第二端。該第一端通過該連接終端294而耦合於該輸出單元240。該第二端通過該連接終端394而耦合於該輸入單元337。該傳輸線2472用於傳輸該第一感測訊號SN11和該第二感測訊號SN12的至少其中之一,並具有一第三端和一第四端。該第三端通過該連接終端294而耦合於該處理單元230。該第四端通過該連接終端394而耦合於該感測單元334。 For example, the transmission line 2471 is used to transmit at least one of the first control signal SC11, the second control signal SC12, the third control signal SC22 and the control signal SC31, and has a first terminal and a second terminal . The first end is coupled to the output unit 240 through the connection terminal 294 . The second end is coupled to the input unit 337 through the connection terminal 394 . The transmission line 2472 is used for transmitting at least one of the first sensing signal SN11 and the second sensing signal SN12 , and has a third end and a fourth end. The third end is coupled to the processing unit 230 through the connection terminal 294 . The fourth end is coupled to the sensing unit 334 through the connection terminal 394 .

請參閱第31圖、第32圖、第33圖和第34圖。第31圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8040的示意圖。第32圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8041的示意圖。第33圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8042的示意圖。第34圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8043的示意圖。如第31圖、第32圖、第33圖和第34圖所示,該實施結構8040、該實施結構8041、該實施結構8042和該實施結構8043的每一結構包含該控制裝置210、該控 制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制裝置210鏈接於該伺服器280。該控制裝置210用於依靠該觸發事件EQ11而控制存在於該控制目標裝置330中的該可變物理參數QU1A,並包含該感測單元334、該操作單元297和該儲存單元250。該操作單元297包含該處理單元230、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該處理單元230耦合於該伺服器280、該感測單元334、該儲存單元250、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該輸出單元240耦合於該控制目標裝置330。 See Figures 31, 32, 33 and 34. FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8040 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8041 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8042 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8043 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in Figure 31, Figure 32, Figure 33 and Figure 34, each structure of the implementation structure 8040, the implementation structure 8041, the implementation structure 8042 and the implementation structure 8043 includes the control device 210, the control Control the target device 330 and the server 280. The control device 210 is linked to the server 280 . The control device 210 is used for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 depending on the trigger event EQ11 , and includes the sensing unit 334 , the operating unit 297 and the storage unit 250 . The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280 , the sensing unit 334 , the storage unit 250 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The output unit 240 is coupled to the control target device 330 .

在一些實施例中,該控制裝置210進一步包含一電使用目標275和相關於該電使用目標275的一電使用目標276。該電使用目標275和該電使用目標276皆耦合於該處理單元230。該電使用目標275由一電使用目標識別符HZ11所識別。該電使用目標276由一電使用目標識別符HZ12所識別。該電使用目標識別符HZ11和該電使用目標識別符HZ12皆基於該觸發應用功能規格GCL1而被預設。 In some embodiments, the control device 210 further includes an electricity usage target 275 and an electricity usage target 276 related to the electricity usage target 275 . Both the electricity usage object 275 and the electricity usage object 276 are coupled to the processing unit 230 . The electricity usage object 275 is identified by an electricity usage object identifier HZ11. The electricity usage object 276 is identified by an electricity usage object identifier HZ12. Both the electricity usage target identifier HZ11 and the electricity usage target identifier HZ12 are preset based on the triggering application function specification GCL1.

該儲存單元250具有一記憶體位置PK11和不同於該記憶體位置PK11的一記憶體位置PK12。該儲存單元250在該記憶體位置PK11儲存代表一預設增量的一相對值VK11,並在該記憶體位置PK12儲存代表一預設減量的一相對值VK12。例如,該電應用目標WJ11是該電使用目標275和該電使用目標276的其中之一。該電使用目標275和該電使用目標276分別位於不同空間位置。 The storage unit 250 has a memory location PK11 and a memory location PK12 different from the memory location PK11. The storage unit 250 stores a relative value VK11 representing a preset increment in the memory location PK11, and stores a relative value VK12 representing a preset decrement in the memory location PK12. For example, the electricity usage target WJ11 is one of the electricity usage target 275 and the electricity usage target 276 . The electricity usage target 275 and the electricity usage target 276 are respectively located at different spatial positions.

該記憶體位置PK11由一記憶體位址FK11所識別,或基於該記憶體位址FK11而被識別。該記憶體位 置PK12由一記憶體位址FK12所識別,或基於該記憶體位址FK12而被識別。該記憶體位址FK11基於該電使用目標識別符HZ11而被預設;藉此,該電使用目標275相關於該相對值VK11。該記憶體位址FK12基於該電使用目標識別符HZ12而被預設;藉此,該電使用目標276相關於該相對值VK12。 The memory location PK11 is identified by or based on a memory address FK11. the memory bit Set PK12 is identified by or based on a memory address FK12. The memory address FK11 is preset based on the electricity usage object identifier HZ11; thereby, the electricity usage object 275 is related to the relative value VK11. The memory address FK12 is preset based on the electricity usage object identifier HZ12; thereby, the electricity usage object 276 is related to the relative value VK12.

例如,該電使用目標識別符HZ11和該相對值VK11之間具有一數學關係KV1W;藉此,該電使用目標275相關於該相對值VK11。該電使用目標識別符HZ12和該相對值VK12之間具有一數學關係KV2W;藉此,該電使用目標276相關於該相對值VK12。該電使用目標275用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A具有一第一物理量改變以改變該可變物理參數QU1A的該可變目前狀態。該電使用目標276用於導致該可變物理參數QU1A具有與該第一物理量改變相反的一第二物理量改變以改變該可變物理參數QU1A的該可變目前狀態。 For example, there is a mathematical relationship KV1W between the electricity usage target identifier HZ11 and the relative value VK11 ; thus, the electricity usage target 275 is related to the relative value VK11 . There is a mathematical relationship KV2W between the electricity usage target identifier HZ12 and the relative value VK12 ; thus, the electricity usage target 276 is related to the relative value VK12 . The electricity usage target 275 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to have a first physical quantity change to change the variable current state of the variable physical parameter QU1A. The electricity usage target 276 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to have a second physical quantity change opposite to the first physical quantity change to change the variable current state of the variable physical parameter QU1A.

在一些實施例中,該觸發事件EQ11依靠該電使用目標275和該電使用目標276的其中之一而發生,並導致該處理單元230接收該操作請求訊號SZ11。在該觸發事件EQ11依靠該電使用目標275而發生的條件下,該處理單元230響應該操作請求訊號SZ11來獲得該電使用目標識別符HZ11,並基於所獲得的該電使用目標識別符HZ11來獲得該相對值VK11。在該觸發事件EQ11依靠該電使用目標276而發生的條件下,該處理單元230響應該操作請求訊號SZ11來獲得該電使用目標識別符HZ12,並基於所 獲得的該電使用目標識別符HZ12來獲得該相對值VK12。 In some embodiments, the trigger event EQ11 occurs depending on one of the electricity usage object 275 and the electricity usage object 276 , and causes the processing unit 230 to receive the operation request signal SZ11 . Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs depending on the electricity usage object 275, the processing unit 230 responds to the operation request signal SZ11 to obtain the electricity usage object identifier HZ11, and based on the obtained electricity usage object identifier HZ11 This relative value VK11 is obtained. Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs depending on the electricity usage object 276, the processing unit 230 responds to the operation request signal SZ11 to obtain the electricity usage object identifier HZ12, and based on the The electricity obtained uses the object identifier HZ12 to obtain the relative value VK12.

該觸發事件EQ11是該輸入單元270接收一使用者輸入操作JU11的一使用者輸入事件。該輸入單元270響應是該使用者輸入事件的該觸發事件EQ11來提供一操作請求訊號SZ11到該處理單元230。在該觸發事件EQ11依靠該電使用目標275而發生的條件下,該輸入單元270依靠該電使用目標275來提供一輸入訊號SM17到該處理單元230。在該觸發事件EQ11依靠該電使用目標276而發生的條件下,該輸入單元270依靠該電使用目標276來提供一輸入訊號SM18到該處理單元230。該操作請求訊號SZ11是該輸入訊號SM17和該輸入訊號SM18的其中之一。該處理單元230響應該操作請求訊號SZ11來使用該第一感測訊號SN11以獲得該第一測量值VN11。 The trigger event EQ11 is a user input event that the input unit 270 receives a user input operation JU11. The input unit 270 provides an operation request signal SZ11 to the processing unit 230 in response to the trigger event EQ11 which is the user input event. The input unit 270 provides an input signal SM17 to the processing unit 230 by virtue of the power usage object 275 under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs depending on the power usage object 275 . The input unit 270 provides an input signal SM18 to the processing unit 230 by virtue of the power usage target 276 under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs depending on the power usage target 276 . The operation request signal SZ11 is one of the input signal SM17 and the input signal SM18. The processing unit 230 uses the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain the first measurement value VN11 in response to the operation request signal SZ11.

該使用者輸入操作JU11是一使用者輸入操作JW11和一使用者輸入操作JW12的其中之一。在一第一特定情況中,該使用者輸入操作JU11是該使用者輸入操作JW11。在一第二特定情況中,該使用者輸入操作JU11是該使用者輸入操作JW12。該儲存單元250儲存該相對值VK11和不同於該相對值VK11的該相對值VK12。例如,該相對值VK11正比於1,或等於1。該相對值VK12正比於(-1),或等於(-1)。 The user input operation JU11 is one of a user input operation JW11 and a user input operation JW12. In a first specific case, the user input operation JU11 is the user input operation JW11. In a second specific case, the user input operation JU11 is the user input operation JW12. The storage unit 250 stores the relative value VK11 and the relative value VK12 different from the relative value VK11. For example, the relative value VK11 is proportional to 1, or equal to 1. This relative value VK12 is proportional to (-1), or equal to (-1).

在一些實施例中,在該第一特定情況中,該輸入單元270接收用於選擇該電使用目標275的該使用者輸入操作JW11以導致該觸發事件EQ11發生。該輸入單元270響應該使用者輸入操作JW11來產生作為該操作請求訊 號SZ11的該輸入訊號SM17。該處理單元230接收該輸入訊號SM17,響應該輸入訊號SM17來使用該第一感測訊號SN11以獲得該第一測量值VN11,並響應該輸入訊號SM17來執行一資料獲取AD2A以獲得該電使用目標識別符HZ11。 In some embodiments, in the first specific situation, the input unit 270 receives the user input operation JW11 for selecting the electricity usage target 275 to cause the trigger event EQ11 to occur. The input unit 270 responds to the user input operation JW11 to generate as the operation request message The input signal SM17 of number SZ11. The processing unit 230 receives the input signal SM17, uses the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain the first measured value VN11 in response to the input signal SM17, and executes a data acquisition AD2A in response to the input signal SM17 to obtain the electrical usage Target identifier HZ11.

在該處理單元230藉由檢查該第一測量值VN11和該測量值應用範圍RN1L之間的該第一數學關係KV11而確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下,該處理單元230基於所獲得的該電使用目標識別符HZ11來獲得該相對值VK11。例如,該處理單元230基於所獲得的該電使用目標識別符HZ11來獲得該記憶體位址FK11,並基於所獲得的該記憶體位址FK11來存取被儲存在該記憶體位置PK11的該相對值VK11以獲得該相對值VK11。例如,該處理單元230藉由執行使用所獲得的該電使用目標識別符HZ11和該數學關係KV1W的一科學計算MR15來獲得該相對值VK11。 Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RD1EL that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in by checking the first mathematical relationship KV11 between the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L , the processing unit 230 obtains the relative value VK11 based on the obtained electricity usage target identifier HZ11. For example, the processing unit 230 obtains the memory address FK11 based on the obtained electrical usage target identifier HZ11, and accesses the relative value stored in the memory location PK11 based on the obtained memory address FK11 VK11 to obtain this relative value VK11. For example, the processing unit 230 obtains the relative value VK11 by performing a scientific calculation MR15 using the obtained electricity usage target identifier HZ11 and the mathematical relationship KV1W.

所確定的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL由所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L所指示。該處理單元230藉由執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L和所獲得的該相對值VK11的一科學計算MQ15來獲得所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T,並基於所獲得該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該記憶體位置PJ1T的該控制資料碼CJ1T以獲得該控制碼CC1T。例如,該科學計算MQ15包含使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L和所獲得的該相對值VK11的一第一算術運 算。 The determined application range RD1EL of the physical parameter is indicated by the determined application range code EM1L of the measured value. The processing unit 230 obtains the preset measurement value target range code EM1T by performing a scientific calculation MQ15 using the determined measurement value application range code EM1L and the obtained relative value VK11, and based on the obtained The measured value target range code EM1T uses the memory unit 25Y1 to access the control data code CJ1T stored in the memory location PJ1T to obtain the control code CC1T. For example, the scientific calculation MQ15 includes a first arithmetic operation using the determined application range code EM1L of the measured value and the obtained relative value VK11 Calculate.

在一些實施例中,在該輸入單元270產生該輸入訊號SM17的條件下,該處理單元230基於所存取的該控制資料碼CJ1T來在該操作時間TD11之內執行用於該觸發應用功能FC11的該訊號產生控制GS11以導致該輸出單元240產生輸送該控制碼CC1T的該第一控制訊號SC11。該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET具有一第一特定物理參數範圍界限和相對於該第一特定物理參數範圍界限的一第二特定物理參數範圍界限。在該第一特定情況中,該控制目標裝置330的該操作單元397響應該第一控制訊號SC11來導致該可變物理參數QU1A具有該第一物理量改變以改變該可變物理參數QU1A的該可變目前狀態。 In some embodiments, under the condition that the input unit 270 generates the input signal SM17, the processing unit 230 executes the trigger application function FC11 within the operation time TD11 based on the accessed control data code CJ1T The signal generation controls GS11 to cause the output unit 240 to generate the first control signal SC11 conveying the control code CC1T. The physical parameter target range RD1ET has a first specific physical parameter range limit and a second specific physical parameter range limit relative to the first specific physical parameter range limit. In the first specific case, the operation unit 397 of the control target device 330 responds to the first control signal SC11 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to have the first physical quantity change to change the variable physical parameter QU1A. change the current state.

例如,在該輸入單元270產生該輸入訊號SM17的條件下,該控制目標裝置330的該操作單元397響應該第一控制訊號SC11來導致該可變物理參數QU1A從該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL通過該第一特定物理參數範圍界限以進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。該第一特定物理參數範圍界限是該預設物理參數目標範圍界限ZD1T1和該預設物理參數目標範圍界限ZD1T2的其中之一。例如,在該第一特定情況中,該第一物理量改變是一第一物理增量和第一物理減量的其中之一。例如,該相對值VK11被配置以等於一正整數。 For example, under the condition that the input unit 270 generates the input signal SM17, the operation unit 397 of the control target device 330 responds to the first control signal SC11 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to pass through the physical parameter application range RD1EL The first specific physical parameter range limit to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET. The first specific physical parameter range limit is one of the preset physical parameter target range limit ZD1T1 and the preset physical parameter target range limit ZD1T2 . For example, in the first specific case, the change of the first physical quantity is one of a first physical increment and a first physical decrement. For example, the relative value VK11 is configured to be equal to a positive integer.

在一些實施例中,在該第二特定情況中,該輸入單元270接收用於選擇該電使用目標276的該使用者輸入操作JW12以導致該觸發事件EQ11發生。該輸入單元 270響應該使用者輸入操作JW12來產生作為該操作請求訊號SZ11的該輸入訊號SM18。該處理單元230接收該輸入訊號SM18,響應該輸入訊號SM18來使用該第一感測訊號SN11以獲得該第一測量值VN11,並響應該輸入訊號SM18來執行一資料獲取AD2B以獲得該電使用目標識別符HZ12。 In some embodiments, in the second specific situation, the input unit 270 receives the user input operation JW12 for selecting the electricity usage target 276 to cause the trigger event EQ11 to occur. The input unit 270 generates the input signal SM18 as the operation request signal SZ11 in response to the user input operation JW12. The processing unit 230 receives the input signal SM18, uses the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain the first measurement value VN11 in response to the input signal SM18, and executes a data acquisition AD2B in response to the input signal SM18 to obtain the electrical usage Target identifier HZ12.

在該處理單元230藉由檢查該第一測量值VN11和該測量值應用範圍RN1L之間的該第一數學關係KV11而確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下,該處理單元230基於所獲得的該電使用目標識別符HZ12來獲得該相對值VK12。例如,該處理單元230基於所獲得的該電使用目標識別符HZ12來獲得該記憶體位址FK12,並基於所獲得的該記憶體位址FK12來存取被儲存在該記憶體位置PK12的該相對值VK12以獲得該相對值VK12。例如,該處理單元230藉由執行使用所獲得的該電使用目標識別符HZ12和該數學關係KV2W的一科學計算MR16來獲得該相對值VK12。 Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RD1EL that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in by checking the first mathematical relationship KV11 between the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L , the processing unit 230 obtains the relative value VK12 based on the obtained electricity usage target identifier HZ12. For example, the processing unit 230 obtains the memory address FK12 based on the obtained electrical usage target identifier HZ12, and accesses the relative value stored in the memory location PK12 based on the obtained memory address FK12 VK12 to obtain this relative value VK12. For example, the processing unit 230 obtains the relative value VK12 by performing a scientific calculation MR16 using the obtained electricity usage target identifier HZ12 and the mathematical relationship KV2W.

所確定的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL由所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L所指示。該處理單元230藉由執行使用所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L和所獲得的該相對值VK12的一科學計算MQ16來獲得所預設的該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T,並基於所獲得該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該記憶體位置PJ1T的該控制資料碼CJ1T以獲得該控制碼CC1T。例如,該科學計算MQ16包含使用所確定的該測量值應用 範圍碼EM1L和所獲得的該相對值VK12的一第二算術運算。 The determined application range RD1EL of the physical parameter is indicated by the determined application range code EM1L of the measured value. The processing unit 230 obtains the preset measurement value target range code EM1T by performing a scientific calculation MQ16 using the determined measurement value application range code EM1L and the obtained relative value VK12, and based on the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T The measured value target range code EM1T uses the memory unit 25Y1 to access the control data code CJ1T stored in the memory location PJ1T to obtain the control code CC1T. For example, the scientific calculation MQ16 contains the application of this measurement determined using A second arithmetic operation of the range code EM1L and the obtained relative value VK12.

在該輸入單元270產生該輸入訊號SM18的條件下,該處理單元230基於所存取的該控制資料碼CJ1T來在該操作時間TD11之內執行用於該觸發應用功能FC11的該訊號產生控制GS11以導致該輸出單元240產生輸送該測量值目標範圍碼EM1T的該第一控制訊號SC11。在該第二特定情況中,該控制目標裝置330的該操作單元397響應該第一控制訊號SC11來導致該可變物理參數QU1A具有與該第一物理量改變相反的該第二物理量改變以改變該可變物理參數QU1A的該可變目前狀態。 Under the condition that the input unit 270 generates the input signal SM18, the processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS11 for the trigger application function FC11 within the operation time TD11 based on the accessed control data code CJ1T To cause the output unit 240 to generate the first control signal SC11 conveying the measured value target range code EM1T. In the second specific case, the operation unit 397 of the control target device 330 responds to the first control signal SC11 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to have the change of the second physical quantity opposite to the change of the first physical quantity to change the This variable current state of the variable physical parameter QU1A.

例如,在該輸入單元270產生該輸入訊號SM18的條件下,該控制目標裝置330的該操作單元397響應該第一控制訊號SC11來導致該可變物理參數QU1A從該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL通過該第二特定物理參數範圍界限以進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。該第二特定物理參數範圍界限是該預設物理參數目標範圍界限ZD1T1和該預設物理參數目標範圍界限ZD1T2的其中另一。例如,在該第二特定情況中,該第二物理量改變是一第二物理增量和第二物理減量的其中之一。例如,該相對值VK12被配置以等於一負整數。 For example, under the condition that the input unit 270 generates the input signal SM18, the operation unit 397 of the control target device 330 responds to the first control signal SC11 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to pass through the physical parameter application range RD1EL The second specific physical parameter range limits to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET. The second specific physical parameter range limit is the other one of the preset physical parameter target range limit ZD1T1 and the preset physical parameter target range limit ZD1T2 . For example, in the second specific case, the change of the second physical quantity is one of a second physical increment and a second physical decrement. For example, the relative value VK12 is configured to be equal to a negative integer.

在一些實施例中,該儲存單元250進一步具有一記憶體位置PF11和不同於該記憶體位置PF11的一記憶體位置PF12。該儲存單元250在該記憶體位置PF11儲存所預設的該電使用目標識別符HZ11,並在該記憶體位置 PF12儲存所預設的該電使用目標識別符HZ12。該記憶體位置PF11由一記憶體位址FF11所識別,或基於該記憶體位址FF11而被識別。該記憶體位置PF12由一記憶體位址FF12所識別,或基於該記憶體位址FF12而被識別。 In some embodiments, the storage unit 250 further has a memory location PF11 and a memory location PF12 different from the memory location PF11. The storage unit 250 stores the preset electricity usage target identifier HZ11 in the memory location PF11, and stores the preset electricity usage target identifier HZ11 in the memory location The PF12 stores the preset electrical usage target identifier HZ12. The memory location PF11 is identified by or based on a memory address FF11. The memory location PF12 is identified by or based on a memory address FF12.

該記憶體位址FF11和該記憶體位址FF12皆被預設。該電使用目標275通過該處理單元230而耦合於該記憶體位置PF11。該電使用目標276通過該處理單元230而耦合於該記憶體位置PF12。例如,該輸入訊號SM17輸送一輸入資料DJ17。該輸入訊號SM18輸送一輸入資料DJ18。 Both the memory address FF11 and the memory address FF12 are preset. The power usage object 275 is coupled to the memory location PF11 through the processing unit 230 . The power usage object 276 is coupled to the memory location PF12 through the processing unit 230 . For example, the input signal SM17 sends an input data DJ17. The input signal SM18 sends an input data DJ18.

在該第一特定情況中,該資料獲取AD2A是一資料獲取操作AD21和一資料獲取操作AD22的其中之一。該資料獲取操作AD21藉由使用所預設的該記憶體位址FF11來存取被儲存在該記憶體位置PF11的該電使用目標識別符HZ11以獲得所預設的該電使用目標識別符HZ11。該資料獲取操作AD22基於一預設資料導出規則YU11來處理該輸入資料DJ17以獲得所預設的該電使用目標識別符HZ11。 In the first specific case, the data acquisition AD2A is one of a data acquisition operation AD21 and a data acquisition operation AD22. The data acquisition operation AD21 obtains the preset electrical usage target ID HZ11 by using the preset memory address FF11 to access the electrical usage target ID HZ11 stored in the memory location PF11 . The data acquisition operation AD22 processes the input data DJ17 based on a preset data derivation rule YU11 to obtain the preset electricity usage target identifier HZ11 .

在該第二特定情況中,該資料獲取AD2B是一資料獲取操作AD23和一資料獲取操作AD24的其中之一。該資料獲取操作AD23藉由使用所預設的該記憶體位址FF12來存取被儲存在該記憶體位置PF12的該電使用目標識別符HZ12以獲得所預設的該電使用目標識別符HZ12。該資料獲取操作AD24基於該預設資料導出規則YU11來處理該輸入資料DJ18以獲得所預設的該電使用目 標識別符HZ12。 In the second specific case, the data acquisition AD2B is one of a data acquisition operation AD23 and a data acquisition operation AD24. The data acquisition operation AD23 obtains the preset electrical usage target ID HZ12 by using the preset memory address FF12 to access the electrical usage target ID HZ12 stored in the memory location PF12 . The data acquisition operation AD24 processes the input data DJ18 based on the default data derivation rule YU11 to obtain the preset electricity usage target. Mark the identifier HZ12.

在一些實施例中,該控制裝置210由該使用者295所使用,並包含耦合於該處理單元230的一使用者介面區AP21。該使用者介面區AP21具有該電使用目標275和該電使用目標276,或者該電使用目標275和該電使用目標276皆位於該使用者介面區AP21中。該輸入單元270包含該輸入組件440。該輸出單元240包含該顯示組件460。例如,該輸入組件440和該顯示組件460的其中之一包含該使用者介面區AP21。 In some embodiments, the control device 210 is used by the user 295 and includes a user interface area AP21 coupled to the processing unit 230 . The user interface area AP21 has the electricity usage object 275 and the electricity usage object 276, or both the electricity usage object 275 and the electricity usage object 276 are located in the user interface area AP21. The input unit 270 includes the input component 440 . The output unit 240 includes the display component 460 . For example, one of the input component 440 and the display component 460 includes the user interface area AP21.

例如,該使用者輸入操作JW11由該使用者295所執行。該電使用目標275是一第一感測目標和一第一顯示目標的其中之一。在該電使用目標275是該第一感測目標的條件下,該輸入組件440包含該電使用目標275。在該電使用目標275是該第一顯示目標的條件下,該顯示組件460包含該電使用目標275。例如,該第一感測目標是一第一按鈕目標。該第一顯示目標是一第一圖符目標。 For example, the user input operation JW11 is performed by the user 295 . The electricity usage target 275 is one of a first sensing target and a first display target. On the condition that the electricity usage object 275 is the first sensing object, the input component 440 includes the electricity usage object 275 . On the condition that the electricity usage object 275 is the first display object, the display assembly 460 includes the electricity usage object 275 . For example, the first sensing target is a first button target. The first display object is a first icon object.

例如,該使用者輸入操作JW12由該使用者295所執行。該電使用目標276是一第二感測目標和一第二顯示目標的其中之一。在該電使用目標276是該第二感測目標的條件下,該輸入組件440包含該電使用目標276。在該電使用目標276是該第二顯示目標的條件下,該顯示組件460包含該電使用目標276。例如,該第二感測目標是一第二按鈕目標。該第二顯示目標是一第二圖符目標。 For example, the user input operation JW12 is performed by the user 295 . The electricity usage target 276 is one of a second sensing target and a second display target. On the condition that the electricity usage target 276 is the second sensing target, the input component 440 includes the electricity usage target 276 . On the condition that the electricity usage object 276 is the second display object, the display assembly 460 includes the electricity usage object 276 . For example, the second sensing target is a second button target. The second display object is a second icon object.

在一些實施例中,該輸入單元270依靠該電使用目標275來提供該輸入訊號SM17到該處理單元230。 該輸入單元270依靠該電使用目標276來提供該輸入訊號SM18到該處理單元230。例如,在該電使用目標275被配置以存在於該輸入組件440的條件下,該電使用目標275接收該使用者輸入操作JW11來導致該輸入組件440提供該輸入訊號SM17到該處理單元230。 In some embodiments, the input unit 270 relies on the power usage object 275 to provide the input signal SM17 to the processing unit 230 . The input unit 270 provides the input signal SM18 to the processing unit 230 via the power usage object 276 . For example, under the condition that the electricity usage object 275 is configured to exist in the input component 440 , the electricity usage object 275 receives the user input operation JW11 to cause the input component 440 to provide the input signal SM17 to the processing unit 230 .

例如,該輸入單元270進一步包含一指向裝置441。在該觸發事件EQ11發生之前,該處理單元230被配置以導致該顯示組件460顯示一選擇工具YJ11、該電使用目標275和該電使用目標276。該指向裝置441用於控制該選擇工具YJ11。在該電使用目標275被配置以存在於該顯示組件460的條件下,該指向裝置441接收用於選擇該電使用目標275的該使用者輸入操作JW11來導致該指向裝置441提供該輸入訊號SM17到該處理單元230。例如,該使用者輸入操作JW11被配置以依靠該指向裝置441和該選擇工具YJ11來選擇該電使用目標275。例如,該選擇工具YJ11是一游標。 For example, the input unit 270 further includes a pointing device 441 . Before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 is configured to cause the display component 460 to display a selection tool YJ11 , the electricity usage target 275 and the electricity usage target 276 . The pointing device 441 is used to control the selection tool YJ11. Under the condition that the electricity usage object 275 is configured to exist in the display assembly 460, the pointing device 441 receives the user input operation JW11 for selecting the electricity usage object 275 to cause the pointing device 441 to provide the input signal SM17 to the processing unit 230. For example, the user input operation JW11 is configured to select the electricity usage target 275 by means of the pointing device 441 and the selection tool YJ11. For example, the selection tool YJ11 is a cursor.

例如,在該電使用目標276被配置以存在於該輸入組件440的條件下,該電使用目標276接收該使用者輸入操作JW12來導致該輸入組件440提供該輸入訊號SM18到該處理單元230。在該電使用目標276被配置以存在於該顯示組件460的條件下,該指向裝置441接收用於選擇該電使用目標276的該使用者輸入操作JW12來導致該指向裝置441提供該輸入訊號SM18到該處理單元230。例如,該使用者輸入操作JW12被配置以依靠該指向裝置441和該選擇工具YJ11來選擇該電使用目標276。 For example, under the condition that the electricity usage object 276 is configured to exist in the input component 440 , the electricity usage object 276 receives the user input operation JW12 to cause the input component 440 to provide the input signal SM18 to the processing unit 230 . Under the condition that the electricity usage object 276 is configured to exist in the display assembly 460, the pointing device 441 receives the user input operation JW12 for selecting the electricity usage object 276 to cause the pointing device 441 to provide the input signal SM18 to the processing unit 230. For example, the user input operation JW12 is configured to select the electricity usage target 276 by means of the pointing device 441 and the selection tool YJ11.

請參閱第35圖、第36圖和第37圖。第35圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8044的示意圖。第36圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8045的示意圖。第37圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8046的示意圖。如第35圖、第36圖和第37圖所示,該實施結構8044、該實施結構8045和該實施結構8046的每一結構包含該控制裝置210、該控制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制裝置210鏈接於該伺服器280。該控制裝置210用於依靠該觸發事件EQ11而控制存在於該控制目標裝置330中的該可變物理參數QU1A,並包含該感測單元334、該操作單元297和該儲存單元250。該操作單元297包含該處理單元230、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該處理單元230耦合於該伺服器280、該感測單元334、該儲存單元250、該輸入單元270和該輸出單元240。該輸出單元240耦合於該控制目標裝置330。 See Figures 35, 36 and 37. FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8044 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8045 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8046 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in FIG. 35 , FIG. 36 and FIG. 37 , each structure of the implementation structure 8044 , the implementation structure 8045 and the implementation structure 8046 includes the control device 210 , the control target device 330 and the server 280 . The control device 210 is linked to the server 280 . The control device 210 is used for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 depending on the trigger event EQ11 , and includes the sensing unit 334 , the operating unit 297 and the storage unit 250 . The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280 , the sensing unit 334 , the storage unit 250 , the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 . The output unit 240 is coupled to the control target device 330 .

在一些實施例中,該控制目標裝置330包含該操作單元397、該功能目標335和耦合於該操作單元397的一功能目標735。該操作單元397具有一輸出端338P和一輸出端338Q。該輸出端338P耦合於該功能目標335。該功能目標735包含一物理參數形成區AU21,並耦合於該輸出端338Q。該輸出端338P和該輸出端338Q分別位於不同空間位置。該物理參數形成區AU21具有該可變物理參數QU2A。該控制裝置210進一步包含耦合於該處理單元230的一多工器263。該多工器263具有一輸入端2631、一輸 入端2632、一控制端263C和一輸出端263P。該控制端263C耦合於該處理單元230。例如,該功能目標735是一物理可實現功能目標,並具有相似於該功能目標335的一功能結構。 In some embodiments, the control object device 330 includes the operation unit 397 , the function object 335 and a function object 735 coupled to the operation unit 397 . The operation unit 397 has an output terminal 338P and an output terminal 338Q. The output 338P is coupled to the functional object 335 . The functional object 735 includes a physical parameter forming area AU21 and is coupled to the output terminal 338Q. The output end 338P and the output end 338Q are respectively located at different spatial positions. The physical parameter forming area AU21 has the variable physical parameter QU2A. The control device 210 further includes a multiplexer 263 coupled to the processing unit 230 . The multiplexer 263 has an input terminal 2631, an output An input terminal 2632, a control terminal 263C and an output terminal 263P. The control terminal 263C is coupled to the processing unit 230 . For example, the functional object 735 is a physically realizable functional object and has a functional structure similar to the functional object 335 .

該輸入端2631耦合於該物理參數形成區AU11。該輸入端2632耦合於該物理參數形成區AU21。該輸出端263P耦合於該感測單元334。例如,該可變物理參數QU1A和該可變物理參數QU2A分別是一第四可變電性參數和一第五可變電性參數。例如,該第四可變電性參數和該第五可變電性參數分別是一第四可變電壓和一第五可變電壓。該輸入端2631和該輸出端263P之間具有一第一功能關係。該第一功能關係等於一第一導通關係和一第一關斷關係的其中之一。 The input terminal 2631 is coupled to the physical parameter formation area AU11. The input terminal 2632 is coupled to the physical parameter formation area AU21. The output terminal 263P is coupled to the sensing unit 334 . For example, the variable physical parameter QU1A and the variable physical parameter QU2A are respectively a fourth variable electrical parameter and a fifth variable electrical parameter. For example, the fourth variable electrical parameter and the fifth variable electrical parameter are a fourth variable voltage and a fifth variable voltage, respectively. There is a first functional relationship between the input end 2631 and the output end 263P. The first functional relationship is equal to one of a first on relationship and a first off relationship.

該輸入端2632和該輸出端263P之間具有一第二功能關係。該第二功能關係等於一第二導通關係和一第二關斷關係的其中之一。在該第一功能關係等於該第一導通關係的條件下,該感測單元334用於通過該輸出端263P和該輸入端2631來感測該可變物理參數QU1A,並通過該輸出端263P和該輸入端2631而耦合於該物理參數形成區AU11。在該第二功能關係等於該第二導通關係的條件下,該感測單元334用於通過該輸出端263P和該輸入端2632來感測該可變物理參數QU2A,並通過該輸出端263P和該輸入端2632而耦合於該物理參數形成區AU21。例如,該多工器263受該處理單元230控制,並是一類比多工器。 There is a second functional relationship between the input end 2632 and the output end 263P. The second functional relationship is equal to one of a second on relationship and a second off relationship. Under the condition that the first functional relationship is equal to the first conduction relationship, the sensing unit 334 is used to sense the variable physical parameter QU1A through the output terminal 263P and the input terminal 2631, and through the output terminal 263P and the input terminal 2631 to sense the variable physical parameter QU1A. The input terminal 2631 is coupled to the physical parameter formation area AU11. Under the condition that the second functional relationship is equal to the second conduction relationship, the sensing unit 334 is used to sense the variable physical parameter QU2A through the output terminal 263P and the input terminal 2632, and through the output terminal 263P and the input terminal 2632 to sense the variable physical parameter QU2A. The input terminal 2632 is coupled to the physical parameter formation area AU21. For example, the multiplexer 263 is controlled by the processing unit 230 and is an analog multiplexer.

在一些實施例中,該功能目標335由一功能 目標識別符HA2T所識別。該功能目標735由一功能目標識別符HA22所識別。該功能目標335和該功能目標735分別位於不同空間位置,並皆通過該操作單元397和該輸出單元240而耦合於該處理單元230。該功能目標識別符HA2T和該功能目標識別符HA22皆基於該觸發應用功能規格GCL1而被預設。該控制裝置210進一步包含耦合於該處理單元230的一電使用目標285、和耦合於該處理單元230的一電使用目標286。例如,該功能目標識別符HA2T被配置以指示該輸出端338P,並是一第一功能目標號碼。該功能目標識別符HA22被配置以指示該輸出端338Q,並是一第二功能目標號碼。 In some embodiments, the function object 335 consists of a function Identified by the target identifier HA2T. The functional object 735 is identified by a functional object identifier HA22. The functional object 335 and the functional object 735 are respectively located at different spatial positions, and both are coupled to the processing unit 230 through the operating unit 397 and the output unit 240 . Both the functional object identifier HA2T and the functional object identifier HA22 are preset based on the triggering application functional specification GCL1. The control device 210 further includes an electricity usage object 285 coupled to the processing unit 230 , and an electricity usage object 286 coupled to the processing unit 230 . For example, the functional object identifier HA2T is configured to indicate the output terminal 338P and is a first functional object number. The functional object identifier HA22 is configured to indicate the output terminal 338Q and is a second functional object number.

在一些實施例中,該功能目標335由一功能目標識別符HA2T所識別。該功能目標735由一功能目標識別符HA22所識別。該功能目標335和該功能目標735分別位於不同空間位置,並皆通過該操作單元397和該輸出單元240而耦合於該處理單元230。該功能目標識別符HA2T和該功能目標識別符HA22皆基於該觸發應用功能規格GCL1而被預設。該控制裝置210進一步包含耦合於該處理單元230的一電使用目標285、和耦合於該處理單元230的一電使用目標286。例如,該功能目標識別符HA2T是一第一功能目標號碼。該功能目標識別符HA22是一第二功能目標號碼。 In some embodiments, the functional object 335 is identified by a functional object identifier HA2T. The functional object 735 is identified by a functional object identifier HA22. The functional object 335 and the functional object 735 are respectively located at different spatial positions, and both are coupled to the processing unit 230 through the operating unit 397 and the output unit 240 . Both the functional object identifier HA2T and the functional object identifier HA22 are preset based on the triggering application functional specification GCL1. The control device 210 further includes an electricity usage object 285 coupled to the processing unit 230 , and an electricity usage object 286 coupled to the processing unit 230 . For example, the functional object identifier HA2T is a first functional object number. The functional object identifier HA22 is a second functional object number.

該電使用目標285由一電使用目標識別符HZ2T所識別。該電使用目標286由一電使用目標識別符HZ22所識別。該電使用目標識別符HZ2T和該電使用目標 識別符HZ22皆基於該觸發應用功能規格GCL1而被預設。在該觸發事件EQ11依靠該電使用目標285而發生的條件下,該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11來選擇該功能目標335以進行控制。在該觸發事件EQ11依靠該電使用目標286而發生的條件下,該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11來選擇該功能目標735以進行控制。 The electricity usage object 285 is identified by an electricity usage object identifier HZ2T. The electricity usage object 286 is identified by an electricity usage object identifier HZ22. The electric use target identifier HZ2T and the electric use target The identifier HZ22 is preset based on the trigger application function specification GCL1. On the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs depending on the electricity usage object 285, the processing unit 230 selects the functional object 335 for control in response to the trigger event EQ11. On the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs depending on the electricity usage object 286, the processing unit 230 selects the function object 735 for control in response to the trigger event EQ11.

該儲存單元250具有一記憶體位置XC2T和一記憶體位置XC22,在該記憶體位置XC2T儲存該功能目標識別符HA2T,並在該記憶體位置XC22儲存該功能目標識別符HA22。該記憶體位置XC2T由一記憶體位址EC2T所識別,或基於該記憶體位址EC2T而被識別。該記憶體位址EC2T基於該電使用目標識別符HZ2T而被預設;藉此,該電使用目標285相關於該功能目標識別符HA2T。例如,該電使用目標識別符HZ2T和該功能目標識別符HA2T之間具有一數學關係KK21;藉此,該電使用目標285相關於該功能目標識別符HA2T。 The storage unit 250 has a memory location XC2T and a memory location XC22, the memory location XC2T stores the functional object identifier HA2T, and the memory location XC22 stores the functional object identifier HA22. The memory location XC2T is identified by or based on a memory address EC2T. The memory address EC2T is preset based on the electrical usage object identifier HZ2T; thereby, the electrical usage object 285 is associated with the functional object identifier HA2T. For example, there is a mathematical relationship KK21 between the electricity usage object identifier HZ2T and the functional object identifier HA2T; thereby, the electricity usage object 285 is related to the functional object identifier HA2T.

該記憶體位置XC22由一記憶體位址EC22所識別,或基於該記憶體位址EC22而被識別。該記憶體位址EC22基於該電使用目標識別符HZ22而被預設;藉此,該電使用目標286相關於該功能目標識別符HA22。例如,該電使用目標識別符HZ22和該功能目標識別符HA22之間具有一數學關係KK22;藉此,該電使用目標286相關於該功能目標識別符HA22。 The memory location XC22 is identified by or based on a memory address EC22. The memory address EC22 is preset based on the electrical usage object identifier HZ22; thereby, the electrical usage object 286 is associated with the functional object identifier HA22. For example, there is a mathematical relationship KK22 between the electricity usage object identifier HZ22 and the functional object identifier HA22 ; thus, the electricity usage object 286 is related to the functional object identifier HA22 .

例如,該功能目標335和該功能目標735是分開的,或由設置於該功能目標335和該功能目標735之 間的一材料層70U所隔開。該功能目標335、該材料層70U和該功能目標735皆耦合於一支撐媒介70M。該控制目標裝置330包含該材料層70U,或該材料層70U設置於該控制目標裝置330之外。該控制目標裝置330包含該支撐媒介70M,或該支撐媒介70M設置於該控制目標裝置330之外。 For example, the functional object 335 and the functional object 735 are separate, or are set between the functional object 335 and the functional object 735 separated by a material layer 70U in between. The functional object 335, the material layer 70U and the functional object 735 are all coupled to a support medium 70M. The control target device 330 includes the material layer 70U, or the material layer 70U is disposed outside the control target device 330 . The control target device 330 includes the support medium 70M, or the support medium 70M is disposed outside the control target device 330 .

在一些實施例中,在該觸發事件EQ11依靠該電使用目標285而發生的條件下,該處理單元230被導致以接收一操作請求訊號SZ21。該處理單元230響應該操作請求訊號SZ21來獲得該第一測量值VN11和該電使用目標識別符HZ2T,並基於所獲得的該電使用目標識別符HZ2T來獲得該功能目標識別符HA2T。該處理單元230基於所獲得的該功能目標識別符HA2T來導致該輸出單元240向該控制目標裝置330傳輸該第一控制訊號SC11、該第二控制訊號SC12和該第三控制訊號SC22的至少其中之一以控制該功能目標335。 In some embodiments, the processing unit 230 is caused to receive an operation request signal SZ21 under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs depending on the power usage target 285 . The processing unit 230 responds to the operation request signal SZ21 to obtain the first measurement value VN11 and the electricity use object identifier HZ2T, and obtains the function object identifier HA2T based on the obtained electricity use object identifier HZ2T. The processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to transmit at least one of the first control signal SC11, the second control signal SC12, and the third control signal SC22 to the control target device 330 based on the obtained functional object identifier HA2T. One to control the function object 335 .

例如,該觸發事件EQ11是該輸入單元270接收一使用者輸入操作JU21的一使用者輸入事件。該輸入單元270響應是該使用者輸入事件的該觸發事件EQ11來提供該操作請求訊號SZ21到該處理單元230。在該觸發事件EQ11依靠該電使用目標285而發生的條件下,該輸入單元270依靠該電使用目標285來提供該操作請求訊號SZ21到該處理單元230。該處理單元230響應該操作請求訊號SZ21來提供一控制訊號SV11到該控制端263C。例如,該控制訊號SV11是一選擇控制訊號,並起到指示該輸入端2631 的作用。該多工器263響應該控制訊號SV11來導致該輸入端2631和該輸出端263P之間的該第一功能關係等於該第一導通關係。 For example, the trigger event EQ11 is a user input event that the input unit 270 receives a user input operation JU21. The input unit 270 provides the operation request signal SZ21 to the processing unit 230 in response to the trigger event EQ11 which is the user input event. Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs depending on the electricity usage object 285 , the input unit 270 provides the operation request signal SZ21 to the processing unit 230 depending on the electricity usage object 285 . The processing unit 230 provides a control signal SV11 to the control terminal 263C in response to the operation request signal SZ21 . For example, the control signal SV11 is a selection control signal, and serves to indicate that the input terminal 2631 role. The multiplexer 263 responds to the control signal SV11 to cause the first functional relationship between the input terminal 2631 and the output terminal 263P to be equal to the first conduction relationship.

在該第一功能關係等於該第一導通關係的條件下,該感測單元334感測該可變物理參數QU1A以產生該第一感測訊號SN11。該處理單元230從該感測單元334接收該第一感測訊號SN11,並基於所接收的該第一感測訊號SN11來以該指定測量值格式HH11獲得該第一測量值VN11。例如,該電使用目標285和該電使用目標286被配置以分別對應於該功能目標335和該功能目標735,皆耦合於該處理單元230,並分別位於不同空間位置。 Under the condition that the first functional relationship is equal to the first conduction relationship, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate the first sensing signal SN11 . The processing unit 230 receives the first sensing signal SN11 from the sensing unit 334 , and obtains the first measurement value VN11 in the designated measurement value format HH11 based on the received first sensing signal SN11 . For example, the electricity usage object 285 and the electricity usage object 286 are configured to correspond to the functional object 335 and the functional object 735 respectively, are coupled to the processing unit 230 , and are respectively located at different spatial positions.

在一些實施例中,該輸入單元270接收用於選擇該電使用目標285的該使用者輸入操作JU21以導致該觸發事件EQ11發生。該輸入單元270響應該使用者輸入操作JU21來產生該操作請求訊號SZ21。該處理單元230接收該操作請求訊號SZ21,響應該操作請求訊號SZ21來使用該第一感測訊號SN11以獲得該第一測量值VN11,並響應該操作請求訊號SZ21來執行一資料獲取AD2C以獲得該電使用目標識別符HZ2T。 In some embodiments, the input unit 270 receives the user input operation JU21 for selecting the electricity usage target 285 to cause the trigger event EQ11 to occur. The input unit 270 generates the operation request signal SZ21 in response to the user input operation JU21. The processing unit 230 receives the operation request signal SZ21, uses the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain the first measurement value VN11 in response to the operation request signal SZ21, and executes a data acquisition AD2C in response to the operation request signal SZ21 to obtain This call uses the target identifier HZ2T.

例如,該儲存單元250包含該儲存空間SS11。該儲存空間SS11具有所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A、該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A、該電使用目標識別符HZ2T、該電使用目標識別符HZ22、該功能目標識別符HA2T、該功能目標識別符HA22、該電使用目標識別符HZ11、該電使用目標識別符HZ12、該相對值VK11、該相 對值VK12、該操作參考資料XU21和該時間長度範圍界限值對LN1A。 For example, the storage unit 250 includes the storage space SS11. The storage space SS11 has the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A, the variable physical parameter range code UN1A, the electricity use target identifier HZ2T, the electricity use target identifier HZ22, the function target identifier HA2T, the The function target identifier HA22, the electricity usage target identifier HZ11, the electricity usage target identifier HZ12, the relative value VK11, the phase The pair value VK12, the operational reference XU21 and the time length range limit value pair LN1A.

該處理單元230被配置以基於所獲得的該電使用目標識別符HZ2T來獲得該記憶體位址EC2T,並基於所獲得的該記憶體位址EC2T來存取被儲存在該記憶體位置XC2T的該功能目標識別符HA2T以獲得該功能目標識別符HA2T。在該處理單元230藉由檢查該第一測量值VN11和該測量值應用範圍RN1L之間的該第一數學關係KV11而確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下,該處理單元230基於所獲得的該功能目標識別符HA2T和所存取的該控制資料碼CK1T來執行該訊號產生控制GS11以導致該輸出單元240產生該第一控制訊號SC11,並導致該輸出單元240向該操作單元397傳輸該第一控制訊號SC11。 The processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the memory address EC2T based on the obtained electrical usage object identifier HZ2T, and access the function stored in the memory location XC2T based on the obtained memory address EC2T object identifier HA2T to obtain the functional object identifier HA2T. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RD1EL that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in by checking the first mathematical relationship KV11 between the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L , the processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS11 based on the obtained function object identifier HA2T and the accessed control data code CK1T to cause the output unit 240 to generate the first control signal SC11 and cause the output The unit 240 transmits the first control signal SC11 to the operation unit 397 .

例如,該第一控制訊號SC11輸送該功能目標識別符HA2T。例如,該第一控制訊號SC11輸送該功能目標識別符HA2T和該控制碼CC1T。該操作單元397響應該第一控制訊號SC11來從該第一控制訊號SC11獲得該控制碼CC1T和該功能目標識別符HA2T,並基於所獲得的該控制碼CC1T和所獲得的該功能目標識別符HA2T來執行使用該輸出端338P的該訊號產生操作BY11以向該功能目標335傳輸該功能訊號SG11。該功能目標335響應該功能訊號SG11來導致該可變物理參數QU1A離開該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL以進入該物理參數目標範圍RD1ET。 For example, the first control signal SC11 conveys the functional object identifier HA2T. For example, the first control signal SC11 conveys the function object identifier HA2T and the control code CC1T. The operation unit 397 obtains the control code CC1T and the functional object identifier HA2T from the first control signal SC11 in response to the first control signal SC11, and based on the obtained control code CC1T and the obtained functional object identifier HA2T performs the signal generating operation BY11 using the output terminal 338P to transmit the function signal SG11 to the function object 335 . The function target 335 responds to the function signal SG11 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter application range RD1EL to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.

在一些實施例中,該儲存空間SS11進一步 具有一記憶體位置PF2T。該儲存單元250在該記憶體位置PF2T儲存所預設的該電使用目標識別符HZ2T。該記憶體位置PF2T由一記憶體位址FF2T所識別,或基於該記憶體位址FF2T而被識別。該記憶體位址FF2T被預設。該電使用目標285通過該處理單元230而耦合於該記憶體位置PF2T。例如,該操作請求訊號SZ21輸送一輸入資料DJ21。 In some embodiments, the storage space SS11 is further There is a memory location PF2T. The storage unit 250 stores the preset electricity usage target identifier HZ2T in the memory location PF2T. The memory location PF2T is identified by or based on a memory address FF2T. The memory address FF2T is preset. The power usage target 285 is coupled to the memory location PF2T through the processing unit 230 . For example, the operation request signal SZ21 sends an input data DJ21.

該資料獲取AD2C是一資料獲取操作AD25和一資料獲取操作AD26的其中之一。該資料獲取操作AD25藉由使用所預設的該記憶體位址FF2T來存取被儲存在該記憶體位置PF2T的該電使用目標識別符HZ2T以獲得所預設的該電使用目標識別符HZ2T。該資料獲取操作AD26基於一預設資料導出規則YU21來處理該輸入資料DJ21以獲得所預設的該電使用目標識別符HZ2T。 The data acquisition AD2C is one of a data acquisition operation AD25 and a data acquisition operation AD26. The data acquisition operation AD25 obtains the preset electrical usage target identifier HZ2T by using the preset memory address FF2T to access the electrical usage target ID HZ2T stored in the memory location PF2T. The data acquisition operation AD26 processes the input data DJ21 based on a preset data derivation rule YU21 to obtain the preset electricity usage target identifier HZ2T.

在一些實施例中,在該輸入單元270接收用於選擇該電使用目標286的一使用者輸入操作JU22的一觸發事件發生的條件下,該輸入單元270導致該處理單元230接收一操作請求訊號SZ22。該處理單元230響應該操作請求訊號SZ22來獲得一測量值VN21和該電使用目標識別符HZ22,並基於所獲得的該電使用目標識別符HZ22來獲得該功能目標識別符HA22。該處理單元230基於所獲得的該測量值VN21和所獲得的該功能目標識別符HA22來導致該輸出單元240向該操作單元397傳輸一控制訊號SC27。該控制訊號SC27用於控制該可變物理參數QU2A,並輸送該功能目標識別符HA22。 In some embodiments, the input unit 270 causes the processing unit 230 to receive an operation request signal under the condition that the input unit 270 receives a user input operation JU22 for selecting the electricity usage target 286 and a trigger event occurs. SZ22. The processing unit 230 responds to the operation request signal SZ22 to obtain a measured value VN21 and the electricity use object identifier HZ22, and obtains the function object identifier HA22 based on the obtained electricity use object identifier HZ22. The processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to transmit a control signal SC27 to the operating unit 397 based on the obtained measurement value VN21 and the obtained functional object identifier HA22 . The control signal SC27 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU2A, and transmits the functional object identifier HA22.

例如,該處理單元230響應該操作請求訊號 SZ22來提供一控制訊號SV12到該控制端263C。例如,該控制訊號SV12是一選擇控制訊號,起到指示該輸入端2632的作用,並不同於該控制訊號SV11。該多工器263響應該控制訊號SV12來導致該輸入端2632和該輸出端263P之間的該第二功能關係等於該第二導通關係。在該第二功能關係等於該第二導通關係的條件下,該感測單元334感測該可變物理參數QU2A以產生一感測訊號SN21。 For example, the processing unit 230 responds to the operation request signal SZ22 provides a control signal SV12 to the control terminal 263C. For example, the control signal SV12 is a selection control signal, which serves as an indication to the input terminal 2632 and is different from the control signal SV11. The multiplexer 263 responds to the control signal SV12 to cause the second functional relationship between the input terminal 2632 and the output terminal 263P to be equal to the second conduction relationship. Under the condition that the second functional relationship is equal to the second conduction relationship, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU2A to generate a sensing signal SN21 .

該處理單元230從該感測單元334接收該感測訊號SN21,並基於所接收的該感測訊號SN21來以該指定測量值格式HH11獲得該測量值VN21。該操作單元397響應該控制訊號SC27來從該控制訊號SC27獲得該功能目標識別符HA22,並基於所獲得的該功能目標識別符HA22來執行使用該輸出端338Q一訊號產生操作BY27以向該功能目標735傳輸一功能訊號SG27。該功能訊號SG27用於控制該可變物理參數QU2A。 The processing unit 230 receives the sensing signal SN21 from the sensing unit 334 , and obtains the measurement value VN21 in the designated measurement value format HH11 based on the received sensing signal SN21 . The operation unit 397 obtains the function object identifier HA22 from the control signal SC27 in response to the control signal SC27, and executes a signal generation operation BY27 using the output terminal 338Q based on the obtained function object identifier HA22 to send to the function. The target 735 transmits a function signal SG27. The function signal SG27 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU2A.

在一些實施例中,該使用者介面區AP21具有該電使用目標285和該電使用目標286。該使用者輸入操作JU21由該使用者295所執行。該電使用目標285是一第三感測目標和一第三顯示目標的其中之一。在該電使用目標285是該第三感測目標的條件下,該輸入組件440包含該電使用目標285。在該電使用目標285是該第三顯示目標的條件下,該顯示組件460包含該電使用目標285。例如,該第三感測目標是一第三按鈕目標。該第三顯示目標是一第三圖符目標。 In some embodiments, the user interface area AP21 has the electricity usage goal 285 and the electricity usage goal 286 . The user input operation JU21 is performed by the user 295 . The electricity usage target 285 is one of a third sensing target and a third display target. On the condition that the electricity usage object 285 is the third sensing object, the input component 440 includes the electricity usage object 285 . On the condition that the electricity usage object 285 is the third display object, the display component 460 includes the electricity usage object 285 . For example, the third sensing target is a third button target. The third display object is a third icon object.

該電使用目標286是一第四感測目標和一 第四顯示目標的其中之一。在該電使用目標286是該第四感測目標的條件下,該輸入組件440包含該電使用目標286。在該電使用目標286是該第四顯示目標的條件下,該顯示組件460包含該電使用目標286。例如,該第四感測目標是一第四按鈕目標。該第三顯示目標是一第四圖符目標。 The electricity usage target 286 is a fourth sensing target and a The fourth shows one of the targets. On the condition that the electricity usage target 286 is the fourth sensing target, the input component 440 includes the electricity usage target 286 . On the condition that the electricity usage object 286 is the fourth display object, the display component 460 includes the electricity usage object 286 . For example, the fourth sensing target is a fourth button target. The third display object is a fourth icon object.

例如,在該電使用目標285被配置以存在於該輸入組件440的條件下,該電使用目標285接收該使用者輸入操作JU21來導致該輸入組件440提供該操作請求訊號SZ21到該處理單元230。在該電使用目標285被配置以存在於該顯示組件460的條件下,該指向裝置441接收用於選擇該電使用目標285的該使用者輸入操作JU21來導致該指向裝置441提供該操作請求訊號SZ21到該處理單元230。例如,該使用者輸入操作JU21被配置以依靠該指向裝置441和該選擇工具YJ11來選擇該電使用目標285。例如,該選擇工具YJ11是一游標。 For example, under the condition that the electricity usage object 285 is configured to exist in the input component 440, the electricity usage object 285 receives the user input operation JU21 to cause the input component 440 to provide the operation request signal SZ21 to the processing unit 230 . Under the condition that the electricity usage object 285 is configured to exist in the display assembly 460, the pointing device 441 receives the user input operation JU21 for selecting the electricity usage object 285 to cause the pointing device 441 to provide the operation request signal SZ21 to the processing unit 230. For example, the user input operation JU21 is configured to select the electricity usage target 285 by means of the pointing device 441 and the selection tool YJ11. For example, the selection tool YJ11 is a cursor.

在一些實施例中,所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A、該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A、該相對值VK11、該相對值VK12、該操作參考資料XU21和該時間長度範圍界限值對LN1A皆進一步基於所預設的該功能目標識別符HA2T而被儲存在該儲存空間SS11中。該處理單元230進一步基於所獲得的該功能目標識別符HA2T來使用該儲存單元250以存取所預設的該額定範圍界限值對DD1A、該可變物理參數範圍碼UN1A、該相對值VK11、該相對值VK12、該操作參考資料XU21和該時間長度範圍界限值對LN1A的其中任一。 In some embodiments, the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A, the variable physical parameter range code UN1A, the relative value VK11, the relative value VK12, the operation reference XU21 and the time length range limit value pair LN1A is further stored in the storage space SS11 based on the preset functional object identifier HA2T. The processing unit 230 further uses the storage unit 250 to access the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A, the variable physical parameter range code UN1A, the relative value VK11, based on the obtained functional target identifier HA2T. Any one of the relative value VK12 , the operation reference XU21 and the time length range limit value pair LN1A.

所預設的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L、所預設的該控制資料碼CK1T、所預設的該目標範圍界限值對DN1T、所預設的該候選範圍界限值對DN1B和所預設的控制資料碼CK12皆進一步基於所預設的該功能目標識別符HA2T而被儲存在該記憶體空間SA1中。該處理單元230進一步基於所獲得的該功能目標識別符HA2T來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取所預設的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L、所預設的該控制資料碼CK1T、所預設的該目標範圍界限值對DN1T、所預設的該候選範圍界限值對DN1B和所預設的控制資料碼CK12的其中任一。 The preset application range limit value pair DN1L, the preset control data code CK1T, the preset target range limit value pair DN1T, the preset candidate range limit value pair DN1B and the preset The control data code CK12 is further stored in the memory space SA1 based on the preset function object identifier HA2T. The processing unit 230 further uses the memory unit 25Y1 to access the preset application range threshold pair DN1L, the preset control data code CK1T, the preset Any one of the target range limit value pair DN1T, the preset candidate range limit value pair DN1B and the preset control data code CK12.

例如,該第一記憶體位址FN1L基於所預設的該功能目標識別符HA2T、所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L和所預設的該測量範圍界限資料碼類型識別符HN11而被預設。該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11來獲得該功能目標識別符HA2T。該第一資料獲取操作AD11基於所獲得的該功能目標識別符HA2T、所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L和所獲得的該測量範圍界限資料碼類型識別符HN11來獲得該第一記憶體位址FN1L,並基於所獲得的該第一記憶體位址FN1L來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該第一記憶體位置PN1L的所預設的該應用範圍界限值對DN1L。 For example, the first memory address FN1L is preset based on the preset function object identifier HA2T, the preset measurement value application range code EM1L and the preset measurement range limit data type identifier HN11 set up. The processing unit 230 obtains the functional object identifier HA2T in response to the trigger event EQ11 . The first data acquisition operation AD11 obtains the first memory address based on the obtained functional target identifier HA2T, the determined measurement value application range code EM1L and the obtained measurement range limit data type identifier HN11 FN1L, and use the memory unit 25Y1 to access the preset application range limit value pair DN1L stored in the first memory location PN1L based on the obtained first memory address FN1L.

例如,該第二記憶體位址FX1L基於所預設的該功能目標識別符HA2T、所預設的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L和所預設的該控制資料碼類型識別符HK11而被預設。在該處理單元230確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前於 的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下,該處理單元230基於所獲得的該功能目標識別符HA2T、所確定的該測量值應用範圍碼EM1L和所獲得的該控制資料碼類型識別符HK11來獲得該第二記憶體位址FX1L,並基於所獲得的該第二記憶體位址FX1L來使用該記憶體單元25Y1以存取被儲存在該第二記憶體位置PX1L的該控制資料碼CK1T。 For example, the second memory address FX1L is preset based on the preset function object identifier HA2T, the preset measurement value application range code EM1L and the preset control data code type identifier HK11. The processing unit 230 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently at Under the condition of the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the processing unit 230 obtains based on the obtained functional target identifier HA2T, the determined measurement value application range code EM1L and the obtained control data code type identifier HK11 The second memory address FX1L, and use the memory unit 25Y1 to access the control data code CK1T stored in the second memory location PX1L based on the obtained second memory address FX1L.

請參閱第38圖和第39圖。第38圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8047的示意圖。第39圖為繪示於第1圖中的該控制系統801的一實施結構8048的示意圖。如第38圖和第39圖所示,該實施結構8047和該實施結構8048的每一結構包含該控制裝置210、該控制目標裝置330和該伺服器280。該控制裝置210鏈接於該伺服器280。該控制裝置210用於依靠該觸發事件EQ11而控制存在於該控制目標裝置330中的該可變物理參數QU1A,並包含該操作單元297和該儲存單元250。該操作單元297包含該處理單元230和耦合於該處理單元230的一通訊介面單元246。 See Figures 38 and 39. FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8047 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 39 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8048 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1 . As shown in FIG. 38 and FIG. 39 , each structure of the implementation structure 8047 and the implementation structure 8048 includes the control device 210 , the control target device 330 and the server 280 . The control device 210 is linked to the server 280 . The control device 210 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 depending on the trigger event EQ11 , and includes the operation unit 297 and the storage unit 250 . The operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230 and a communication interface unit 246 coupled to the processing unit 230 .

在一些實施例中,該控制裝置210由一控制裝置識別符HA0T所識別。該處理單元230耦合於該伺服器280、該儲存單元250和該通訊介面單元246。該通訊介面單元246耦合於該控制目標裝置330。該通訊介面單元246受該處理單元230控制,並包含該輸出組件450和耦合於該處理單元230的一輸入組件446。該輸出組件450受該處理單元230控制,並是一傳輸組件。該輸入組件446受該處理單元230控制,並是一接收組件。 In some embodiments, the control device 210 is identified by a control device identifier HAOT. The processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280 , the storage unit 250 and the communication interface unit 246 . The communication interface unit 246 is coupled to the control target device 330 . The communication interface unit 246 is controlled by the processing unit 230 and includes the output component 450 and an input component 446 coupled to the processing unit 230 . The output component 450 is controlled by the processing unit 230 and is a transmission component. The input component 446 is controlled by the processing unit 230 and is a receiving component.

該控制目標裝置330包含該操作單元397、該感測單元334、一儲存單元332和該功能目標335。該功能目標335由該功能目標識別符HA2T所識別。該操作單元397包含該處理單元331、該輸出單元338、耦合於該處理單元331的一輸入單元377、和耦合於該處理單元331的一通訊介面單元386。該儲存單元332耦合於該處理單元331。該輸入單元377包含該輸入組件3372和該輸入組件3374。該通訊介面單元386包含該輸入組件3371和一輸出組件3861。該感測單元334、該儲存單元332、該功能目標335、該輸出單元338、該輸入組件3372、該輸入組件3374和該輸入組件3371皆受該處理單元331控制。 The control target device 330 includes the operating unit 397 , the sensing unit 334 , a storage unit 332 and the function target 335 . The functional object 335 is identified by the functional object identifier HA2T. The operation unit 397 includes the processing unit 331 , the output unit 338 , an input unit 377 coupled to the processing unit 331 , and a communication interface unit 386 coupled to the processing unit 331 . The storage unit 332 is coupled to the processing unit 331 . The input unit 377 includes the input component 3372 and the input component 3374 . The communication interface unit 386 includes the input component 3371 and an output component 3861 . The sensing unit 334 , the storage unit 332 , the function object 335 , the output unit 338 , the input component 3372 , the input component 3374 and the input component 3371 are all controlled by the processing unit 331 .

該輸入組件3371是一接收器,並在該第一控制訊號SC11是該電訊號SP11的條件下從該控制裝置210接收該電訊號SP11。該輸出組件3861是一傳輸器,並用於傳輸該第一感測訊號SN11和該第二感測訊號SN12的至少其中之一。該第一控制訊號SC11輸送該控制碼CC1T和該功能目標識別符HA2T。該處理單元331響應該第一控制訊號SC11來從該第一控制訊號SC11獲得該控制碼CC1T和該功能目標識別符HA2T,並基於所獲得的該控制碼CC1T和所獲得的該功能目標識別符HA2T來執行用於控制該輸出單元338的該訊號產生控制GY11。 The input component 3371 is a receiver, and receives the electrical signal SP11 from the control device 210 under the condition that the first control signal SC11 is the electrical signal SP11. The output component 3861 is a transmitter for transmitting at least one of the first sensing signal SN11 and the second sensing signal SN12. The first control signal SC11 conveys the control code CC1T and the functional object identifier HA2T. The processing unit 331 obtains the control code CC1T and the functional object identifier HA2T from the first control signal SC11 in response to the first control signal SC11, and based on the obtained control code CC1T and the obtained functional object identifier HA2T executes the signal generation control GY11 for controlling the output unit 338 .

該輸出單元338響應該訊號產生控制GY11來執行該訊號產生操作BY11以向該功能目標335傳輸功能訊號SG11。該功能目標335包含該支撐部分335K和耦合於該支撐部分335K的該物理參數形成部分3351。例如, 該輸出單元338包含一輸出端338P,該輸出端338P耦合於該功能目標335。所預設的該功能目標識別符HA2T被配置以指示該輸出端338P。該訊號產生控制GY11起到指示該輸出端338P的作用,並用於導致該處理單元331提供一控制訊號SF11到該輸出單元338。該控制訊號SF11起到指示該輸出端338P的作用。該輸出單元338響應該訊號產生控制GY11和該控制訊號SF11的其中之一來執行使用該輸出端338P的該訊號產生操作BY11以向該功能目標335傳輸功能訊號SG11。 The output unit 338 responds to the signal generation control GY11 to execute the signal generation operation BY11 to transmit the function signal SG11 to the function object 335 . The functional object 335 includes the supporting part 335K and the physical parameter forming part 3351 coupled to the supporting part 335K. For example, The output unit 338 includes an output terminal 338P coupled to the functional object 335 . The preset function object identifier HA2T is configured to indicate the output terminal 338P. The signal generation control GY11 is used to indicate the output terminal 338P, and is used to cause the processing unit 331 to provide a control signal SF11 to the output unit 338 . The control signal SF11 serves to indicate the output terminal 338P. The output unit 338 responds to one of the signal generation control GY11 and the control signal SF11 to execute the signal generation operation BY11 using the output terminal 338P to transmit the function signal SG11 to the function object 335 .

該控制目標裝置330進一步包含該支撐部分330K。該支撐部分330K包含該支撐部分335K,並耦合於該操作單元397、該感測單元334和該功能目標335。該感測單元334耦合於該功能目標335。例如,該感測單元334耦合於該支撐部分330K和該支撐部分335K的其中之一。例如,該處理單元230通過該通訊介面單元246而耦合於該網路410。因此,該處理單元230通過該通訊介面單元246和該網路410而耦合於該伺服器280。 The control target device 330 further includes the support portion 330K. The supporting part 330K includes the supporting part 335K, and is coupled to the operating unit 397 , the sensing unit 334 and the functional object 335 . The sensing unit 334 is coupled to the functional object 335 . For example, the sensing unit 334 is coupled to one of the supporting portion 330K and the supporting portion 335K. For example, the processing unit 230 is coupled to the network 410 through the communication interface unit 246 . Therefore, the processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280 through the communication interface unit 246 and the network 410 .

該感測單元334被配置以感測存在於該功能目標335中的該可變物理參數QU1A。該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11來導致該輸出組件450向該輸入組件3371傳輸一感測請求訊號SJ11。該感測請求訊號SJ11輸送該控制裝置識別符HA0T和該功能目標識別符HA2T。該輸入組件3371從該輸出組件450接收該感測請求訊號SJ11。該感測單元334感測該可變物理參數QU1A以產生該第一感測訊號SN11。 The sensing unit 334 is configured to sense the variable physical parameter QU1A present in the functional object 335 . The processing unit 230 responds to the trigger event EQ11 to cause the output component 450 to transmit a sensing request signal SJ11 to the input component 3371 . The sensing request signal SJ11 conveys the control device identifier HA0T and the function object identifier HA2T. The input component 3371 receives the sensing request signal SJ11 from the output component 450 . The sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate the first sensing signal SN11 .

該處理單元331響應該感測請求訊號SJ11來從該感測請求訊號SJ11獲得該控制裝置識別符HA0T和該功能目標識別符HA2T,基於所獲得的該功能目標識別符HA2T來導致該輸出組件3861接收來自該感測單元334的該第一感測訊號SN11,並基於所獲得的該控制裝置識別符HA0T來導致該輸出組件3861向該輸入組件446傳輸包含該第一感測訊號SN11的一請求回應訊號SE21。例如,該處理單元230基於所獲得的該功能目標識別符HA2T來導致該感測單元334感測該可變物理參數QU1A以產生該第一感測訊號SN11,接收該第一感測訊號SN11,並基於所獲得的該功能目標識別符HA2T來提供該第一感測訊號SN11到該輸出組件3861。例如,該處理單元230藉由導致該輸出組件450傳輸該請求回應訊號SE21來回應該感測請求訊號SJ11。 The processing unit 331 obtains the control device identifier HA0T and the functional object identifier HA2T from the sensing request signal SJ11 in response to the sensing request signal SJ11, and causes the output component 3861 based on the obtained functional object identifier HA2T receiving the first sensing signal SN11 from the sensing unit 334, and causing the output component 3861 to transmit a request including the first sensing signal SN11 to the input component 446 based on the obtained control device identifier HA0T Response to signal SE21. For example, the processing unit 230 causes the sensing unit 334 to sense the variable physical parameter QU1A based on the obtained functional object identifier HA2T to generate the first sensing signal SN11, and to receive the first sensing signal SN11, And provide the first sensing signal SN11 to the output component 3861 based on the obtained functional object identifier HA2T. For example, the processing unit 230 responds to the sensing request signal SJ11 by causing the output component 450 to transmit the request response signal SE21.

該輸入組件446從該輸出組件3861接收該請求回應訊號SE21,並響應該請求回應訊號SE21來提供該第一感測訊號SN11到該處理單元230。在該觸發事件EQ11發生的條件下,該處理單元230響應由該輸入組件446所提供的該第一感測訊號SN11來以該指定測量值格式HH11獲得該第一測量值VN11。例如,該操作單元297包含耦合於該處理單元230的該定時器539。該定時器539受該處理單元230控制。 The input component 446 receives the request response signal SE21 from the output component 3861 , and provides the first sensing signal SN11 to the processing unit 230 in response to the request response signal SE21 . When the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 responds to the first sensing signal SN11 provided by the input component 446 to obtain the first measurement value VN11 in the specified measurement value format HH11. For example, the operating unit 297 includes the timer 539 coupled to the processing unit 230 . The timer 539 is controlled by the processing unit 230 .

例如,該處理單元230響應該觸發事件EQ11來執行與一指定時間TD01相關的一時間控制GF11。在該輸入組件446於該指定時間TD01之內從從該輸出組件3861 接收該請求回應訊號SE21的條件下,該處理單元230於該指定時間TD01之內基於所提供的該第一感測訊號SN11來以該指定測量值格式HH11獲得該第一測量值VN11。該時間控制GF11用於控制該定時器539。 For example, the processing unit 230 executes a time control GF11 related to a specified time TD01 in response to the trigger event EQ11. From the input component 446 within the specified time TD01 from the output component 3861 Under the condition of receiving the request response signal SE21 , the processing unit 230 obtains the first measurement value VN11 in the specified measurement value format HH11 based on the provided first sensing signal SN11 within the specified time TD01 . The time control GF11 is used to control the timer 539 .

在該輸入組件446於該指定時間TD01之內未能接收該請求回應訊號SE21的一特定條件下,該處理單元230禁止執行用於檢查該第一測量值VN11和該測量值應用範圍RN1L之間的該第一數學關係KV11的該檢查操作BV11。例如,該指定時間TD01具有一結束時間點。在該處理單元230通過該定時器539響應該結束時間點而確定該特定條件的條件下,該處理單元230禁止執行該檢查操作BV11。在該處理單元230基於該檢查操作BV11而確定該可變物理參數QU1A目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍RD1EL的條件下,該處理單元230於該操作時間TD11之內藉由執行該訊號產生控制GS11來導致該輸出組件450產生該第一控制訊號SC11。 Under a specific condition that the input component 446 fails to receive the request response signal SE21 within the specified time TD01, the processing unit 230 prohibits the execution of the method for checking between the first measured value VN11 and the measured value application range RN1L. The checking operation BV11 of the first mathematical relation KV11. For example, the designated time TD01 has an end time point. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the specific condition through the timer 539 in response to the end time point, the processing unit 230 prohibits the execution of the checking operation BV11. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RD1EL that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in based on the checking operation BV11, the processing unit 230 generates the control GS11 by executing the signal within the operation time TD11 to cause the output component 450 to generate the first control signal SC11.

在一些實施例中,在該處理單元230於該操作時間TD11之內執行該訊號產生控制GS11之後,該感測單元334感測該可變物理參數QU1A以產生該第二感測訊號SN12。該處理單元230響應該訊號產生控制GS11來導致該輸出組件450向該輸入組件3371傳輸一感測請求訊號SJ12。例如,該處理單元230於該操作時間TD11之後的一指定時間TG11之內導致該輸出組件450向該輸入組件3371傳輸該感測請求訊號SJ12。該感測請求訊號SJ12輸送該控制裝置識別符HA0T和該功能目標識別符HA2T。該輸入組 件3371從該輸出組件450接收該感測請求訊號SJ12。 In some embodiments, after the processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS11 within the operation time TD11 , the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate the second sensing signal SN12 . The processing unit 230 generates a control GS11 in response to the signal to cause the output component 450 to transmit a sensing request signal SJ12 to the input component 3371 . For example, the processing unit 230 causes the output component 450 to transmit the sensing request signal SJ12 to the input component 3371 within a specified time TG11 after the operation time TD11 . The sensing request signal SJ12 conveys the control device identifier HA0T and the function object identifier HA2T. The input group The component 3371 receives the sensing request signal SJ12 from the output component 450 .

該處理單元331響應該感測請求訊號SJ12來從該感測請求訊號SJ12獲得該控制裝置識別符HA0T和該功能目標識別符HA2T,基於所獲得的該功能目標識別符HA2T來導致該輸出組件3861從該感測單元334接收該第二感測訊號SN12,並基於所獲得的該控制裝置識別符HA0T來導致該輸出組件3861向該輸入組件446傳輸包含該第二感測訊號SN12的一請求回應訊號SE22。例如,該處理單元230藉由導致該輸出組件450傳輸該請求回應訊號SE22來回應該感測請求訊號SJ12。 The processing unit 331 obtains the control device identifier HA0T and the functional object identifier HA2T from the sensing request signal SJ12 in response to the sensing request signal SJ12, and causes the output component 3861 based on the obtained functional object identifier HA2T Receive the second sensing signal SN12 from the sensing unit 334, and cause the output component 3861 to transmit a request response including the second sensing signal SN12 to the input component 446 based on the obtained control device identifier HAOT Signal SE22. For example, the processing unit 230 responds to the sensing request signal SJ12 by causing the output component 450 to transmit the request response signal SE22.

該輸入組件446從該輸出組件3861接收該請求回應訊號SE22該第二感測訊號SN12,並響應該請求回應訊號SE22來提供該第二感測訊號SN12到該處理單元230。在該處理單元230於該操作時間TD11之後的該指定時間TG12之內接收該第二感測訊號SN12的條件下,該處理單元230響應由該輸入組件446所提供的該第二感測訊號SN12來以該指定測量值格式HH11獲得該第二測量值VN12。例如,該指定時間TG12於該指定時間TG11之後。例如,該第一控制訊號SC11是一物理參數控制訊號。該感測請求訊號SJ11是一物理參數感測請求訊號。 The input component 446 receives the request response signal SE22 and the second sensing signal SN12 from the output component 3861 , and provides the second sensing signal SN12 to the processing unit 230 in response to the request response signal SE22 . Under the condition that the processing unit 230 receives the second sensing signal SN12 within the specified time TG12 after the operation time TD11, the processing unit 230 responds to the second sensing signal SN12 provided by the input component 446 to obtain the second measured value VN12 in the specified measured value format HH11. For example, the specified time TG12 is after the specified time TG11. For example, the first control signal SC11 is a physical parameter control signal. The sensing request signal SJ11 is a physical parameter sensing request signal.

提出於此之本揭露多數變形例與其他實施例,將對於熟習本項技藝者理解到具有呈現於上述說明與相關圖式之教導的益處。因此,吾人應理解到本揭露並非受限於所揭露之特定實施例,而變形例與其他實施例意圖是包含在以下的申請專利範圍之範疇之內。 Many variations and other embodiments of the present disclosure presented herein will be appreciated by those skilled in the art having the benefit of the teachings presented in the foregoing description and associated drawings. Therefore, it should be understood that the present disclosure is not limited to the disclosed specific embodiments, and modifications and other embodiments are intended to be included within the scope of the following claims.

210:控制裝置 210: Control device

297:操作單元 297: Operation unit

330:控制目標裝置 330: Control the target device

334:感測單元 334: Sensing unit

801:控制系統 801: Control system

EQ11:觸發事件 EQ11: Triggering Events

KV11:第一數學關係 KV11: First Mathematical Relations

QU1A:可變物理參數 QU1A: variable physical parameters

RD1EL:物理參數應用範圍 RD1EL: Application range of physical parameters

RD1ET:物理參數目標範圍 RD1ET: Physical parameter target range

RN1L:測量值應用範圍 RN1L: Application range of measured values

SC11:第一控制訊號 SC11: The first control signal

SN11:第一感測訊號 SN11: The first sensing signal

VN11:第一測量值 VN11: first measured value

Claims (20)

一種用於控制一照明裝置的控制裝置,其中該照明裝置的一可變光學參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍和不同於該物理參數應用範圍的一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,該控制裝置包含:一感測單元,感測該可變光學參數以產生一感測訊號;以及一操作單元,耦合於該感測單元,並包含一觸控螢幕,其中:該觸控螢幕包含是一按鈕目標的一感測目標;在用於選擇該感測目標的一使用者輸入操作導致是一使用者輸入事件的一觸發事件發生的條件下,該操作單元響應該感測訊號來獲得一測量值;以及在該操作單元藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一數學關係而確定該可變光學參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍的條件下,該操作單元被配置以向該照明裝置傳輸一控制訊號,其中該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數從該物理參數應用範圍進入該物理參數目標範圍。 A control device for controlling a lighting device, wherein a variable optical parameter of the lighting device is based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measurement value application range and a physical parameter target range different from the physical parameter application range And being characterized, the control device includes: a sensing unit that senses the variable optical parameter to generate a sensing signal; and an operating unit that is coupled to the sensing unit and includes a touch screen, wherein: The touch screen includes a sensing target that is a button target; under the condition that a user input operation for selecting the sensing target results in a trigger event that is a user input event, the operating unit responds to the sensing a signal to obtain a measurement value; and under the condition that the operation unit determines the application range of the physical parameter in which the variable optical parameter is currently located by examining a mathematical relationship between the measurement value and the application range of the measurement value , the operating unit is configured to transmit a control signal to the lighting device, wherein the control signal is used to cause the variable optical parameter to enter the physical parameter target range from the physical parameter application range. 如請求項1所述的控制裝置,其中:該測量值應用範圍由一測量值應用範圍碼所代表;該控制訊號基於在該物理參數目標範圍之內的一指定物理參數而被產生;該照明裝置包含一物理參數形成區,其中該物理參數形成區具有該可變光學參數,並是一環境區;該控制裝置進一步包含耦合於該處理單元的一儲存單 元;該儲存單元儲存基於該指定物理參數而被預先設定的一控制資料碼;以及在該操作單元由於檢查該數學關係而確定該可變光學參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍的條件下,該操作單元使用該測量值應用範圍碼以從該儲存單元獲得所儲存的該控制資料碼,並基於所獲得的該控制資料碼來產生該控制訊號。 The control device as claimed in claim 1, wherein: the measurement value application range is represented by a measurement value application range code; the control signal is generated based on a specified physical parameter within the physical parameter target range; the lighting The device includes a physical parameter forming area, wherein the physical parameter forming area has the variable optical parameter and is an environment area; the control device further includes a storage unit coupled to the processing unit element; the storage unit stores a control data code preset based on the specified physical parameter; and under the condition that the operating unit determines the application range of the physical parameter that the variable optical parameter is currently in due to checking the mathematical relationship, The operation unit uses the measured value application range code to obtain the stored control data code from the storage unit, and generates the control signal based on the obtained control data code. 一種用於控制一照明裝置的方法,其中該照明裝置的一可變光學參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍和不同於該物理參數應用範圍的一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,該方法包含下列步驟:提供一控制裝置,其中該控制裝置包含一觸控螢幕,且該觸控螢幕包含是一按鈕目標的一感測目標;感測該可變光學參數以產生一感測訊號;在用於選擇該感測目標的一使用者輸入操作導致是一使用者輸入事件的一觸發事件發生的條件下,藉由使用該控制裝置來響應該感測訊號而獲得一測量值;在該可變光學參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一數學關係而被該控制裝置確定的條件下,藉由使用該控制裝置來向該照明裝置傳輸一控制訊號,其中該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數從該物理參數應用範圍進入該物理參數目標範圍。 A method for controlling a lighting device, wherein a variable optical parameter of the lighting device is determined based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measurement value application range and a physical parameter target range different from the physical parameter application range Characterized, the method comprises the steps of: providing a control device, wherein the control device includes a touch screen, and the touch screen includes a sensing target that is a button target; sensing the variable optical parameter to generate a sensing signal; under the condition that a user input operation for selecting the sensing target causes a trigger event which is a user input event to occur, a sensing signal is obtained by using the control device in response to the sensing signal measured value; under the condition that the application range of the physical parameter in which the variable optical parameter is currently located is determined by the control means by examining a mathematical relationship between the measurement value and the application range of the measurement value, by using the control A device is used to transmit a control signal to the lighting device, wherein the control signal is used to cause the variable optical parameter to enter the physical parameter target range from the physical parameter application range. 一種用於控制一照明裝置的方法,其中該照明裝置的一 可變光學參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍和不同於該物理參數應用範圍的一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,該方法包含下列步驟:提供一控制裝置,其中該控制裝置包含一狀態改變偵測器和耦合於該狀態改變偵測器的一操作單元;感測該可變光學參數以產生一感測訊號;藉由使用該操作單元,響應一狀態改變事件而產生一觸發訊號,其中該狀態改變事件是該照明裝置的一可變物理參數從一非特徵物理參數到達狀態被改變成一實際特徵物理參數到達狀態;藉由使用該操作單元,接收該觸發訊號;藉由使用該操作單元,響應所接收的該觸發訊號來使用該感測訊號以獲得一測量值;以及在該可變光學參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一數學關係而被該操作單元確定的條件下,藉由使用該控制裝置來向該照明裝置傳輸一控制訊號,其中該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數從該物理參數應用範圍進入該物理參數目標範圍。 A method for controlling a lighting device, wherein a The variable optical parameter is characterized based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measurement value application range and a physical parameter target range different from the physical parameter application range, the method comprising the steps of: providing a control device, wherein The control device includes a state change detector and an operation unit coupled to the state change detector; senses the variable optical parameter to generate a sensing signal; responds to a state change event by using the operation unit And generate a trigger signal, wherein the state change event is that a variable physical parameter of the lighting device is changed from a non-characteristic physical parameter arrival state to an actual characteristic physical parameter arrival state; by using the operation unit, the trigger signal is received ; by using the operating unit, using the sensing signal in response to the received trigger signal to obtain a measurement value; and by checking the measurement value and the physical parameter application range where the variable optical parameter is currently in By using the control device to transmit a control signal to the lighting device under the conditions determined by the operating unit using a mathematical relationship between measurement value ranges, wherein the control signal is used to cause the variable optical parameter to change from the physical The parameter application range enters the physical parameter target range. 一種用於控制一照明裝置的控制裝置,其中該照明裝置的一可變光學參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍和不同於該物理參數應用範圍的一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,該控制裝置包含:一操作單元;一感測單元,耦合於該操作單元,並感測該可變光學 參數以產生一感測訊號;以及一狀態改變偵測器,耦合於該操作單元,並響應一狀態改變事件來產生一觸發訊號,其中:該狀態改變事件是該照明裝置的一可變物理參數從一非特徵物理參數到達狀態被改變成一實際特徵物理參數到達狀態;以及該操作單元接收該觸發訊號,響應所接收的該觸發訊號來使用該感測訊號以獲得一測量值,並在該操作單元藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一數學關係而確定該可變光學參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍的條件下被配置以向該照明裝置傳輸一控制訊號,其中該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數從該物理參數應用範圍進入該物理參數目標範圍。 A control device for controlling a lighting device, wherein a variable optical parameter of the lighting device is based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measurement value application range and a physical parameter target range different from the physical parameter application range And being characterized, the control device includes: an operating unit; a sensing unit, coupled to the operating unit, and senses the variable optical parameters to generate a sensing signal; and a state change detector coupled to the operating unit and responding to a state change event to generate a trigger signal, wherein: the state change event is a variable physical parameter of the lighting device is changed from a non-characteristic physical parameter arrival state to an actual characteristic physical parameter arrival state; and the operating unit receives the trigger signal, uses the sensing signal to obtain a measurement value in response to the received trigger signal, and operates during the operation The unit is configured to transmit a control signal to the lighting device under conditions of the physical parameter application range in which the variable optical parameter is determined by examining a mathematical relationship between the measurement value and the measurement value application range, wherein The control signal is used to cause the variable optical parameter to enter the target range of the physical parameter from the application range of the physical parameter. 如請求項5所述的控制裝置,其中:該物理參數目標範圍由一目標範圍碼所指示;該測量值應用範圍由一測量值應用範圍碼所代表;該控制訊號基於在該物理參數目標範圍之內的一指定物理參數而被產生;該照明裝置包含具有該可變光學參數的一物理參數形成區、和耦合於該物理參數形成區的一物理參數應用區,其中該物理參數形成區是一第一環境區,且該物理參數應用區具有該可變物理參數並是一負載區、一顯示區、一感測區、一功率供應區和一第二環境區的其中之一;該控制裝置進一步包含耦合於該操作單元的一儲存單元; 該儲存單元儲存基於該指定物理參數而被預先設定的一控制資料碼;以及在該操作單元由於檢查該數學關係而確定該可變光學參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍的條件下,該操作單元執行使用該測量值應用範圍碼的一科學計算以獲得該目標範圍碼,基於所獲得的該目標範圍碼來從該儲存單元獲得所儲存的該控制資料碼,並基於所獲得的該控制資料碼來產生該控制訊號。 The control device as described in claim 5, wherein: the physical parameter target range is indicated by a target range code; the measurement value application range is represented by a measurement value application range code; the control signal is based on the physical parameter target range A specified physical parameter within is generated; the lighting device includes a physical parameter forming area having the variable optical parameter, and a physical parameter application area coupled to the physical parameter forming area, wherein the physical parameter forming area is a first environment area, and the physical parameter application area has the variable physical parameter and is one of a load area, a display area, a sensing area, a power supply area and a second environment area; the control The device further includes a storage unit coupled to the operation unit; The storage unit stores a control data code preset based on the specified physical parameter; and under the condition that the operating unit determines that the variable optical parameter is currently in the physical parameter application range due to checking the mathematical relationship, the operation the unit performs a scientific calculation using the measured value application range code to obtain the target range code, obtains the stored control data code from the storage unit based on the obtained target range code, and based on the obtained control data code to generate the control signal. 一種用於控制一照明裝置的控制裝置,其中該照明裝置的一可變光學參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍和不同於該物理參數應用範圍的一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,該控制裝置包含:一功能開關,用於提供一觸發訊號;一感測單元,感測該可變光學參數以產生一感測訊號;以及一操作單元,耦合於該功能開關和該感測單元,在該操作單元接收該觸發訊號的一觸發事件發生的條件下響應該感測訊號來獲得一測量值,並在該操作單元藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一數學關係而確定該可變光學參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍的條件下被配置以向該照明裝置傳輸一控制訊號,其中該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數從該物理參數應用範圍進入該物理參數目標範圍。 A control device for controlling a lighting device, wherein a variable optical parameter of the lighting device is based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measurement value application range and a physical parameter target range different from the physical parameter application range And being characterized, the control device includes: a function switch for providing a trigger signal; a sensing unit for sensing the variable optical parameter to generate a sensing signal; and an operating unit coupled to the function switch and the sensing unit, responding to the sensing signal to obtain a measurement value under the condition that a trigger event of the trigger signal is received by the operation unit occurs, and by checking the measurement value and the application range of the measurement value at the operation unit It is configured to transmit a control signal to the lighting device under the condition of determining the application range of the physical parameter that the variable optical parameter is currently in through a mathematical relationship, wherein the control signal is used to cause the variable optical parameter to change from the The application range of the physical parameter enters the target range of the physical parameter. 如請求項7所述的控制裝置,其中:該物理參數目標範圍由一目標範圍碼所指示; 該測量值應用範圍由一測量值應用範圍碼所代表;該控制訊號基於在該物理參數目標範圍之內的一指定物理參數而被產生;該照明裝置包含一物理參數形成區,其中該物理參數形成區具有該可變光學參數,並是一環境區;該控制裝置進一步包含耦合於該操作單元的一儲存單元;該儲存單元儲存基於該指定物理參數而被預先設定的一控制資料碼;以及在該操作單元由於檢查該數學關係而確定該可變光學參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍的條件下,該操作單元執行使用該測量值應用範圍碼的一科學計算以獲得該目標範圍碼,基於所獲得的該目標範圍碼來從該儲存單元獲得所儲存的該控制資料碼,並基於所獲得的該控制資料碼來產生該控制訊號。 The control device as claimed in claim 7, wherein: the physical parameter target range is indicated by a target range code; The measurement value application range is represented by a measurement value application range code; the control signal is generated based on a specified physical parameter within the target range of the physical parameter; the lighting device includes a physical parameter forming area, wherein the physical parameter The forming area has the variable optical parameter and is an environment area; the control device further includes a storage unit coupled to the operation unit; the storage unit stores a control data code preset based on the specified physical parameter; and On the condition that the operating unit determines the physical parameter application range in which the variable optical parameter is currently located due to checking the mathematical relationship, the operating unit performs a scientific calculation using the measured value application range code to obtain the target range code, The stored control data code is obtained from the storage unit based on the obtained target range code, and the control signal is generated based on the obtained control data code. 一種用於控制一照明裝置的控制裝置,其中該照明裝置的一可變光學參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍和不同於該物理參數應用範圍的一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,該控制裝置包含:一處理單元;一感測單元,耦合於該處理單元,並感測該可變光學參數以產生一感測訊號;以及一使用者介面區,具有一電應用目標,其中:該電應用目標耦合於該處理單元,並是一按鈕目標和一圖符目標的其中之一; 一觸發事件依靠該電應用目標而發生,並導致該處理單元接收一操作請求訊號;該處理單元響應該操作請求訊號來使用該感測訊號以獲得一測量值,並在該處理單元藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一數學關係而確定該可變光學參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍的條件下被配置以導致一控制訊號向該照明裝置被傳輸;以及該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數從該物理參數應用範圍進入該物理參數目標範圍。 A control device for controlling a lighting device, wherein a variable optical parameter of the lighting device is based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measurement value application range and a physical parameter target range different from the physical parameter application range And being characterized, the control device includes: a processing unit; a sensing unit coupled to the processing unit and sensing the variable optical parameter to generate a sensing signal; and a user interface area having an electrical an application object, wherein: the electronic application object is coupled to the processing unit and is one of a button object and an icon object; A trigger event occurs depending on the electrical application object and causes the processing unit to receive an operation request signal; the processing unit uses the sensing signal to obtain a measurement value in response to the operation request signal, and the processing unit checks the A mathematical relationship between the measurement and the range of application of the measurement determines the range of application of the physical parameter in which the variable optical parameter is currently located, configured to cause a control signal to be transmitted to the lighting device; and the control The signal is used to cause the variable optical parameter to enter the target range of the physical parameter from the application range of the physical parameter. 如請求項9所述的控制裝置,其中:該物理參數目標範圍由一目標範圍碼所指示;該測量值應用範圍由一測量值應用範圍碼所代表;該控制訊號基於在該物理參數目標範圍之內的一指定物理參數而被產生;該照明裝置包含一物理參數形成區,其中該物理參數形成區具有該可變光學參數,並是一環境區;該控制裝置進一步包含耦合於該處理單元的一儲存單元、和耦合於該處理單元的一輸出單元;該儲存單元儲存基於該指定物理參數而被預先設定的一控制資料碼;以及在該處理單元由於檢查該數學關係而確定該可變光學參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍的條件下,該處理單元執行使用該測量值應用範圍碼的一科學計算以獲得該目標範圍碼,基於所獲得的該目標範圍碼來從該儲存單元獲得所儲存的該控制資料碼,並基於所獲得的該控制資料碼 來使該輸出單元產生該控制訊號。 The control device as described in claim 9, wherein: the physical parameter target range is indicated by a target range code; the measurement value application range is represented by a measurement value application range code; the control signal is based on the physical parameter target range A specified physical parameter within is generated; the lighting device includes a physical parameter forming area, wherein the physical parameter forming area has the variable optical parameter, and is an environment area; the control device further includes coupling to the processing unit A storage unit, and an output unit coupled to the processing unit; the storage unit stores a control data code that is preset based on the specified physical parameter; and the variable is determined in the processing unit by checking the mathematical relationship Under the condition that the optical parameter is currently in the application range of the physical parameter, the processing unit performs a scientific calculation using the measurement value application range code to obtain the target range code, which is obtained from the storage unit based on the obtained target range code The stored control data code, based on the obtained control data code to make the output unit generate the control signal. 一種用於控制一照明裝置的方法,其中該照明裝置的一可變光學參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍和不同於該物理參數應用範圍的一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,該方法包含下列步驟:提供一控制裝置,其中該控制裝置包含具有一電應用目標的一使用者介面區、和耦合於該電應用目標的一處理單元,且該電應用目標是一按鈕目標和一圖符目標的其中之一;感測該可變光學參數以產生一感測訊號;依靠該電應用目標,導致一觸發事件發生;依靠該觸發事件,導致該處理單元接收一操作請求訊號;藉由使用該處理單元,響應該操作請求訊號來使用該感測訊號以獲得一測量值;以及在該可變光學參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一數學關係而被該處理單元確定的條件下,藉由使用該控制裝置來向該照明裝置傳輸一控制訊號,其中該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數從該物理參數應用範圍進入該物理參數目標範圍。 A method for controlling a lighting device, wherein a variable optical parameter of the lighting device is determined based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measurement value application range and a physical parameter target range different from the physical parameter application range Characterized, the method comprises the steps of: providing a control device, wherein the control device includes a user interface area having an electrical application object, and a processing unit coupled to the electrical application object, and the electrical application object is one of a button target and an icon target; sensing the variable optical parameter to generate a sensing signal; dependent on the electrical application target, causing a trigger event to occur; dependent on the trigger event, causing the processing unit to receive a an operation request signal; using the sensing signal to obtain a measurement value in response to the operation request signal by using the processing unit; and by checking the measurement value and the physical parameter application range where the variable optical parameter is currently in The measurement values apply a mathematical relationship between the ranges determined by the processing unit by using the control device to transmit a control signal to the lighting device, wherein the control signal is used to cause the variable optical parameter to change from the The application range of the physical parameter enters the target range of the physical parameter. 一種用於控制一照明裝置的方法,其中該照明裝置的一可變光學參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍和不同於該物理參數應用範圍的一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,該方法包含下列步驟: 提供一控制裝置,其中該控制裝置包含一功能開關和耦合於該功能開關的一操作單元;感測該可變光學參數以產生一感測訊號;藉由使用該功能開關,提供一觸發訊號;在該操作單元接收該觸發訊號的一觸發事件發生的條件下,藉由使用該操作單元來響應該感測訊號而獲得一測量值;以及在該可變光學參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一數學關係而被該操作單元確定的條件下,藉由使用該控制裝置來向該照明裝置傳輸一控制訊號,其中該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數從該物理參數應用範圍進入該物理參數目標範圍。 A method for controlling a lighting device, wherein a variable optical parameter of the lighting device is determined based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measurement value application range and a physical parameter target range different from the physical parameter application range is characterized, the method includes the following steps: providing a control device, wherein the control device includes a function switch and an operation unit coupled to the function switch; sensing the variable optical parameter to generate a sensing signal; providing a trigger signal by using the function switch; Obtaining a measurement value by using the operating unit to respond to the sensing signal under the condition that a trigger event occurs in which the operating unit receives the trigger signal; and in the application range of the physical parameter in which the variable optical parameter is currently located Using the control device to transmit a control signal to the lighting device under conditions determined by the operating unit by checking a mathematical relationship between the measured value and the range of application of the measured value, wherein the control signal is used to cause The variable optical parameter enters the target range of the physical parameter from the application range of the physical parameter. 一種用於控制一照明裝置的控制裝置,其中該照明裝置的一可變光學參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍和不同於該物理參數應用範圍的一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,該控制裝置包含:一使用者介面區,具有一電應用目標,其中該電應用目標是一顯示目標和一感測目標的其中之一;一感測單元,感測該可變光學參數以產生一感測訊號;以及一處理單元,耦合於該電應用目標和該感測單元,在用於選擇該電應用目標的一使用者輸入操作導致是一使用者輸入事件的一觸發事件發生的條件下響應該感測訊號來獲得一測量值,並在該處理單元藉由檢查該測量值和該測 量值應用範圍之間的一數學關係而確定該可變光學參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍的條件下被配置以導致一控制訊號向該照明裝置被傳輸,其中該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數從該物理參數應用範圍進入該物理參數目標範圍。 A control device for controlling a lighting device, wherein a variable optical parameter of the lighting device is based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measurement value application range and a physical parameter target range different from the physical parameter application range And being characterized, the control device includes: a user interface area having an electrical application object, wherein the electrical application object is one of a display object and a sensing object; a sensing unit that senses the electrical application object changing an optical parameter to generate a sensing signal; and a processing unit, coupled to the electrical application object and the sensing unit, upon a user input operation for selecting the electrical application object resulting in a user input event A measurement value is obtained in response to the sensing signal under the condition that a trigger event occurs, and the processing unit checks the measurement value and the measurement value A mathematical relationship between the application ranges of magnitudes is configured to cause a control signal to be transmitted to the lighting device under the conditions of the physical parameter application range in which the variable optical parameter is currently located, wherein the control signal is used to cause the The variable optical parameter enters the target range of the physical parameter from the application range of the physical parameter. 如請求項13所述的控制裝置,其中:該物理參數目標範圍由一目標範圍碼所指示;該測量值應用範圍由一測量值應用範圍碼所代表;該觸發事件導致該處理單元接收一操作請求訊號;該處理單元響應該操作請求訊號來使用該感測訊號以獲得該測量值;該控制訊號基於在該物理參數目標範圍之內的一指定物理參數而被產生;該照明裝置包含一物理參數形成區,其中該物理參數形成區具有該可變光學參數,並是一環境區;該控制裝置進一步包含耦合於該處理單元的一儲存單元、和耦合於該處理單元的一輸出單元;該儲存單元儲存基於該指定物理參數而被預先設定的一控制資料碼;以及在該處理單元由於檢查該數學關係而確定該可變光學參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍的條件下,該處理單元執行使用該測量值應用範圍碼的一科學計算以獲得該目標範圍碼,基於所獲得的該目標範圍碼來從該儲存單元獲得所儲存的該控制資料碼,並基於所獲得的該控制資料碼來使該輸出單元產生該控制訊號。 The control device according to claim 13, wherein: the physical parameter target range is indicated by a target range code; the measurement value application range is represented by a measurement value application range code; the trigger event causes the processing unit to receive an operation request signal; the processing unit responds to the operation request signal to use the sensing signal to obtain the measured value; the control signal is generated based on a specified physical parameter within the physical parameter target range; the lighting device includes a physical A parameter forming area, wherein the physical parameter forming area has the variable optical parameter and is an environment area; the control device further includes a storage unit coupled to the processing unit, and an output unit coupled to the processing unit; the The storage unit stores a control data code preset based on the specified physical parameter; and under the condition that the processing unit determines that the variable optical parameter is currently in the application range of the physical parameter due to checking the mathematical relationship, the processing unit performing a scientific calculation using the measured value application range code to obtain the target range code, obtaining the stored control data code from the storage unit based on the obtained target range code, and based on the obtained control data code to make the output unit generate the control signal. 一種用於控制一照明裝置的方法,其中該照明裝置的一可變光學參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍和不同於該物理參數應用範圍的一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,該方法包含下列步驟:提供一控制裝置,其中該控制裝置包含具有一電應用目標的一使用者介面區,且該電應用目標是一顯示目標和一感測目標的其中之一;感測該可變光學參數以產生一感測訊號;在用於選擇該電應用目標的一使用者輸入操作導致是一使用者輸入事件的一觸發事件發生的條件下,藉由使用該控制裝置來響應該感測訊號而獲得一測量值;以及在該可變光學參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一數學關係而被該控制裝置確定的條件下,藉由使用該控制裝置來向該照明裝置傳輸一控制訊號,其中該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數從該物理參數應用範圍進入該物理參數目標範圍。 A method for controlling a lighting device, wherein a variable optical parameter of the lighting device is determined based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measurement value application range and a physical parameter target range different from the physical parameter application range As characterized, the method comprises the steps of: providing a control device, wherein the control device includes a user interface area having an electrical application object, and the electrical application object is one of a display object and a sensing object ; sensing the variable optical parameter to generate a sensing signal; under the condition that a user input operation for selecting the electrical application object results in a trigger event being a user input event, by using the control means to obtain a measurement value in response to the sensing signal; and the variable optical parameter is controlled by checking a mathematical relationship between the measurement value and the measurement value application range in which the physical parameter application range is currently located Under conditions determined by the device, a control signal is transmitted to the lighting device by using the control device, wherein the control signal is used to cause the variable optical parameter to enter the physical parameter target range from the physical parameter application range. 一種用於控制一照明裝置的控制裝置,其中該照明裝置的一可變光學參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍和不同於該物理參數應用範圍的一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,該控制裝置包含:一操作單元;一感測單元,耦合於該操作單元,並感測該可變光學參數以產生一感測訊號;以及一狀態改變偵測器,耦合於該操作單元,並響應一狀 態改變事件來產生一觸發訊號,其中:該狀態改變事件是一可變時間長度從一非特徵物理參數到達狀態被改變成一實際特徵物理參數到達狀態;以及該操作單元接收該觸發訊號,響應所接收的該觸發訊號來使用該感測訊號以獲得一測量值,並在該操作單元藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一數學關係而確定該可變光學參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍的條件下被配置以向該照明裝置傳輸一控制訊號,其中該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數從該物理參數應用範圍進入該物理參數目標範圍。 A control device for controlling a lighting device, wherein a variable optical parameter of the lighting device is based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measurement value application range and a physical parameter target range different from the physical parameter application range And being characterized, the control device includes: an operating unit; a sensing unit, coupled to the operating unit, and senses the variable optical parameter to generate a sensing signal; and a state change detector, coupled to the the operating unit, and responds to a status A state change event is used to generate a trigger signal, wherein: the state change event is that a variable time length is changed from a non-characteristic physical parameter arrival state to an actual characteristic physical parameter arrival state; and the operation unit receives the trigger signal and responds to the receiving the trigger signal to use the sensing signal to obtain a measurement value, and determining the current position of the variable optical parameter by checking a mathematical relationship between the measurement value and the measurement value application range in the operation unit The physical parameter application range is configured to transmit a control signal to the lighting device, wherein the control signal is used to cause the variable optical parameter to enter the physical parameter target range from the physical parameter application range. 一種用於控制一照明裝置的控制裝置,其中該照明裝置的一可變光學參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍和不同於該物理參數應用範圍的一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,該測量值應用範圍由一測量值應用範圍碼所代表,且與該物理參數目標範圍相關的一控制資料碼基於在該物理參數目標範圍之內的一指定物理參數而被預設,該控制裝置包含:一感測單元,感測該可變光學參數以產生一感測訊號;以及一操作單元,耦合於該感測單元,在一觸發事件發生的條件下響應該感測訊號來獲得一測量值,在該操作單元藉由於檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一數學關係而確定該可變光學參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍的條件下使用該測量值應用範圍碼以獲得所預設的該控制資料碼,並基於所獲得的該控制資料碼來向該照明裝置傳 輸一控制訊號,其中該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數從該物理參數應用範圍進入該物理參數目標範圍。 A control device for controlling a lighting device, wherein a variable optical parameter of the lighting device is based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measurement value application range and a physical parameter target range different from the physical parameter application range To be characterized, the measurement value application range is represented by a measurement value application range code, and a control data code associated with the physical parameter target range is predicted based on a specified physical parameter within the physical parameter target range It is assumed that the control device includes: a sensing unit that senses the variable optical parameter to generate a sensing signal; and an operating unit that is coupled to the sensing unit and responds to the sensing when a trigger event occurs. signal to obtain a measurement value, which is used under the condition that the operating unit determines the application range of the physical parameter in which the variable optical parameter is currently located by examining a mathematical relationship between the measurement value and the application range of the measurement value Value application range code to obtain the preset control data code, and based on the obtained control data code to send to the lighting device A control signal is input, wherein the control signal is used to cause the variable optical parameter to enter the physical parameter target range from the physical parameter application range. 如請求項17所述的控制裝置,其中:該感測單元包含一光偵測器,並藉由使用該光偵測器來感測該可變光學參數以產生該感測訊號;該操作單元包含具有一電應用目標的一使用者介面區,其中該電應用目標是一顯示目標和一感測目標的其中之一;該觸發事件是該操作單元接收用於選擇該電應用目標的一使用者輸入操作的一使用者輸入事件,並導致該操作單元產生一操作請求訊號;該操作單元響應該操作請求訊號來使用該感測訊號以獲得該測量值;該照明裝置包含一物理參數形成區,其中該物理參數形成區具有該可變光學參數,並是一環境區;該控制裝置進一步包含耦合於該操作單元的一儲存單元;該儲存單元儲存該控制資料碼;以及在該操作單元由於檢查該數學關係而確定該可變光學參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍的條件下,該操作單元使用該測量值應用範圍碼以從該儲存單元獲得所儲存的該控制資料碼,並基於所獲得的該控制資料碼來產生該控制訊號。 The control device as described in claim 17, wherein: the sensing unit includes a light detector, and the sensing signal is generated by using the light detector to sense the variable optical parameter; the operating unit Including a user interface area with an electrical application object, wherein the electrical application object is one of a display object and a sensing object; the trigger event is that the operation unit receives a user for selecting the electrical application object A user input event of an input operation, and causes the operation unit to generate an operation request signal; the operation unit responds to the operation request signal to use the sensing signal to obtain the measured value; the lighting device includes a physical parameter forming area , wherein the physical parameter forming area has the variable optical parameter and is an environment area; the control device further includes a storage unit coupled to the operation unit; the storage unit stores the control data code; and in the operation unit due to Under the condition of checking the mathematical relationship to determine that the variable optical parameter is currently in the application range of the physical parameter, the operation unit uses the measurement value application range code to obtain the stored control data code from the storage unit, and based on the The obtained control data code is used to generate the control signal. 一種用於控制一照明裝置的方法,其中該照明裝置的一可變光學參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理 參數應用範圍和不同於該物理參數應用範圍的一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,該測量值應用範圍由一測量值應用範圍碼所代表,且與該物理參數目標範圍相關的一控制資料碼基於在該物理參數目標範圍之內的一指定物理參數而被預設,該方法包含下列步驟:提供一控制裝置;感測該可變光學參數以產生一感測訊號;在一觸發事件發生的條件下,藉由使用該控制裝置來響應該感測訊號而獲得一測量值;在該可變光學參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一數學關係而被該控制裝置確定的條件下,藉由使用該控制裝置來使用該測量值應用範圍碼以獲得所預設的該控制資料碼;以及藉由使用該控制裝置,基於所獲得的該控制資料碼來向該照明裝置傳輸一控制訊號,其中該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數從該物理參數應用範圍進入該物理參數目標範圍。 A method for controlling a lighting device, wherein a variable optical parameter of the lighting device is based on a physical The parameter application range is characterized by a physical parameter target range different from the physical parameter application range, the measurement value application range is represented by a measurement value application range code, and a control data code related to the physical parameter target range Preset based on a specified physical parameter within a target range of the physical parameter, the method comprises the steps of: providing a control device; sensing the variable optical parameter to generate a sensing signal; upon occurrence of a trigger event Under the condition, by using the control device to respond to the sensing signal to obtain a measurement value; in the application range of the physical parameter in which the variable optical parameter is currently located, by checking the distance between the measurement value and the application range of the measurement value A mathematical relationship determined by the control device, by using the control device to use the measured value application range code to obtain the preset control data code; and by using the control device, based on the obtained The control data code is used to transmit a control signal to the lighting device, wherein the control signal is used to cause the variable optical parameter to enter the physical parameter target range from the physical parameter application range. 一種用於控制一照明裝置的方法,其中該照明裝置的一可變光學參數基於由一測量值應用範圍所代表的一物理參數應用範圍和不同於該物理參數應用範圍的一物理參數目標範圍而被特徵化,該方法包含下列步驟:提供一控制裝置,其中該控制裝置包含一狀態改變偵測器和耦合於該狀態改變偵測器的一操作單元;感測該可變光學參數以產生一感測訊號;藉由使用該操作單元,響應一狀態改變事件而產生一 觸發訊號,其中該狀態改變事件是一可變時間長度從一非特徵物理參數到達狀態被改變成一實際特徵物理參數到達狀態;藉由使用該操作單元,接收該觸發訊號;藉由使用該操作單元,響應所接收的該觸發訊號來使用該感測訊號以獲得一測量值;以及在該可變光學參數目前處於的該物理參數應用範圍藉由檢查該測量值和該測量值應用範圍之間的一數學關係而被該操作單元確定的條件下,藉由使用該控制裝置來向該照明裝置傳輸一控制訊號,其中該控制訊號用於導致該可變光學參數從該物理參數應用範圍進入該物理參數目標範圍。 A method for controlling a lighting device, wherein a variable optical parameter of the lighting device is determined based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measurement value application range and a physical parameter target range different from the physical parameter application range Characterized, the method comprises the steps of: providing a control device, wherein the control device includes a state change detector and an operating unit coupled to the state change detector; sensing the variable optical parameter to generate a sensing signal; by using the operating unit, a state change event is generated in response to a A trigger signal, wherein the state change event is a variable time length from a non-characteristic physical parameter arrival state is changed to an actual characteristic physical parameter arrival state; by using the operation unit, receiving the trigger signal; by using the operation unit , using the sensing signal to obtain a measurement value in response to receiving the trigger signal; and by checking the measurement value and the measurement value application range between the measurement value and the measurement value application range in which the variable optical parameter is currently located. Under the condition of a mathematical relationship determined by the operating unit, by using the control device to transmit a control signal to the lighting device, wherein the control signal is used to cause the variable optical parameter to enter the physical parameter from the application range of the physical parameter target range.
TW110132919A 2019-12-31 2019-12-31 Control device and method for controlling illuminating device TWI798812B (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
TW110132919A TWI798812B (en) 2019-12-31 2019-12-31 Control device and method for controlling illuminating device

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
TW110132919A TWI798812B (en) 2019-12-31 2019-12-31 Control device and method for controlling illuminating device

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW202201358A TW202201358A (en) 2022-01-01
TWI798812B true TWI798812B (en) 2023-04-11

Family

ID=80787984

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW110132919A TWI798812B (en) 2019-12-31 2019-12-31 Control device and method for controlling illuminating device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
TW (1) TWI798812B (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TW484116B (en) * 1999-10-28 2002-04-21 Powersmart Inc Time constrained sensor date retrieval system and method
CN101930215A (en) * 2009-06-22 2010-12-29 费希尔-罗斯蒙特系统公司 Adaptive controller based on the model parameter of continuous scheduling
TW201437843A (en) * 2013-03-29 2014-10-01 Gemtek Technology Co Ltd Personal parameters automatic synchronizing system for and related devices
US20170140125A1 (en) * 2015-11-13 2017-05-18 Reciprocal Labs Corporation (Dba Propeller Health) Real time adaptive controller medication dosing
TW201731346A (en) * 2015-11-23 2017-09-01 Ge照明解決方案公司 Wireless behavioral feedback for active lighting control

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TW484116B (en) * 1999-10-28 2002-04-21 Powersmart Inc Time constrained sensor date retrieval system and method
CN101930215A (en) * 2009-06-22 2010-12-29 费希尔-罗斯蒙特系统公司 Adaptive controller based on the model parameter of continuous scheduling
TW201437843A (en) * 2013-03-29 2014-10-01 Gemtek Technology Co Ltd Personal parameters automatic synchronizing system for and related devices
US20170140125A1 (en) * 2015-11-13 2017-05-18 Reciprocal Labs Corporation (Dba Propeller Health) Real time adaptive controller medication dosing
TW201731346A (en) * 2015-11-23 2017-09-01 Ge照明解決方案公司 Wireless behavioral feedback for active lighting control

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW202201358A (en) 2022-01-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11823673B2 (en) Voice input processing method and electronic device for supporting the same
US10102723B2 (en) Dynamic haptic generation based on detected video events
CN107005796B (en) Mobile terminal and method for determining whether to perform task of electronic device
CN109416676B (en) Method for determining role of electronic device and electronic device thereof
JP2018513464A (en) Wearable health interface for controlling IoT (Internet of Things) devices
US11073942B2 (en) Touch recognition method and electronic device executing same
EP3474517B1 (en) Electronic device for controlling iot device to correspond to state of external electronic device and operation method thereof
KR20170093470A (en) Method for providing stress management servece and electronic device thereof
US10447785B2 (en) Digital device and method for controlling same
CN104395842A (en) Control signal based on a command tapped by a user
KR102468820B1 (en) Device For Providing Health Management Service and Method Thereof
CN110412884A (en) Household appliance control method, device, electronic equipment and storage medium
TWI798812B (en) Control device and method for controlling illuminating device
KR20170081925A (en) Method for storing image and electronic device thereof
TWI734335B (en) Control device and method for controlling variable physical parameter
WO2021136260A1 (en) Control apparatus and method for controlling variable physical parameters
TWI791391B (en) Control device and system and method for controlling variable physical parameter
TWI741471B (en) Control target device and method for controlling variable physical parameter
TWI775592B (en) Control device and method for controlling illuminating device
WO2021136253A1 (en) Functional apparatus and method for controlling variable physical parameters
TWI742502B (en) Control device and method for controlling variable physical parameter
TWI734334B (en) Control target device and method for controlling variable physical parameter
TW202314412A (en) Control device and method for controlling variable physical parameter
CN113126486B (en) Control device and method for controlling variable physical parameters
US20230045302A1 (en) Server and control method therefor